PCjs Machines
Home of the original IBM PC emulator for browsers.
PC-SIG Diskette Library (Disk #2949)
[PCjs Machine "ibm5150"]
Loading /machines/pcx86/ibm/5150/cga/256kb/machine.xml...
BACKUP.DOC
BACKUP PROCEDURES
Operation of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program involves the creation of
files that represent a lot of work on your part.
Files associated with this package are created or modified when you: edit,
delete, or modify (synonym or subject) reports; create a new seminar; parse
another version or portion of the US Constitution, or; edit syllable data.
TCNbP Company recommends that you periodically backup your data files
associated with the TCN program.
To emerge unscathed from an otherwise catastrophic hard drive or floppy
drive head crash, backup your files on the occasions and in the manner
described in this file. Of course, you are free to backup more often if it
gives you a warm feeling. But don't backup any less often. And if you have
utilities other then DOS to backup your hard drive, by all means use them if
you care to. Use the information in this file to determine what to back up.
If your computer has a magnetic tape, you can use it to backup your TCN data
files.
Otherwise, information is presented under the heading MAKING BACKUP TARGETS
to help you prepare backup targets.
Details of when, which diskette(s), and how to backup vary depending on
whether you operate from a 5-1/4" floppy drive, a 3-1/2" floppy drive, or a
hard drive.
Refer to the procedure in this file that applies to the manner in which you
operate The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program and backup your TCN package
diskettes when and as instructed.
When to Backup
The titles of the following paragraphs describe an event after which you
should backup certain TCN files. Each paragraph explains WHAT to back up.
Following changes made using Main Menu options 3, 4, or 5, backup:
5-1/4 inch Index diskettes (2 of 4 and 3 of 4)
3-1/2 inch Program diskette and User Documentation diskette (1 of 2 and
2 of 2)
Hard drive install directory and all its subdirectories
97
After Using Main Menu option 10, backup
5-1/4 inch Program Diskette and Index Diskettes
3-1/2 inch Program diskette and User Documentation diskette (1 of 2 and
2 of 2)
Hard drive install directory and all its subdirectories
After Updating Syllable data with Main Menu option 11, backup
5-1/4 inch Program Diskette
3-1/2 inch Program Diskette
Hard drive install directory and all its subdirectories
Back Up Procedure for Floppy Diskettes
On the occasions listed above, copy your working copy of a diskette onto the
backup target for that diskette. Use the DOS DISKCOPY command.
Back Up Procedure for Hard Drives
On the occasions listed above, copy your install directory and all its files
and subdirectories onto a backup target diskette or diskettes. Use the DOS
BACKUP command with the /S option. Have a blank formatted diskette handy in
case you run out of room on your backup diskettes. This works for
everybody. If you have DOS 4.0 or later, BACKUP will automatically format
and continue the backup process without ill effect. DOS 3.3 has a /F option
that will format an unformatted diskette and continue. Earlier versions
will fail and you have to start over.
You may wonder why backing up the install directory and everything below it
is always recommended when you can easily see by the information for
diskettes that not everything has to be backed up. The answer to that is,
it doesn't take very long anyway and it makes the recovery process much
simpler.
Recovery Procedure for Floppies
If a working copy of a floppy diskette becomes defective, discard it. Get
another diskette that formats flawlessly. Label it. Copy your backup copy
of the defective diskette onto the new diskette.
98
Recovery Procedures for Hard Drives
If you lose data on a hard drive, get the drive fixed.
Use the DOS RESTORE command to transfer the contents of your backup
diskette(s) back onto your hard drive.
MAKING BACKUP TARGETS
Refer to the following materials to make backup targets for your TCN program
package.
Floppy Targets
If you operate your TCN program on floppy disks, use the DOS DISKCOPY
command to make a duplicate of each diskette in the package. Label each
duplicate diskette sufficiently to identify:
a. which diskette it backs up
b. that it is the backup diskette, not the working copy
Hard Disk Targets
Format diskettes to be used as a target with the DOS BACKUP command. Label
the diskettes sufficiently to identify:
a. that it is a backup target for the TCN program
b. the install drive and directory.
c. how many backup target diskettes you are using for the TCN program
(four 5 1/4" targets or two 3 1/2" targets is sufficient to start
with, though more may be required later if you do a lot of work with
the TCN program)
d. the sequence number of each target
e. if it is formatted for high density
99
CONTENTS.DOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
File Names Start Pages
BACKUP.DOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
CONTENTS.DOC (Table of Contents)
COVER.DOC (Cover Page)
DISKROOM.DOC 92
EDITOR.DOC 81
EVAL.DOC 1
FUNCKEYS.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
MAINMENU.DOC 15
MM1.DOC 22
MM10.DOC 65
MM11.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
MM12.DOC 74
MM13.DOC 75
MM2.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MM3.DOC 26
MM4.DOC 29
MM5.DOC 40
MM6.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
MM7.DOC 58
MM8.DOC 63
MM9.DOC 64
PREFACE.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
USATEXT.DOC 85
Contents by File Name and Pages
FILENAME: PREFACE.DOC
INTRODUCTION i
GENERAL PROGRAM DESCRIPTION i
PROGRAM LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Extent of Error Recovery ii
KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
DETAILED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
I. Parse text files containing US Constitution which produces: iv
II. Access to Lexicography Data Base for Review, Update, Output iv
III. A Four-Level Data Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
A. Version or portion v
1. Seminar v
i). Subject v
a). Heading v
b). List of related words v
c). Compilation of related phrases v
d). Comments v
ii). Synonym vi
a). Heading vi
b). Word list vi
c). Compilation of related phrases vi
d). Comments vi
IV. Notebook Functions vi
A. Access output described in I.A. for review. vi
B. Create Topic Heading vi
C. Access of Topic Headings for Review,
Update, Deletion, Output vi
D. Compile Index of Phrases Related to Accessed Topic . . . . vii
E. Edit User Comments Related to Accessed Topic vii
TEXT OF THE UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION IN ASCII FILES vii
FILENAME: EVAL.DOC
EVALUATION MATERIALS 1
GENERAL 1
PARSE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NOTEBOOK FUNCTIONS 2
LEXICOGRAPHY FUNCTIONS 2
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EVALUATION EXERCISES 3
ON-SCREEN EXERCISES 3
CROSS REFERENCING EXERCISES 3
Cross Reference Exercises for Synonyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Creating a Synonym Heading 4
Now to access the heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Deleting cross references to all occurrences of a word . . . . . . 7
Now to cross reference a specific occurrence of a word 7
Deleting a reference to a specific occurrence of a word . . . . . . 8
CREATING A SUBJECT HEADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
A Timely Exercise 9
CONTINUING YOUR EVALUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Continuing Evaluation of the Notebook Function 10
Review of Provided On-Screen Comments 10
Producing Your Own Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lexicography Functions 11
Word and Clause Profiles 11
Parameter Searches 11
Vocabulary Lists 11
Parse Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Registration 12
Continuing Your Study of the Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FILENAME: MAINMENU.DOC
MAIN MENU 15
Exit. 15
Choose version or portion. 15
Choose Seminar. 15
Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Synonym. 16
Parameter Searches, Word. 16
Parameter Searches, Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Profiles, word use. 17
Profiles, clauses. 17
Analyze source file. 17
Enter Syllable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Options. 18
Choose Vocabulary List. 18
Shareware Information. 18
FILENAME: FUNCKEYS.DOC
FUNCTION KEYS 19
F1 Help. 19
F2 Function Key. 19
F3 Function Key. 19
F4 DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
F5 Xport. 20
F6 Find. 20
F7 Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
F8 New. 21
F9 21
F10 TGKEY. 21
FILENAME: MM1.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 1, EXIT 22
FILENAME: MM2.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 2, Version or Portion 23
Description of the Screen 23
[File Name] 23
[Comments] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
[ Source Path ] 24
[ Output Path ] 24
Selecting a Version or Portion 24
FILENAME: MM3.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 3, Choose Seminar 26
What is a Seminar? 26
Screen Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Accessing a Seminar 27
Creating a Seminar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
FILENAME: MM4.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SUBJECTS 29
Creating a Subject Heading 29
Accessing a Subject Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reviewing the Selected Heading 30
Reviewing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key 31
F2 from the Selected Heading Field 31
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column . . . . . . . . . . 32
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key 32
F3 from the Selected Heading Field 32
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column . . . . . . . . . . 33
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading 33
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word 34
Adding Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading 35
Deleting Individual Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word 36
Deleting the Accessed Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Printing your Cross References 37
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File . . . . . . . . . 38
FILENAME: MM5.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SYNONYMS 40
Creating a Synonym Heading 40
Accessing a Synonym Heading 40
Reviewing the Selected Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reviewing Notes 41
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
F2 from the Title Block of the Middle Column 42
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column 42
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
F3 from the Title Block of the Middle Column 43
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column . . . . . . . . . . 44
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading 44
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word 44
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word 45
Adding Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading 46
Deleting Individual Cross References 46
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word . . . . . . . . . 47
Deleting the Accessed Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Printing your Cross References 48
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File . . . . . . . . . 49
FILENAME: MM6.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 6 51
Description of the Interactive Screen 51
Parameter Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Syllables Area 52
Letters Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Occurrences Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Place Area 54
Word Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Performing a Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
FILENAME: MM7.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 7 58
Description of the Interactive Screen 58
Parameter Field Descriptions 58
Syllables Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Letters Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Words Area 60
Place Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Performing a Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
FILENAME: MM8.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 8 63
The Secondary Menu 63
The Reports 63
Secondary Menu Option 4 63
FILENAME: MM9.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 9 64
The Secondary Menu 64
The Reports 64
FILENAME: MM10.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 10, ANALYZING (PARSING) A SOURCE FILE 65
1) Source file preparation. 65
2) Diskette preparation. 65
3) Analysis dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4) Analysis. 66
Analysis Dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1) Source Text File Drive Specifier Prompt. 67
3) Source Text File Name Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4) Output Drive Prompt. 68
5) Output Path Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6) Comments Prompt. 69
Analysis of the Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
FILENAME: MM11.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 11 72
The Secondary Menu 72
Entering Syllable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
FILENAME: MM12.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 12 74
Name of Install Directory 74
Colors 74
User Documentation Drive 74
FILENAME: MM13.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 13 75
The Secondary Menu 75
Words In Order Of Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Words Sorted By Number Of Syllables 76
Alphabetical List, Capitalized Words and Uncapitalized Words Merged 76
Alphabetical List, Caps separate from Not caps, plus Numbers, Punct 77
Words That Appear In Uppercase Only 77
Words That Appear In Lower Case Only 77
Words That Appear In Both Upper And Lower Case . . . . . . . . . . 78
Words Sorted By Number Of Times They Are Used 78
Words Sorted By Number Of Letters 78
Reviewing the Vocabulary Lists 78
LEXICOGRAPHY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Length 79
Syllables 79
Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Place 80
Reference 80
FILENAME: EDITOR.DOC
COMMENT EDITOR 82
Accessing the Comment Editor 82
Exiting the Comment Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using the Comment Editor 83
Suggestions for Content of Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Saving Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Printing Your Comments 85
Exporting Your Comments 85
FILENAME: USATEXT.DOC
THE CONSTITUTION ON DISK 86
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVIDED TEXT OF THE CONSTITUTION 86
Hyphenation 86
Initial Capitalization of Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Archaic Spellings 87
Punctuation 87
Indentation 87
Article Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Section Titles 88
Amendment Titles 88
Inclusion of Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Calligraphy 89
Unresolved Questions 89
MODIFICATION OF PROVIDED FILES CONTAINING CONSTITUTIONAL TEXT . . . . 90
Roman Numerals 90
Additional Words 90
Why Modify the Provided Source Files? 90
Use of CONSTITUTION, ARTICLE, and AMENDMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7
Use of Section or SECTION 91
Hyphenation 91
Effects of Vertical Spacing 91
Use of Horizontal (Linear) Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Carriage Returns and Horizontal Spaces in the Signature Section 92
Closing Carriage Returns 92
Use of ASCII File 92
FILENAME: DISKROOM.DOC
EFFICIENT UTILIZATION OF DISK SPACE 93
5-1/4" Floppy Tips 93
3-1/2" Floppy Tips 93
Hard Disk Tips 93
DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS 93
The Simple Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
When to Check Space Left on Floppies 94
What You Need to Know 94
Absolute Minimum Required Space 94
Estimation of Additional Space Requirements 94
Sample Space Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Space Requirements for Seminars 95
Consequences of a Disk full Error 95
Summary 95
FILENAME: BACKUP.DOC
BACKUP PROCEDURES 97
When to Backup 97
Following changes made using Main Menu options 3, 4, or 5, backup: 97
After using Main Menu option 10, backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
After updating Syllable data with Main Menu option 11, backup 98
Back Up Procedure for Floppy Diskettes 98
Back Up Procedure for Hard Drives 98
Recovery Procedure for Floppies 98
Recovery Procedures for Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
MAKING BACKUP TARGETS 99
Floppy Targets 99
Hard Disk Targets 99
8
COVER.DOC
User Documentation
for
The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program
Copyright 1989 - 1992 by TCNbP Company
Shareware Version 1.22
DISKROOM.DOC
EFFICIENT UTILIZATION OF DISK SPACE
This file contains information about efficient disk space utilization with
The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program. Tips for saving space on 5-1/4"
floppies, 3-1/2" floppies, and fixed (hard) drives are provided.
5-1/4" Floppy Tips
With version 1.22, you can delete the GO.EXE file.
You can also make another copy of the Index (Main) Diskette (2 of 4) and
delete some of the seminar directories on each of them. The seminar
directories have a path name "VERSION1\SMNR#" where # is an Arabic numeral
between 1 and 6, inclusive. You can put 1 - 3 on one diskette and 4 - 6
on the other. Do NOT delete the same seminar from both diskettes. When
you access the various seminars, the swap index diskette prompt will be
repeated until you get the right diskette in the floppy drive.
NOTE: The information in the preceding paragraph is for the benefit of
those users who have no fixed drive or a very crowded one. TCNbP Company
recommends a hard drive for use of the TCN program beyond evaluation.
3-1/2" Floppy Tips
You can delete the GO.EXE file from your working copy. Restore it from
your original if you ever need it.
You can copy the HELP.TCN, HELPINDX.TCN files to other floppies and erase
them from your working copy.
You now have more available room on diskette 1. You can fill it up, but
you'll have to do a LOT of work.
Hard Disk Tips
About all hard disk users can do is erase GO.EXE from the directory you
installed to on the fixed disk.
DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A full disk error is a fatal error. You will get kicked out of the
program. Depending on what file is being saved when a disk gets full, you
could lose all your subject cross references or all your synonym cross
references including notes in a seminar. The program provides no warning.
You have to manually monitor available space on a diskette to make the
93
appropriate decisions. The following information tells you what you need
to know to prevent loss of data resulting from a full disk error.
The Simple Rule
A simple rule to follow regarding diskette use is 1 version or portion per
360 K 5.25 inch diskette, 2 per 720 K 3.5 inch diskette, or 3 per 1.44 M
3.5 inch diskette. This rule will always work. It results in decent
diskette utilization (better than 50% if version includes complete text of
Constitution) while leaving adequate room for additional comments and
cross references that you generate manually.
If you are analyzing small portions of the text of the Constitution, you
may wish to place more than one version or portion on a diskette. There
is an absolute limit of 9, 18, or 36 such portions per 360K, 720K, or 1.44
M diskettes, respectively. Placing this number of portions on each size
diskette leaves very little room for exported files, or for additional
comments and cross references that you generate manually. Practical
maximums are 4, 12, and 27.
When to Check Space Left on Floppies
The above guidelines give you a good way to estimate the number of
diskettes you will need over the life of this program. There are two
times that more specific information should be considered. One of these
times is before you analyze a version or portion of the Constitution using
Main Menu option 10. Another time is before creating another seminar or
adding a lot of notes.
What You Need to Know
The specific information that you need is the amount of unused space on
the diskette. If the diskette has just been formatted and no data is
saved on it, the amount of unused space is equal to the capacity of the
diskette. Otherwise, you can use the DOS DIR command (or a disk status
information feature of your desk top software) to obtain this information.
Absolute Minimum Required Space
If the diskette has less than 40,000 bytes available, there is no way you
can save the output produced by Main Menu option 10 on it. Don't even
try. Even if you are analyzing a portion of the Constitution with only
one sentence in it, this much disk space is required.
Estimation of Additional Space Requirements
94
To estimate additional space required by larger portions of the
Constitution, determine the size of the source file using the DOS DIR
command (or a related feature of your desktop), and double the size. This
is the additional space. To determine total estimated space, add the
doubled size to 40,000. This number is an absolute minimum. To give
yourself a little working room, add 20,000. If the diskette has less
space than this, clear off some space by deleting unrelated files
including exported files, if any, (don't delete files with the file type
.lex or .lxx), or use another diskette.
Sample Space Calculation
Example calculation using USACONST.DOC with a size of 51,352 bytes.
40,000 absolute minimum
104,000 2 times 51,352 (rounded up to 52,000)
20,000 working room
-----------
164,000 minimum practical space required.
Space Requirements for Seminars
Concerning notes and seminars, 20,000 bytes is the minimum practical space
to open a new seminar. Additionally, allow 1,000 bytes of disk space for
each 20 lines of notes that you estimate you will write.
Consequences of a Disk full Error
Remember, a disk full error is a fatal error. It can result in the loss
of a considerable amount of work. It is up to you to manually monitor the
available disk space to prevent this error. This is a simple check that
can be performed from DOS or your desk top before starting the program.
If you are generous with spare space, you can prevent this error with
occasional checks.
Summary
The purchased materials require about 1.5 Megabytes of disk space install.
If you intend to analyze different versions, additional space is required.
The files generated by the program as a result of analyzing the
Constitution occupy 40 Kilobytes of disk space (minimum, even if the
portion or version consists of one word) to 164 Kilobytes (worst case,
unless amendments are added).
95
If you don't write very many notes, the disk space used by the cross
reference functions is nominal. Each line of notes requires 41 bytes of
disk space. (This holds even if the entire line is blank and even if it
was created using the down arrow key. Don't worry, the PG DN key will not
create blank lines.) Once a line has been created, it's there whether it
was created by wrapping from a previous line or with the down arrow key.
That 41 bytes of disk space is forever taken. If you don't enter a line,
no disk space is used.
You can enter 190 lines per subject or synonym. This is a maximum of 8
Kilobytes per subject or synonym. You can enter up to 200 subjects or
2,000 synonyms. Hence, if you type in the maximum allowed notes for 45
subjects or synonyms, you can exceed the capacity of a 5.25 inch diskette
forcing you to use a fixed drive. The same thing happens at 90 subjects
with maximum notes for a 3.5 inch diskette. In practice, this is a lot of
notes and most users will not encounter this limit.
96
EDITOR.DOC
COMMENT EDITOR
This file contains information about the comment editor for Main Menu
options 4 and 5, Subjects and Synonyms, respectively. The comment editor is
the part of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program that lets you type in your
thoughts concerning interpretation of the Constitution. Your comments can
be typed in the rightmost column of the secondary screen for Subjects. Your
comments for Synonyms are entered in the rightmost column of the Synonym
screen.
Accessing the Comment Editor
Accessing the Comment Editor is slightly different for Subjects and
Synonyms. A procedure for each follows.
To access the Comment Editor for Subjects, proceed as follows:
1) Select Main Menu option 4.
2) Access a topic. (Highlight a selection and press ENTER.)
3) Press the TAB key until the flashing cursor appears in the top left
corner of the rightmost column of the screen.
To access the Comment Editor for Synonyms, proceed as follows:
1) Select Main Menu option 5.
2) Access a topic.
a) Press the TAB key once. The highlighting moves to the second
column.
NOTE: If the Highlighting does not move to the second column, it
is because no Synonym headings have been created. To create a
Synonym heading, select a word of interest in the left column and
press ENTER. Then start at step a.
b) Highlight the desired heading.
c) Press ENTER.
3) Press the TAB key until the flashing cursor appears in the top left
corner of the rightmost column of the screen.
82
Exiting the Comment Editor
To exit the Comment Editor, press the TAB key or the ESC key. In either
case, the flashing cursor disappears from the rightmost column and
highlighting appears in the leftmost column.
NOTE: On older computers, a delay up to 15 seconds can occur when you exit
the comment editor. This delay is normal for the TCN program. Your
computer is not locked up. This delay never occurs when you only browse
comments without making changes. It occurs as a seminar gets full of
comments. If you add or delete one or more lines of comments in one of the
first titles (as determined by where it is displayed) in the list of titles,
the delay is most pronounced.
Using the Comment Editor
The following material describes modes of the Comment Editor and actions of
the various keys.
The Comment Editor operates in an insert mode or a strikeover mode
controlled by the INSERT key. An underline cursor indicates insert
mode. On most computers strikeover mode is indicated by a rectangular
cursor. On some computers, the strikeover cursor is a line at the top
of the letter and another line at the bottom of the letter.
Each letter you type appears where the cursor is and the cursor is
moved to the right one space or to the next line.
In the insert mode, when you type a character, text beginning at the
cursor and the cursor itself moves one space to the right and the
character you typed appears where the cursor was. When appropriate,
words are wrapped to the next line and the cursor moves to the next
line.
In the strikeover mode, when you type a character, the character you
type replaces whatever was there and the cursor moves to the right one
space or to the next line.
If you press the ENTER key in the insert mode, a new line is created
with text at and to the right of the cursor on it. If the line is not
wrapped properly, place the cursor past the end of the last word on it
and press the DELETE key.
If you press the ENTER key in the strikeover mode, the cursor is moved
to the beginning of the next line. If you press the ENTER key while
the cursor is on the last line of your comments, a new line is created.
83
To delete a character in either mode, place the flashing cursor under
the character and press the DELETE key. Use the BACK SPACE key to
erase the character to the left of the cursor.
To delete a blank line in either mode, place the flashing cursor
anywhere on the line and press the DELETE key. If the last line of
your comments is a blank line, it cannot be deleted.
To control the position of the flashing cursor without typing text, use
the HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN, and the cursor movement (arrow) keys.
Until you enter comments for a topic, only the ENTER key, the right
arrow key and the down arrow cursor keys will move the cursor.
If you have two or more lines of comments (even if they are blank), the
HOME key and the END key will move the flashing cursor to the first and
last line, respectively, of your comments. The column is not affected
with the END key. The HOME key moves the flashing cursor to the first
character in the first line.
If the flashing cursor is not in the first column of the first line,
the left arrow key (or CTRL-L combination) will move the cursor to the
left one space or up one line.
If the flashing cursor is not on the first line of comments, the up
arrow key will move the cursor toward the first line one line at a
time. The cursor stays in the same column.
Until you have 14 or more lines of comments, the PG UP key and the
PG DN key have no effect.
Once you type 14 or more lines, the PG UP key will move the text 13
lines toward the first line. If the first line of comments is on the
screen, the PG UP key has no effect. The cursor stays in the same
column on the same line of the screen.
Once you type 14 or more lines, the PG DN key will move the text 13
lines toward the last line. If the last line of comments is on the
screen, the PG DN key has no effect. The cursor stays in the same
column on the same line of the screen.
Suggestions for Content of Your Comments
While the cross referencing functions of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program
limit you strictly to internal parts of the Constitution, the Comment Editor
does not so restrict you.
In your comments, you can interpret indexes related to the current
topic.
84
You can cite other topics indexed in the same seminar.
You can cite other topics indexed in different seminars.
You can cite topics indexed in other versions or portions of the
Constitution.
You can cite relevant Court cases or Supreme Court cases.
You can cite titles, authors, and pages of relevant research material.
Saving Your Comments
To save your comments, press the ESC key until the Main Menu appears. If
desired, you can access your comments again for further editing. Do not
turn your computer off after entering comments until you exit from The
CONSTITUTION Notebook Program using Main Menu option 1. If you do, results
are unpredictable.
Printing Your Comments
To print your comments, press the TAB key as required to highlight the title
of your topic and press the F7 key. Your comments are printed following the
title of the topic, the list of related words, and the list of indexed
phrases.
Exporting Your Comments
To export your comments, press the TAB key as required to highlight the
title of your topic and press the F5 key. Prepare the appropriate disk
drive if exporting to a floppy drive; enter a drive specifier, path,
filename and extension and press ENTER. Your comments are exported to the
file you specified. The format of the export file is the same as the
printout obtained using the F7 key as described in the preceding procedure.
That is, your comments follow the title of the topic, the list of related
words, and the list of indexed phrases.
When accessing the exported file with a word processing application, specify
carriage return at the end of lines if prompted for this information.
If you erroneously press the F5 key, press the ESC key to exit without
exporting a topic. Control of the program resumes with the highlighting on
the title of your topic.
85
EVAL.DOC
EVALUATION MATERIALS
The following materials contain information and exercises to help you
evaluate the TCN program.
EVALUATION MATERIALS 1
GENERAL 1
PARSE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NOTEBOOK FUNCTIONS 2
LEXICOGRAPHY FUNCTIONS 2
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EVALUATION EXERCISES 3
ON-SCREEN EXERCISES 3
CROSS REFERENCING EXERCISES 3
Cross Reference Exercises for Synonyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Creating a Synonym Heading 4
Now to access the heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Deleting cross references to all occurrences of a word . . . . . . 7
Now to cross reference a specific occurrence of a word 7
Deleting a reference to a specific occurrence of a word . . . . . . 8
CREATING A SUBJECT HEADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
A Timely Exercise 9
CONTINUING YOUR EVALUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Continuing Evaluation of the Notebook Function 10
Review of Provided On-Screen Comments 10
Producing Your Own Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lexicography Functions 11
Word and Clause Profiles 11
Parameter Searches 11
Vocabulary Lists 11
Parse Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Registration 12
Continuing Your Study of the Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
GENERAL
The TCN program has 14 options on the Main Menu that can be grouped as
follows:
1. Parse engine
2. Notebook functions
3. Lexicography functions (analysis based on word complexity or use)
4. Miscellaneous
A brief description of each group follows.
1
PARSE ENGINE
Main Menu option 10 is the parse engine.
You don't have to know anything about the parse engine at this point
except that it exists. It is provided with the TCN package so you can
update your package if the Constitution is amended. It is discussed here
to support the descriptions of the notebook functions and the lexicography
functions.
For input, the parse engine uses an ASCII file that contains the text of
the Constitution. Preparation of this file is covered in MM10.DOC and
USATEXT.DOC. So you can begin evaluating the TCN program without learning
all that material, 3 complete sets of parse engine output are provided
with this evaluation copy of the TCN program.
The output of the parse engine includes encrypted files that contain the
text of the Constitution and an exhaustive index of every word. The
notebook functions use this part of the parse engine output.
Other output produced by the parse engine is used by the lexicography
functions.
NOTEBOOK FUNCTIONS
Main Menu options 2, 3, 4, and 5 are the notebook functions. These are
the functions that lend the word "Notebook" to the title of the TCN
program. You can use the notebook functions to:
1. Review provided comments about the Constitution and rights.
2. Modify, output (to ASCII file or printer), or delete provided
comments about the Constitution and rights.
3. Create, review, modify, output (to ASCII file or printer), or
delete your own comments about the Constitution and rights.
The TCN program's interactive search and indexing features are part of the
notebook functions.
The notebook functions are introduced by exercises in this file.
LEXICOGRAPHY FUNCTIONS
Main Menu options 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, and 13 are the lexicography functions.
You can use the lexicography functions to:
1. Review or output (to ASCII file or printer)
word profile data
2
clause profile data
vocabulary lists
2. Review, edit, or output (to ASCII file or printer) syllable data
3. Review or output (to ASCII file or printer)
lists of WORDS that fit user specified lexicography parameters
lists of CLAUSES that fit user specified lexicography parameters
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
Main Menu options 1 and 14 are miscellaneous functions. Main Menu option
1 lets you exit the TCN program. Main Menu option 14 tells you how to
register the TCN program.
EVALUATION EXERCISES
The following materials contain a battery of exercises to introduce you to
the notebook functions of the TCN program.
ON-SCREEN EXERCISES
A set of on-screen exercises is part of the TCN program itself. These
exercises are intended to help you get started with the program. To
access the on-screen exercises, proceed as follows:
1) Start the TCN program as described previously.
2) When the Main Menu appears, type 4 and press ENTER.
3) Notice that the title 'Exercises' is highlighted.
4) Press ENTER.
5) Press the TAB key twice and scroll through the exercises using the
PG UP, PG DN, HOME and END keys. Try some of the things the exercises
suggest.
CROSS REFERENCING EXERCISES
Generally, cross referencing procedures are analogous for synonyms and
subjects. The four major steps are:
1) Create a heading, if it does not already exist.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Review the heading while adding or deleting related references or
comments.
3
4) Exit to the Main Menu to save changes.
Steps 3 and 4 are identical for subjects and synonyms. Steps 1 and 2 are
analogous, but not identical. The on-screen exercises have taken you
through step 2 and the review portion of step 3 for subjects. The
following exercises take you through all 4 steps for synonyms. Following
that, a final exercise shows you how to create a subject heading.
Specific procedures for subjects and synonyms are contained in files
MM4.DOC and MM5.DOC, respectively.
Cross Reference Exercises for Synonyms
If you have just performed the on-screen exercises, you have to get the
default seminar to begin this exercise. The following steps do that.
They are not required steps in typical cross referencing procedures.
1) Select option 3 from the Main Menu.
2) Press the HOME key to highlight the top seminar, Sample Subjects
and Synonyms Cross References.
3) Press ENTER.
Ok, we are back at the Main Menu now ready to begin the synonym cross
referencing exercise. The following steps create a heading for the word
Power. Other parts of the exercise will cross reference synonyms to the
word power as used in the Constitution. As an introduction to the
comments editor, you will be provided with a question to type in.
Creating a Synonym Heading
1) Select option 5 from the Main Menu.
NOTE: On 2 of the lowest lines of the screen just above the function
key mnemonics, messages appear to advise you what functions are
available. Note these messages as you go through the procedure.
They will help you operate the program without documentation.
2) When the SYNONYMS screen appears, press the F6 key.
3) Type the word power and press ENTER.
Notice the words power, Power, Powers, powers at the top of the
left column. You are already familiar with use of the F6 key
from the on-screen exercises.
4) Using the up or down arrow keys, highlight the word Power,
singular, initial capital letter.
4
5) Press ENTER.
Notice that the word Power is inserted above the word rights in
the middle column. Its placement is explained in MM5.DOC. The
heading is now created.
Now to access the heading . . .
1) Press the TAB key once.
Notice the highlighting is removed from the left column and now
appears in the middle column.
2) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight the word Power in the
middle column.
3) Press ENTER.
Notice the list of words in the middle column disappears and the
title block over the middle column changes. The highlighting is
removed from the middle column and now appears in the title block
of the middle column.
The heading is accessed. In this exercise, we accessed the
heading immediately after creating it. This is perfectly ok, but
it is not required. You can do other things first if you want
to.
Now to cross reference some phrases . . .
1) First, press the F2 key.
Don't be alarmed by the blank screen. When F2 is pressed while
the heading in the title block is highlighted, all cross
referenced phrases are displayed. Since you haven't cross
referenced anything yet, a blank screen shows exactly what is
cross referenced.
2) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
3) Press the TAB key once and notice it goes into the comments
column. It skips the middle column since the middle column is
presently empty.
4) Press the TAB key and notice the highlighting returns to the left
column. If you are following this exercise exactly, the word Power
is highlighted. The program keeps track of this sort of thing for
you.
5) Press ENTER.
Notice the word Power appears in the middle column. But isn't
that what already happened? Well, yes and no. To see the
difference . . .
5
6) Press the TAB key once. The highlighting moves to the title
block of the middle column.
7) Press F2. Hey, no blank screen this time!
All occurrences of the word Power are now cross referenced as
synonyms to the heading Power. Of course, any word can be
considered a synonym to itself. So doing this is ok, but it is
not required. You identify synonyms to the program; it does not
find them for you or even give you hints.
8) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
9) Press the TAB key once and notice where it goes.
10) Press the TAB key again and type, "How does the use of the word
Power in the US Constitution compare or contrast with the use of the
word rights therein?" Congratulations! You've just entered comments
using the comments editor. More information about it is contained in
the file EDITOR.DOC. (You can access that file using the help on
help feature at the Main Menu.)
11) Press the TAB key and notice the highlighting back in the left
column.
12) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight the word power,
singular, lower case.
13) Press ENTER.
Notice that power now appears in the middle column.
14) Highlight Powers and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
15) Highlight powers and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
16) Using the F6 key, find the word authority in the vocabulary list.
This word is being sought out because it is suspected of being a
synonym for the word power.
17) Highlight Authority and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
18) Highlight authority and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
19) Press the TAB key once.
20) Press F2 to view cross referenced phrases. Notice the order.
Optionally, scroll using the PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END keys.
6
21) Press F3 to view cross referenced text. Left and right arrow
keys move you among cross referenced portions of text.
22) If you performed step 20 or 21, press the ESC key to get the
SYNONYMS screen back.
Ok, now that you have added cross references, you are ready to delete a
few. It is useful to be able to delete cross references if you change
your mind or if you make a mistake.
As with adding cross references, you can delete the cross references to
all occurrences of a word with just two keystrokes. But you don't have to
add or delete them all. In the following exercises you will first delete
the cross references to all occurrences of a word. Then you will add a
cross reference to one occurrence of a word. Then you will delete a cross
reference to a single occurrence of a word.
On with the next exercise,
Deleting cross references to all occurrences of a word . . .
1) Press the TAB key once to place the highlighting in the middle
column (not in the title block).
2) Highlight the word Powers, plural, initial capital letter. (Use
up and down arrow keys as needed.
3) Press the F4 key.
Notice prompt that appears a bottom left side of screen.
4) Type the letter Y (no need to press ENTER).
Notice that the word Powers disappears from the middle column.
But this is not all that has happened.
5) Press the TAB key 3 times to highlight the title block.
6) Press the F2 key.
Notice that no phrases containing the word Powers are displayed.
This is the process to delete cross references to all occurrences of a
word.
7) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
Now to cross reference a specific occurrence of a word . . .
1) Press the TAB key three times to move the highlighting to the
left column.
7
2) Using the F6 key and the up and down arrow keys, highlight the
word Powers.
3) Press F2.
4) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight any of the displayed
phrases that you choose. Make a note of the reference at the left
side of the screen.
5) Press ENTER.
It doesn't look like much happened but it did.
6) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
Notice that the word Powers is back in the middle column. But
that's not all.
7) Press the TAB key once to highlight the title block of the middle
column.
8) Press F2 and look for the reference you noted in step 4. You
might have to use the PG UP or PG DN scroll keys. There's your
phrase.
9) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
Deleting a reference to a specific occurrence of a word . . .
1) Press the F2 key.
2) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight a phrase, any phrase.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y.
The phrase is gone. You saw it happen.
5) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
NOTE: You've done a lot of work. Before saving it, you might want to go
back and re-cross reference all occurrences of the word Powers (not to
mention the single cross reference you just deleted) in order to be able
to complete the exercise you so thoughtfully typed in the comments column.
Whatever you decide to do about that, no doubt you will be happy to know
that when you press the ESC key twice, your work is saved on disk and you
are returned to the Main Menu.
8
CREATING A SUBJECT HEADING
The procedure to create a subject heading is as follows:
1) Select option 4 from the Main Menu.
2) When the primary SUBJECTS screen appears, press the F8 key.
Notice that a blank highlighted line appears at the end of the
list of subjects. But the title is not complete yet.
3) Type in up to 60 letters and numbers to form a meaningful title.
Now the title is created and complete.
To access it, just press ENTER anytime it is highlighted,
including right now. After you access it, cross references are
created in exactly the same manner that was shown for synonyms.
You cannot delete a subject heading from the primary screen. To
delete it, access it and proceed to the secondary screen. Press
the TAB key once to highlight the heading on the 3rd line, press
F4 and type a Y. You are returned to the primary screen and the
heading is gone.
If you do not delete the heading, it is automatically saved on
disk when you return to the Main Menu.
A Timely Exercise
During a recent event, the issue addressed in this exercise became
relevant. The question arose, "Are supreme court justices appointed for
life?" What does the Constitution have to say on this matter?
Aha! You have the TCN program. It has an interactive search feature.
But to use it, you have to know what words to look for. However, the
vocabulary list provides a source of exact search words. BUT (!!!), those
lists are almost 1400 words long!
You could search the entire list of words for promising search key words.
And if you have absolutely no idea about what is in the Constitution,
that's exactly what you will have to do. BUT(!!!), if you have absolutely
no idea about what is in the Constitution, how likely does it appear that
you will be able to spot pertinent search key words or recognize the
relevant text?
To illustrate the intended point, can you answer the following question:
Is the issue of the length of terms for supreme court justices even
addressed in the Constitution? Yes or No.
9
If you answered yes, in what Article of the Constitution would you expect
to find the answer? Is it in the original document? . . . the Bill of
Rights, maybe? . . . or in amendments 11 - 26?
Enough. Happily, in this case, TCNbP company will provide you with
relevant search words and leading questions. The key words are:
Behaviour,
Impeachment
Impeachments.
The questions are,
"Does the Constitution explicitly state that supreme court justices are
appointed for life?"
"Does the Constitution explicitly exempt supreme court justices from
impeachment?"
By now, you should be able to use the key words to find and index the
relevant phrases. And you should be able to use the comment editor to
type in the preceding questions and your answers to them.
And this is what the TCN program was designed to do.
What the TCN program cannot do is ask the question. To ask the question,
you must have some idea about what is in the Constitution. Having the TCN
program is no substitute for that awareness. Acquiring that awareness is
your responsibility.
This completes the provided EVALUATION EXERCISES.
CONTINUING YOUR EVALUATION
The foregoing exercises have demonstrated:
How to move around in the notebook functions of the TCN program.
How to use the interactive search and indexing functions.
However, your evaluation of the TCN program is not complete. Neither is
your study of the United States Constitution.
Continuing Evaluation of the Notebook Function
There are a few more things you can do with the notebook function.
Review of Provided On-Screen Comments
On-screen with the the US Constitution under this evaluation copy of
the TCN program are five historically significant documents that
10
address rights of the human individual. These documents are
presented in 180 (or so) paragraph-sized segments in five seminars.
Along with many of these paragraphs from other rights documents,
TCNbP Company has provided comments and has indexed a few related
phrases from the US Constitution.
Now that you know how to navigate using the notebook functions of the
TCN program, review some of these provided comments. In all, TCNbP
Company provides approximately 20,000 words of comments.
Producing Your Own Comments
If you have some issue of Constitutional interpretation in mind, try
using the interactive search of the TCN program to find relevant
phrases. After searching, create a relevant heading and compile any
relevant phrases under it using the indexing features of the TCN
program. Add a few comments that come to mind.
If you don't find any related phrases, make a heading and type in
some comments under it. Mention events that raised the question you
have in mind. List search words you tried. Note whether you found
the search words you were looking for. Note why you decided any
phrases found were not related to the question.
Lexicography Functions
Then, in addition to the notebook functions covered in the evaluation
exercises, there are the lexicography functions.
Word and Clause Profiles
Main Menu options 8 and 9 provide profiles of vocabulary and sentence
complexity. Calling up the various profiles is easy enough.
Interpreting the profiles is another matter. The profiles contain
raw data. Whether you use them and how you interpret them is up to
you.
Parameter Searches
Main Menu options 6 and 7 compile lists of words or clauses that fit
user specified lexicography parameters. These functions require more
input than just a menu number. The user documentation helps.
Vocabulary Lists
Perusing the vocabulary lists available under Main Menu option 13
could prove interesting. Call up the help and browse the related
user documentation for information about each list.
11
Parse Engine
You might want to try the parse engine.
This evaluation copy of the TCN program comes with 3 complete sets of
parse engine output. The provided evaluation exercises used the default
set of output. Before running the parse engine, you ought to have a look
at the other two sets.
Use Main Menu option 2 to access the other set of output, called a version
or portion.
There are no comments provided with the other portions. However, the
lexicography profiles are there. Have a look. They give one example of a
reason to use the parse engine.
Then read or print out the files USATEXT.DOC and MM10.DOC. Use help on
help to print out USATEXT.DOC. Call up help for Main Menu option 10 and
press F3 to browse MM10.DOC. While browsing it, press F7 to print it out.
To run the parse engine, prepare an ASCII file according to USATEXT.DOC.
Then refer to MM10.DOC for instructions about the parse dialogue.
Registration
Is the TCN program useful?
Sure it is.
But is it useful to you?
Possibly not.
(Embarrassed silence interrupted at intervals by sounds of throat
clearing)
No need for all that. If the TCN program does not appear to be useful to
you, simply clear it off your hard drive and pass the trial diskettes on
to someone else or format them so they can be useful to you.
But if the TCN program is useful to you and you continue to use it (either
sporadically or regularly), please register. See Main Menu option 14 for
fees and benefits.
12
Continuing Your Study of the Constitution.
The evaluation exercises demonstrated the strengths of the TCN program.
Limitations of the TCN program were also demonstrated. Some of these
limitations were limitations not only of the TCN program, but limitations
also of any computer program (and any computer for that matter).
The TCN program cannot ask a question.
The TCN program cannot become concerned about its rights and neither can
the computer it runs on.
The computer it runs on cannot experience happiness, so why would it ever
pursue it?
But the individual who operates the computer CAN experience happiness.
And that person is probably actively involved in the pursuit of happiness
every waking moment.
And that person must be concerned with the possibility of undue
interference with legitimate activities involved in that pursuit.
And that person must be concerned with the legitimate limits of activity
involved in that pursuit.
And out of these concerns arise the questions about rights.
And out of these concerns arise questions about the legitimate limits of
government powers and the proper exercise thereof.
The TCN program can help you find what the Constitution has to say
regarding such questions.
If you find segments of the Constitution related to such questions, the
TCN program can help you organize what you find and store it for future
reference along with your comments about what you did or did not find.
But it is up to you to ask the question.
And it is up to you to decide whether the policies, procedures and
activities of officials are in keeping with the Constitution.
And it is important for every Citizen to ask these questions and make the
judgments.
The Constitution contains a guarantee to provide a Republican form of
government to every state. With the active participation of the private
Citizenry, this guarantee IS fulfilled. Without it, that guarantee CANNOT
be fulfilled.
And what has been said here concerning the Constitution's guarantee of a
Republican form of government is also true of every guarantee the
Constitution contains.
13
For the guarantee to be fulfilled, the Citizenry must participate.
To participate, to ask relevant questions and make reasonable judgments,
each Citizen must know at least what is written in the Constitution.
Whether or not you continue to use the TCN program, please continue your
study of the Constitution.
Thank you for trying The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program.
14
FUNCKEYS.DOC
FUNCTION KEYS
F1 Help.
The TCN program features help-on-help, help at the Main Menu, and context
sensitive help. At the Main Menu, press F1 to get help-on-help. Or type
the number of a Main Menu option and press F1 to get help related to that
Main Menu option. At other times, press F1 to get context sensitive help.
When help is displayed, you can browse or print related information by
pressing F3 and then F7.
NOTE: F2 - F6 have special mnemonics for Main Menu option 14. These
mnemonics are self explaining. They are not described in this file.
F2 Function Key.
The F2 function key has the mnemonic "INTRO" at the Main Menu. At other
times it has the mnemonic "CONC".
"INTRO" is an abbreviation for introduction. When "F2 INTRO" is
displayed, press F2 to view an introduction to the TCN program.
"CONC" is an abbreviation for concordance which is a compilation of
phrases that contain a common word. When you press F2, a list of phrases
is displayed. A reference is displayed for each phrase at the left of the
screen. (For more information about this reference, see MM13.DOC.) One
word is highlighted in each phrase. If you are working from a vocabulary
list, the same word is highlighted in all the displayed phrases. If you
are working from a synonym or subject cross reference list, a different
word may be highlighted in each phrase. One phrase is highlighted. The
PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow, down arrow keys can be used to
highlight a desired phrase. When working in synonym and subject cross-
reference lists, you can operate on the highlighted phrase with the ENTER
key or the F4 key. If you press F3, the text of the Constitution is
displayed with the highlighted phrase on the 4th line of the screen.
(exception is when phrase within 4 lines of top of file or within 14 lines
of end of file).
F3 Function Key.
The F3 key has the mnemonic "EVAL" at the Main Menu. At other times, it
has the word "Text" associated with it.
"EVAL" is an abbreviation for evaluation. When "F3 EVAL" is displayed,
press F3 to print out evaluation instructions for the TCN program. Have
14 sheets of paper in your printer. TCNbP Company strongly recommends
19
that all users take advantage of these materials to evaluate the TCN
program.
If you press F3 while a vocabulary list is displayed, the text of the
Constitution is displayed with the first occurrence of the highlighted
word on the fourth line of the screen (with exceptions noted previously).
If the selected word occurs more than once, you can use the right and left
arrow keys to move among the occurrences. The left arrow key will not
move you from the first occurrence to the last occurrence. The right
arrow key will not move you from the last occurrence to the first
occurrence. The PG UP, PG DN, HOME, and END keys are active while text is
displayed using F3.
F4 DEL.
DEL is a mnemonic for delete. However, F4 is not used to delete
characters. F4 is used to delete seminars, subject headings, or cross
references. You always get a double check prompt when you press F4. Type
an N to exit without deleting anything. What gets deleted depends on what
is highlighted on the screen. Take your time. One keystroke can delete
hours of work if a subject heading, synonym list heading, or a seminar
title is highlighted.
F5 Xport.
This key allows you to export some of the reports generated using this
program. You can use exported files with your own word processing or
spreadsheet software applications. You are prompted for a file name.
Type in the drive specifier, path, file name and extension. If you don't
know what this means, refer to the manuals that came with your computer or
other software. To avoid erasing files generated automatically by this
program, do not use .lex or .lxx as the extension. As an added measure,
set aside a separate diskette or directory specifically for the purpose of
holding files created using the F5 key. Content and format of the file is
the same as what you get when you press the F7 key with a given field
highlighted.
F6 Find.
If you are in an alphabetically sorted vocabulary list, this key will get
you within a few keystrokes of a specific word. You can type the whole
word if desired, but the first 3 or 4 letters of the word will get you
close. As a rule, don't use all caps. Also, capitalizing or not
capitalizing the first letter makes a big difference in some lists. F6 is
active when an alphabetical vocabulary list is selected (Main Menu option
13, secondary menu options 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) and Main Menu options 4, 5,
6, 11, or 13 are in use. To escape from F6 without performing a search,
press ENTER without typing anything.
20
F7 Print.
Use this key to produce hard copy printout of vocabulary lists, word
concordances, synonym and subject cross references or profiles. If F7
doesn't print something, press the F10 key to turn off display of function
key mnemonics and use the screen print function of your computer. F7 will
not produce hard copy of Constitutional text. Use your word processor to
do that with the provided Constitutional text files.
F8 New.
Use this key to add a new seminar title or subject heading. You must
select option 3 or 4 from the Main Menu for this key to be active.
F9
Not used.
F10 TGKEY.
Turns display of function key mnemonics on or off with repeated presses.
Default mode is keys displayed. Press F10 to turn off display. When
desired, press F10 again to turn display of mnemonics back on. Useful for
screen prints if you do not want to have the function key mnemonics
included in your output.
21
MAINMENU.DOC
MAIN MENU
The Main Menu is the menu that is displayed when you start the program.
It consists of 14 options numbered 1 through 14.
To select an option, use the typewriter number keys (not the numeric
keypad keys) to type the corresponding number and press ENTER.
If you make a mistake, use the BACK SPACE key to erase it before pressing
ENTER.
A brief discussion of each option follows.
Exit.
The exit option allows you to exit the notebook program without rebooting
your computer. Get in the habit of exiting the program with this option.
To do so ensures that any notes you have made will be saved on disk. For
more information, see file MM1.DOC.
Choose version or portion.
Within limits, The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program allows you to parse any
complete version or any portion of any version of the United States
Constitution that you wish. The files associated with one complete
version of the Constitution and three portions of the Constitution are
provided with the program. The choose version or portion option allows
you to indicate which version or portion of the Constitution you want to
examine. The information displayed about each version or portion is
entered in the dialogue associated with Main Menu option 10 Analyze Source
File. To select a version or portion, scroll through the list displayed
when you select option 2 until the entry for the desired portion or
version is highlighted and then press ENTER. The default selection is the
complete version of the Constitution provided with the program. To read
the files associated with a selected version or portion requires up to 5
minutes depending on the amount of text included as well as what kind of
computer you have. For more information, see file MM2.DOC.
Choose Seminar.
The notes (subject cross references, synonym cross references and related
comments) that you compile for each version or portion can be organized in
seminars. The amount of notes you can store is limited mainly by disk
space and a practical maximum of 40 seminars per version or portion. This
allows up to 80,000 cross-references, an adequate quantity for a document
consisting of less than 10,000 words. Subordinate to each seminar is a
15
set of subject reports and a set of synonym reports that you can generate
and modify using this program. For more information, see file MM3.DOC.
Subject.
This option allows you to collect references to words related to a heading
you make up. The references are generated by highlighting a word in a
vocabulary list (to indicate every occurrence of that word in the
Constitution is related to the heading) or by highlighting a phrase
containing the word in a concordance-like display generated by function
key 2 (to indicate that the highlighted occurrence is related to the
subject heading). References can be deleted in a similar fashion using
the F4 key. To select the desired subject, scroll through the displayed
list until the desired subject is highlighted and then press ENTER. The
selected subject is then displayed for review, update, deletion, print
out, or saving to disk. New subjects are added by pressing the F8 key.
To delete a subject, access it, press the tab key once and then use F4. A
simple editor allows you to compile comments related to each subject
heading. For more information, see file MM4.DOC.
Synonym.
This option allows you to collect references to words that are synonyms to
other words in the Constitution. The references are generated by
highlighting a word in a vocabulary list (to indicate every occurrence of
that word in the Constitution is considered to be a synonym) or by
highlighting a phrase containing the word in a concordance-like display
generated by function key 2 (to indicate that the highlighted occurrence
is considered to be a synonym). References can be deleted in a similar
fashion using the F4 key. To select the desired list of synonyms, scroll
through the displayed list until the desired word is highlighted and then
press ENTER. The selected word is then displayed along with its cross
references for review, update, deletion, print out, or saving to disk. To
indicate that a word has synonyms, highlight it in a vocabulary list and
press ENTER. To delete a word, access it and then use F4. A simple
editor allows you to compile comments related to each word with synonyms.
For more information, see file MM5.DOC.
Parameter Searches, Word.
In this program, the term word refers to any group of letters and numbers
between two blanks, a blank and a punctuation mark, or a punctuation mark
and a blank. This option allows you to compile lists of words based on a
set of parameters that you enter on an interactive screen. For example,
16
you could list all the 7-letter words that start with N if you so desire
using this option. For more information, see file MM6.DOC.
Parameter Searches, Clauses.
In this program, the term clause refers to all words occurring between any
two punctuation marks. You can list clauses that consist of a number of
letters, words, and syllables in a specified range entered on an
interactive screen. This option can be used to compile clauses in terms
of reading complexity. For more information, see file MM7.DOC.
Profiles, word use.
Gives you access to profiles of word use by vocabulary and text according
to letters, syllables, and number of times a word is used. Another gauge
of reading complexity. Report is generated automatically during execution
of Main Menu option 10. Can be updated without performing Main Menu
option 10 if new syllable data is entered using Main Menu option 11. Can
be printed out or exported (saved as soft copy) for edit. For more
information, see file MM8.DOC.
Profiles, clauses.
Gives you access to profiles of clause complexity by number of words,
letters, or syllables. Another gauge of reading complexity. Report is
generated automatically during execution of Main Menu option 10. Can be
updated without performing Main Menu option 10 if new syllable data is
entered using Main Menu option 11. Can be printed out or exported (saved
as soft copy) for edit. For more information, see file MM9.DOC.
Analyze source file.
Allows you to generate full compliment of output for a version or portion
of the Constitution that you prepare. For best results, run this option
first, that is, before performing any other Main Menu option. Re-start
program if necessary to run this option first. If you analyze two
versions or portions back to back, re-start the program between the two.
Certain rules must be followed concerning hyphenation and headings for
amendments, sections and articles. The first word in the file is
critical. Refer to MODIFICATION OF PROVIDED FILES CONTAINING
CONSTITUTIONAL TEXT in the file USATEXT.DOC for more information. Fixed
drive operators can arrange input and output files any way desired. Floppy
drive operators must observe a few constraints. For more information, see
file MM10.DOC.
17
Enter Syllable Data.
Allows you to enter the number of syllables for any word in the vocabulary
of the Constitution. This option is provided in case the Constitution is
amended resulting in new words being used for which syllable data is not
entered. Also, you may disagree with the number of syllables entered in
the provided list. You can change the number of syllables using this
option. Keep in mind that this is a master vocabulary being changed. All
profiles subsequently generated for any version or portion using options 6
- 10 will use the data you enter. For more information, see file
MM11.DOC.
Options.
Allows you to indicate desired values for a series of options. For more
information, see file MM12.DOC.
Choose Vocabulary List.
Allows you to choose from a variety of vocabulary lists compiled for the
selected version or portion during execution of option 10. The
subordinate menu is self explanatory. The default list is number 3 on
this menu. For more information, see file MM13.DOC.
Shareware Information.
Provides information related to shareware distribution of this version of
The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program. Includes amount of requested payment
and contact information. Information is contained in an encrypted file.
On older, slower PCs, up to 45 seconds is required for decryption. For
more information, run the program and select Main Menu option 14. File
name MM14.DOC is not provided.
18
MM1.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 1, EXIT
Main Menu option 1 provides a way for you to exit The CONSTITUTION Notebook
program to DOS or to your desktop without rebooting your computer. By
using this function, you assure yourself that all changes that you make to
options, syllable information, subject references, or synonym references
are saved to disk.
To accomplish this, proceed as follows:
1) Upon completion of all desired functions, select Main Menu option
1, exit.
2) At the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, type a Y.
Execution of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program ends and you are
returned either to DOS or to your desktop, depending on how you
have your computer set up.
If you inadvertently select this function, type an N at the 'Are
you sure, Y/N?' prompt to return to the main menu and continue
using the program.
22
MM10.DOC
NOTE: For best results, perform Main Menu option 10 immediately after
starting the program (before performing any other function). If you use
Main Menu option 10 on two files back-to-back, restart the program between
the two files. If you fail to do this, and the file that is analyzed is
smaller than the selected version or portion or smaller than the
previously analyzed file, subsequent attempts to display phrases and text
near the end of a version or portion may result in errors.
MAIN MENU OPTION 10, ANALYZING (PARSING) A SOURCE FILE
This file contains information needed to parse a file using Main Menu
option 10. In addition to the task oriented instructions needed to
complete the analysis dialogue, information of a general nature is
included to guide you through the entire process.
Major steps involved in analyzing a file are:
1) Source file preparation.
The content of your source file depends on your objective for performing
the analysis. The source file is prepared using your word processor.
Save your file in a mode that does not insert special codes in the file.
Files in this format are generally described as ASCII files. All provided
files are such files. Main Menu option 10 works fine with them. Using
Main Menu option 10 with files containing special codes (not ASCII) may
produce unreliable results. Refer to modification of source file for
further information.
Check your source file very carefully. Once you analyze it, you are stuck
with the results of the analysis. You cannot delete it. There is a
practical limit of 30 (approximately) sets of output that can be
accommodated by this program.
2) Diskette preparation.
If you intend to save your output on diskette, or use the diskette drives
to store your source file during the analysis, you must have the diskettes
ready before you can start the analysis function dialogue. As you proceed
through the dialogue, the program checks your information against the
diskettes in the drive. This ensures that all required information is
available. If not, at least you haven't tied up your computer for the
time required to parse the file for nothing.
65
Know what will be on each diskette and have the source file stored where
you intend to parse it from before starting the program. If need be,
format a diskette or two and label it (them) first.
If you are storing more than one set of output on a diskette, check the
available space on the diskette that you will use to store your output.
The program does not do this. Be sure that the diskette has enough room
for the automatically generated output files and enough room to store the
amount of cross references and comments that you estimate you will
generate. For further information see DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT DISK
SPACE REQUIREMENTS in the file DISKROOM.DOC.
If you are working on a computer that has only one diskette drive and no
fixed drive, your source file must be stored on the same diskette where
the output files will be stored. This limits one diskette users to 1
(maximum) analysis of the complete Constitution with all amendments per
360 K 5.25-inch diskette. There simply is not room for the source file
and 2 sets of outputs. After completing option 10, you can delete the
source file from the diskette if need be to free up space. The program
does not use the source file except during option 10.
3) Analysis dialogue.
The analysis dialogue begins after you select Main Menu option 10. You
are prompted for information in a series of prompts. As you enter each
item of information, the program checks the information against available
files on diskette or the fixed drive. If a problem is detected, prompts
appear to alert you and give hints at solutions. The information entered
during the analysis dialogue is used by the computer during analysis to
locate required information and to decide where to store the output.
Also, this information is saved for display during execution of Main Menu
option 2. You are provided an opportunity during the analysis dialogue to
enter comments (60 characters).
The analysis dialogue provides a measure of confidence that all required
files are available before starting the actual analysis. One thing that
the dialogue will not detect is when single diskette users have the source
file and output files on separate diskettes. Remember, single diskette
users with no fixed drive, the source file must be on the same diskette
where you intend the output to be stored. Otherwise, you will get a fatal
error or totally erroneous output. Another thing the program does not
check is whether the Constitution file is on the Program Diskette. NEVER
do this.
4) Analysis.
The program parses the file and generates 28 files that contain the
indexes used to display and cross reference information. The screen
usually has something displayed on it to give you an idea that something
66
is happening so you can know that you computer is not locked up. You
might be prompted to insert the program diskette or the diskette with the
source file. If prompted to insert the program diskette (this prompt will
not appear if you installed on a fixed drive), put the program diskette in
the drive where you installed. If you put it in another drive, the prompt
will be repeated until you put it in the proper drive. If prompted to
insert the diskette with the source file, insert it in the drive that you
indicated during the analysis dialogue. If you put it in another drive,
the prompt is repeated until you put it in the appropriate drive.
If a message appears advising you to print the screen, a fatal error has
occurred. This is possible due to the wide variations occurring in user
preparation of the source file. If this happens, send your screen print
out and a copy (on diskette) of your source file to the address provided
by Main Menu option 14 for advice concerning a solution.
Analysis Dialogue
The same series of prompts is displayed for all diskette, diskette
plus fixed drive, or fixed drive combinations during the analysis
dialogue. Depending on the combination of disk drives that you have or
are using, your responses vary. Each response is checked for validity
before proceeding to the next prompt. Each prompt is repeated until
acceptable input is provided. The following materials describe each
prompt, valid responses and error correction for the analysis dialogue.
1) Source Text File Drive Specifier Prompt.
You are prompted for the drive specifier that indicates on which drive
the text source file will be stored during analysis.
a) Type an upper or lower case letter A - Z.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the drive you specified is available.
A formatted diskette must be in the drive if a floppy is specified.
If the drive is unavailable, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the drive is available, the next prompt appears.
67
2) Source Text File Path Information Prompt
You are prompted for the path on which the source file is stored during
analysis. A colon and backslash are automatically added to the drive
specifier previously entered.
a) Type the rest of the path information. If the source file is
stored in the root directory, do not type anything.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the path you specified exists.
If the path does not exist, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the path exists, the next prompt appears.
3) Source Text File Name Prompt.
You are prompted for the file name of the source file.
a) Type in the source file name and extension.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the file exists on the path
previously entered.
If the file does not exist, an advisory message appears to that
effect and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the file exists, the next prompt appears.
4) Output Drive Prompt.
You are prompted for the drive specifier that indicates on which drive the
output files will be stored.
a) Type an upper or lower case letter A - Z.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the drive you specified is available. A
formatted diskette must be in the drive if a floppy is specified.
If the drive is unavailable, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
68
If the drive is available, the next prompt appears.
5) Output Path Prompt.
You are prompted for the path on which the output files are to be stored
by analysis. A colon and backslash are automatically added to the drive
specifier previously entered.
a) Type the rest of the path information.
If the output is to be stored in the root directory, do not type
anything. However, if you are using a fixed drive, or if you are
storing the output of more than one analysis on a floppy diskette, you
must not specify the root directory for more than one analysis.
Otherwise, the results of the previous analysis will be lost. A
simple rule is: ALWAYS specify a unique path. Never store output in
the root directory on any drive or any diskette.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the path you specified exists.
If the path does not exist, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the path exists, the program checks to see if the path has been
used for analysis previously. If so, an advisory message appears to
that effect, and you are given the option to continue or escape. If
you continue, the results of the previous analysis are lost. If you
escape, you can repeat the analysis dialogue and enter different path
information.
When all checks have been completed, the next prompt appears.
6) Comments Prompt.
You are prompted for 60 characters of comments.
a) Type your comments, if any.
The left and right arrow keys, DELETE, and F9 keys are active.
The source file name, source file path, the output file path
information that you entered previously during this dialogue is stored
for recall during Main Menu option 2. Your comments need not repeat
this information. Use the comments to reference another file or
perhaps a notebook that contains more detailed information about the
reasons for this analysis. Or briefly describe the source file as was
done with the provided analysis.
69
b) Press ENTER.
No checks are performed. The program proceeds to the actual analysis
of the source file.
Analysis of the Source File
Following completion of the analysis dialogue, the program reads the
master sort data. If you are working from diskette, you may be prompted
to insert the program diskette. If so, insert it in the drive that you
installed to.
After reading the master sort data, the program attempts to access the
source file. If it is not available, you are prompted to insert the
appropriate diskette. Insert the diskette in the drive you indicated
during the analysis dialogue.
When analysis begins, the 200 bytes of text that is being parsed is
displayed at the top of the screen. This display (as well as the others)
was placed in the code to aid in de-bugging while the program was being
written. It was left in the code for two reasons. One reason is so your
screen won't sit idle for an extended period while analysis is performed.
The other reason is to provide helpful information should bugs appear in
use when the Constitution is amended or when you analyze modified files.
If your modified version contains words not previously used in the
provided files, you may be prompted to insert the program diskette during
analysis (if you are working from diskettes). If so, place the working
copy of the program diskette in the drive that you installed to.
NOTE: This process updates the master vocabulary list. Never write the
updated list to the backup diskette or to the original. Write the updated
list to your working copy if you are using diskettes. To avoid saving the
updated list on the original or backup copy, always protect those copies
by leaving the write protect tab in place for 5.25 inch diskettes or
always leaving the write protect tab on 3.5 inch diskettes in the protect
position. Each time your master vocabulary list is updated, backup your
master vocabulary list. The program does not do this, nor does it remind
you to do it. See BACKUP.DOC.
The remainder of the prompts that appear on the screen during analysis are
of no interest except that they should always be changing at least once
every 5 minutes. If not, the program is locked up.
When analysis is complete, you may be prompted to insert the program
diskette and then the index (output) diskette. If so, insert the
70
diskettes in the appropriate drive (install drive for program diskette,
drive you specified during analysis dialogue for index diskette). After
these two prompts, you are returned to the Main Menu and the results of
your analysis are now available for review.
71
MM11.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 11
Main Menu option 11 allows you to update syllable information. You can edit
the syllable data provided when you purchased this program. Or, you can
enter syllable data for words not included in the purchased master
vocabulary list, should you parse a modified version of the Constitution or
should you update the Constitution to include possibly forthcoming
amendments.
You can access 6 vocabulary lists using Main Menu option 11, including two
versions of the master list which are not available using Main Menu options
13 or 6.
This file contains information needed to use Main Menu option 11.
The Secondary Menu
When you select 11 from the Main Menu, a secondary menu with 7 options
numbered 0 - 6 appears. Options 1 - 6 are vocabulary list formats. Option
0 returns you to the main menu.
Option 2 is useful if you have just executed Main Menu option 10 on a
version or portion of the Constitution. New words for which no syllable
information has been entered will appear at the top of the list because the
computer 'thinks' that these words have 0 syllables. You can enter the
syllable data for those words and not concern yourself with the remainder of
the list. Given that the default version has nearly 1400 entries for which
syllable data is entered, this saves a lot of time. Over an hour was
required to enter the syllable data for the master list of the default
version. Typically, less than a dozen new words will be added to the
vocabulary in a modified version. That much syllable information can be
entered in a few minutes.
Option 3 speeds up mass entry of syllable entry by automatically copying
syllable information for initially capitalized and not initially
capitalized spellings of the same word.
Options 1 and 4 display numbers for entry of syllable data. If a number is
intended to be pronounced, select one of these lists to enter the
appropriate syllable data.
Options 5 and 6 display all words in the master vocabulary list, as opposed
to options 1 - 4 which only display words that occur in the current version
or portion. These lists include all words, including misspelled words
that were ever included in a file parsed using Main Menu option 10.
The lists for options 1 - 4 are more fully described in file MM13.DOC.
72
Entering Syllable Data
To enter syllable data, proceed as follows:
1) Select 11 from the main menu.
2) Select a vocabulary list from the secondary menu.
The selected vocabulary list is displayed after a delay.
3) Scroll through the displayed vocabulary list until a word for which
you wish to enter syllable data is highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN,
HOME, END, up arrow and down arrow keys to move the highlighting.
4) Type the appropriate syllable information using the top row of
typewriter keys, not the numeric keypad.
The number you typed is displayed in the syllables column of the
highlighted word and the highlighting is advanced in the list.
You do not have to press the ENTER key.
NOTE: If you select secondary menu option 3 and the syllable data is
entered within the bottom 3 lines on a screen, the highlighting may not
advance properly. Advance it manually with one of the above mentioned
scroll keys when this happens.
You can print the selected vocabulary list or export it (save it to
disk) using the F7 and F5 function keys, respectively.
5) When you are finished entering syllable data, press the ESC key to
return to the secondary menu.
You can select another vocabulary list if desired or return to the
Main Menu according to your selection. If you have updated syllable
information, the program reminds you to regenerate the word usage and
clause complexity profiles. The prompt gives you the option to regenerate
the profiles immediately. If you type an N, you can update the profile
later using Main Menu option 8, secondary menu option 4. If you did not
enter any syllable data, the prompt does not appear.
73
MM12.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 12
Main Menu option 12 is used to specify desired values for options. When
you select 12 from the Main Menu, a secondary menu is displayed. You can
choose from among the options on the secondary menu for review or update.
Or you can choose 0 from the secondary menu to return to the Main Menu.
Name of Install Directory
Use eliminated for version 1.22.
Colors
If you desire, you can change the colors for color monitor, or the
relative level of foreground, background intensity for monochrome
monitors. The defaults are 1 and 15. This gives a white on blue display
on color monitors. On some monochrome monitors, it results in highlighted
items being underscored.
User Documentation Drive
Use eliminated for version 1.22.
74
MM13.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 13
Main Menu option 13 allows you to select among 9 vocabulary lists. The
lists vary as to their content and the sort key by which they are ordered.
You can print any list using F7 or export any of the lists (save on disk)
using F5. A description of each list is included in this file along with
some practical word study (lexicographical) methods to which each list lends
itself.
With the various lists, lexicography information is displayed on the line
with each word. Up to five columns can be displayed within a single list.
The information in each column is described near the end of this file.
All lists on this menu contain words, numbers, or punctuation marks that
occur in the selected version or portion. A master list that contains all
words, numbers and punctuation marks from all versions and portions can be
accessed using Main Menu option 11.
The TCN program focuses on words. You access phrases or text by first
selecting a word from a list. You proceed from menus to the lists
automatically. To return to a list after accessing phrases or text (F2 or F3
keys), press the ESC key.
While you are in a list, the following scroll keys move you through the list
to highlight (select) a specific word: PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow,
down arrow.
The list that you need may vary depending on what you are trying to
accomplish.
Choice of Vocabulary List
You can choose a vocabulary list while performing Main Menu options 6, 11, or
13. The selected list will affect performance of options 4, 5, 6, 11, and
13. To see the default list, select Main Menu option 13 and then select item
3. The default list is read when you select a version or portion or when the
default version is read. The default list remains in effect until another
list is selected during performance of Main Menu options 6, 11, or 13. For
more information about the available vocabulary lists, see file MM13.DOC.
The Secondary Menu
When you select 13 from the Main Menu, a secondary menu consisting of 10
options numbered 0 - 9 appears. Options 1 - 9 are vocabulary lists. Item 0
returns you to the Main Menu. The vocabulary lists are discussed below in
order of their appearance on the secondary menu.
75
Words In Order Of Appearance
All words, numbers, and punctuation symbols are included in this list.
The program creates this list by appending newly encountered words to the
end of this list. That is to say, when the program encounters a word for
the first time in the source file, it adds that word to the end of this
list. The result is a list ordered according to initial appearance.
A practical application of this list is to evaluate focus. Naturally, the
words used most often occur early in a version or portion. Once you get
past the part of the list that relates the first appearance of very common
words, there are words that appear late that are used several times.
Hence, one can infer a focus on these words. One interesting combination
of facts to look at is words that appear very early (say even in the
Preamble) that are used only once. Hence, this list contains information
related to focus; one aspect of focus being order of appearance (first
things -most important- first) and number of times a word is used.
Words Sorted By Number Of Syllables
Only words are included in this list.
A practical use of this list is to enter syllable data. Also, the
grouping of words according to syllables may be helpful.
Alphabetical List, Capitalized Words Merged With Uncapitalized Words
Only words are included in this list.
A practical application of this list is convenience when entering synonym
and subject cross references. To the program, initially capitalized words
and words not initially capitalized are two totally different words.
Hence, if a word appears initially capitalized in some places and not
initially capitalized in others, you have to access both spellings to
indicate that both spellings are related. In an ordinary sort (secondary
menu option 4), these spellings are far apart in the list. In this list,
they are adjacent to each other.
F6 can be used when this list is selected to quickly move to a desired
word.
76
When the program is first started, or when you select a version or
portion, this is the default list.
Alphabetical List, Caps separate from Not caps, plus Numbers, Punct
This list contains all words, numbers, and punctuation marks. Unlike
secondary menu option 1, this list is sorted alphabetically.
One practical use of this list is to access occurrences of Arabic numeral
in Constitutional text. With this list selected, you can highlight an
Arabic numeral and press F2 or F3 to see where the highlighted numeral
occurs.
Another practical use of this list is to show exactly which words, numbers
and punctuation marks are greater than which. This information is useful
to understand the results of using the words area of Main Menu option 6.
You could compile examples of punctuation mark usage.
F6 works with this list.
Words That Appear In Uppercase Only
This list contains those words that are initially capitalized every time
that they are used in the selected version or portion of the Constitution.
A photogenic copy of the original Constitution reveals initially
capitalized words in the middle of sentences. Many of the words would not
be capitalized by contemporary capitalization conventions. An emphasis on
or importance attached to words that were consistently capitalized can be
inferred. This list can be used in conjunction with the following two
lists to evaluate the use of capitalization in the Constitution.
Words That Appear In Lower Case Only
This list contains those words that never appear initially capitalized in
the selected version or portion of the Constitution.
This list can be used in conjunction with the preceding list and the
following list to evaluate use of capitalization in the Constitution.
77
Words That Appear In Both Upper And Lower Case
This list contains those words that appear initially capitalized in some
places and not initially capitalized in others in the selected version or
portion of the Constitution.
This list can be used in conjunction with the preceding two lists to
evaluate use of capitalization in the Constitution.
Words Sorted By Number Of Times They Are Used
Only words are included in this list.
A practical use of this list is to rank words by the number of times they
occur in a selected version or portion.
Words Sorted By Number Of Letters
Only words are included in this list.
A practical use of this list is to rank words that occur in a selected
version or portion by the number of letters they contain.
Reviewing the Vocabulary Lists
To review a vocabulary list, proceed as follows:
1) Select 13 from the Main Menu.
2) Select a vocabulary list from the secondary menu.
After a delay, the list is displayed.
All lists include length, syllable, and occurrence information with
each word. In addition, the list accessed through secondary menu option 1
provides place information.
You can print out the entire list using the F7 key.
You can export the entire list to a file on disk that can be used with
many word processors. These files are large. Some word processors won't
hold them. If saving to diskette, allow 150,000 bytes for the vocabulary
78
list of the default version. The F5 key performs the export function.
You can review every phrase that contains a highlighted word by using
the F2 key. When these phrases are displayed, you can print them or export
them to disk. Except for words occurring more than 300 times, the files
created thusly can be held by many common word processors.
You can review text surrounding every occurrence of a highlighted word
using the F3 key.
When finished reviewing a list, press the ESC key to return to the
secondary menu.
When finished reviewing all word lists, select 0 from the secondary
menu to return to the Main Menu.
LEXICOGRAPHY INFORMATION
Five different kinds of lexicography information are displayed in the
various lists for each word. Length, syllable, and occurrence data for
each word is displayed in all the lists. Reference and place data is
displayed for the 'Words in order of appearance' list. All information
except syllable data is automatically generated and cannot be changed by
the user. The information included under each of the five titles is
described below.
Length
The number in the length column is the number of letters in the
corresponding word.
Syllables
The number in the syllables column is the number of syllables in the
corresponding word.
79
Occurrences
The number in the occurrences column is the number of times that the
corresponding word appears in the selected version or portion.
Place
Place is defined as the location of a word, number or punctuation mark
relative to the beginning of a selected version or portion. Remember, a
word is a group of alphanumeric characters between two blanks, a
punctuation mark and a blank, or between a blank and a punctuation mark.
The displayed place information is location of the first occurrence of the
corresponding word.
Reference
Reference information is displayed for the 'Words in order of appearance'
list or when F2 is pressed. In either case, it appears at the left side
of the screen. Reference information for the 'Words in order of
appearance' list is derived from the location of the first occurrence of
the corresponding word. Reference information displayed when F2 is
pressed is derived from the location of the corresponding phrase. The
information below about references applies to F2 and the vocabulary list
display.
Art is an abbreviation for article.
Sec is an abbreviation for section.
Amd is an abbreviation for amendment.
A reference can have one of the four following formats:
Art #.#
Art # Sec #.#
Amd #.#
Amd # Sec #.#
When an article or an amendment is not divided into sections, the number
following the abbreviation has a number to the right of the decimal. The
number to the right of the decimal is a paragraph number. Even if there
80
is only one paragraph, this number is used.
When an article or amendment is divided into sections, the number
following the abbreviation (Art or Amd) does not have a decimal. The
abbreviation Sec is followed by a number, a decimal, and then another
number. Even if a section only has one paragraph, there is a number to
the right of the decimal.
The reference Amd 10.1 is used to indicate text in the first paragraph of
the tenth amendment in the Bill of Rights.
The reference Art 1 Sec 2.3 is used to indicate that the associated word
or phrase is included in the 3rd paragraph of the 2nd section of the 1st
article of the Constitution.
81
MM2.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 2, Version or Portion
Main Menu option 2 allows you to select a version or portion of the
Constitution for review. When you purchase the program, you have a
selection consisting of a complete version, and 3 portions. Later, if you
analyze another file using Main Menu option 10, your selection is increased
to include each version you analyze. The following materials explain what
appears on the screen and how to use Main Menu option 2.
Description of the Screen
When you select Main Menu option 2, the top three lines of the screen
contain titles that show the relative positions of information provided for
each version or portion available for selection. The titles are:
[File Name] [Comments]
[ Source Path ]
[ Output Path ]
The fourth line of the screen is blank. The fifth, sixth and seventh
lines are highlighted (reverse video for color monitors, underscored for
monochrome). The highlighted lines contain information entered during the
analysis dialogue (see file MM10.DOC) for the default version.
Below the highlighted lines are displayed (in unhighlighted format
separated by a blank line) the information entered during analysis
dialogue for the other provided portions.
If you have used Main Menu option 10 to analyze other versions or portions,
the information that you entered during the analysis dialogue can be
displayed by scrolling with the HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN, or up arrow and
down arrow keys.
Information for each available version or portion is displayed on three
lines followed by a blank line. The information appears in the same
relative position as indicated by the titles on the top three lines of the
screen. The information referred to by each title is as follows:
[File Name]
Twelve characters maximum consisting of a valid DOS file name (8 characters
maximum), a period (if used), and a 3 character (maximum) extension, if
used. File name is entered during analysis dialogue.
23
[Comments]
Beginning in column 20 of the line on which the file name is displayed, 60
(maximum) characters of comments entered during the analysis dialogue.
[ Source Path ]
Beginning in column 1 of the line below that on which the file name and
comments are displayed, eighty characters (maximum) of information defining
drive and path on which source file was stored during execution of Main Menu
option 10. Can be a memory jogger if you use your imagination. Information
is entered during analysis dialogue.
[ Output Path ]
Beginning in column 1 of the line below that on which the location of source
file is displayed, eighty characters (maximum) of information defining drive
and path on which output files were stored during execution of Main Menu
option 10. Can be a memory jogger if you use your imagination. Information
is entered during analysis dialogue.
Selecting a Version or Portion
To select a version or portion of the Constitution for review, proceed as
follows:
1) Select item 2 from the Main Menu.
A slight delay occurs while information is read from disk. If
operating from diskette, you may be prompted to insert the program
diskette. If so, place the working copy of your program diskette in the
drive that you installed to. If you put it in another drive, the prompt
is repeated.
2) When the selections appear on the screen, scroll through the available
items using the HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN, and up arrow or down arrow keys
until the desired version or portion is highlighted.
3) If working from diskette, insert the index diskette. This refers to
the diskette on which the output files are stored. Place that diskette in
the drive specified in the location of output files information area of
the highlighted selection.
4) Press ENTER.
A delay occurs while files are read. This delay may be as long as 5
24
minutes depending on the size of the selected version and the kind of
computer you have. A prompt appears at the bottom of the screen advising
which file is being read. This prompt should be updated at least every 90
seconds. When all files are read, you are returned to the Main Menu.
If you put the index diskette in the wrong drive, inserted the wrong
index diskette, or if you failed to insert the index diskette, you are
prompted to insert it. Information related to the selected version or
portion is displayed along with the prompt. Insert the index diskette in
the appropriate drive and press ENTER. In some cases you may be returned
to the Main Menu anyway. If so, repeat Main Menu option 2.
25
MM3.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 3, Choose Seminar
Main Menu option 3 allows you to select among existing seminars or to
create a new seminar. The materials in this file explain what a seminar
is, how and why to create a seminar, and how to select a seminar.
What is a Seminar?
A seminar is a set of cross references created by the user.
The program keeps a separate set of seminars for each version or portion
of the Constitution analyzed using Main Menu option 10.
Each seminar contains a set of words with synonyms and a set of subjects.
Each word with synonyms and each subject has a set of related cross
references and comments.
Eight seminars with subject and synonym cross references are provided with
the default version of analyzed files. The other provided versions do not
include any subjects or synonyms. However, you can create them, if you
wish.
A seminar can contain a maximum of:
2,000 lines of comments for subjects and 2,000 lines of comments for
synonyms, for a maximum possible total of 4,000 lines of comments.
2,000 subject headings and 2,000 synonym headings for a maximum
possible total of 4,000 headings.
2,000 subject cross references and 2,000 synonym cross references for
a maximum possible total of 4,000 cross references.
You can have any relative number of subjects and synonym headings.
You can have any relative number of cross references and comments
distributed among the subject headings or among the synonym headings.
If you reach a maximum limit in the subjects, you can still work in the
synonym section of the seminar if it is not already full.
If you reach a maximum limit in the synonyms, you can still work in the
subject section of the seminar.
Reaching one of these maximum limits (actually, rather unlikely) is one
reason to create a new seminar.
Another reason to create a new seminar is to logically group synonym and
subject headings, comments and cross references under a title relevant to
26
the version or portion of the Constitution being studied.
When you select a version or portion of the Constitution (or let the
program make the default selection), only the seminars related to that
selected version or portion can be accessed.
When you create a seminar, it is accessible only when the selected version
or portion of the Constitution is selected. If you select another
version, the created seminar is unavailable.
When you select a seminar, only those synonyms and subject headings
previously stored in that seminar are available for review. You can
update the headings, cross references and comments if desired. Unless you
manually duplicate a heading with the associated cross references and
comments in another seminar (perfectly ok to do so), said headings, cross
references and comments will not be available if you select another
seminar.
You can switch seminars as often as you like.
Screen Description
When Main Menu option 3 is selected, a screen appears with the title
SEMINARS. The third line of the screen is highlighted. If this is a
newly analyzed version or portion of the Constitution, the line will be
blank. You can enter a title using the typewriter keys, F9, DELETE, and
the left or right arrow keys. If you have previously created other
seminars and entered titles, each of those titles will appear on a line
below the third line. No blank line separates titles. If more than one
seminar exists, you can move the highlighting using the HOME, END, PG UP,
PG DN, up arrow or down arrow keys. You can edit the title of a seminar
anytime it is highlighted on this screen.
Accessing a Seminar
To access a seminar, proceed as follows:
1) Select 3 from the Main Menu.
2) Scroll through the available selections until the desired seminar
is highlighted.
3) Press ENTER.
27
You are returned to the Main Menu. Subject and Synonyms
available now using Main menu options 4 and 5 are those
previously entered under the accessed seminar.
If you do not wish to change the accessed seminar, press ESC
instead of ENTER. You are returned to the Main Menu. The
accessed seminar is unchanged.
If no seminar selection is made using Main Menu option 3, the
default is the first seminar.
Creating a Seminar
To create a seminar, proceed as follows:
1) Select 3 from the Main Menu.
2) Press F8.
A blank highlighted line appears at the end of the existing list.
3) Type a seminar title in the highlighted area.
At this point, you can press F8 and create another seminar.
OR, you can press ENTER to access the newly created seminar.
OR, you can press ESC to return to the Main Menu. The new
seminar is created; however, the accessed seminar is unchanged.
OR, you can scroll through the list and press ENTER to select a
different seminar.
Pressing ENTER or ESC returns you to the Main Menu with the
seminar selected as described previously.
NOTE: Once you create a seminar, you are stuck with it. You cannot
delete it. If desired you can change the title and place different
references in it.
28
MM4.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SUBJECTS
The four major steps for cross referencing subjects are:
1) Create a heading, if it does not already exist.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Review the heading while adding or deleting related references or
comments.
4) Exit to the main menu to save changes.
Creating a Subject Heading
To create a subject heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 4 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SUBJECTS. The third line of the
screen is highlighted in reverse video. This line contains the title
of the default subject for the selected seminar. If no title has
been entered, the highlighted area is blank. If so, you can enter a
title if desired as described in step 3 which follows.
2) Press F8. A new subject heading is created at the end of the
existing list. The highlighting moves to the newly created subject
heading.
3) Type in a title. Use the typewriter keys as per usual. The
INSERT, BACK SPACE, DELETE, left and right arrow keys are active.
At this point you can access the created subject heading by
performing the procedure that follows beginning at step 2. Or you
can press ESC to return to the Main Menu. If so, the newly created
subject title is saved to disk and will be displayed the next time
you choose Main Menu item 4. However, no cross references or
comments are entered as yet.
29
Accessing a Subject Heading
To access a created subject heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 4 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SUBJECTS. The third line of the
screen is highlighted in reverse video. This line contains the title
of the default subject for the selected seminar. If no title has
been entered, the highlighted area is blank. If so, you can enter a
title if desired as described in step 3 in the preceding procedure.
2) Scroll through the list of subjects using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END
or the up and down arrow keys until the desired heading is
highlighted.
3) Press ENTER. A screen appears with a SUBJECT heading on the top
line. The title (if any) of the selected subject is displayed on the
third line, under which is a boxed in area divided into three
columns. You now have access to the selected heading for review,
print out, exporting to disk, updates including additions, deletion
to cross references or comments, or even elimination of the entire
subject heading.
Words previously entered under this heading (if any) appear in the
middle column. Notes previously entered under this heading (if any)
appear in the right column.
The middle and right columns will be blank if this is the first time
you have accessed the subject heading. You can move the highlighting
among the three columns and the selected heading field using the TAB
key. If the middle column is blank, it will be skipped.
If you press ESC while the cursor is in the rightmost column, the
cursor is removed from the rightmost column and the highlighting
appears in the left column.
If you press ESC while the highlighting is in the left or middle
column, you are returned to the screen on which the list of subjects
is displayed.
Reviewing the Selected Heading
Cross references and notes associated with a heading can be reviewed after
the heading is accessed according to the preceding procedure. The
associated cross references can be reviewed using either the F2 or the F3
key. Procedures for reviewing notes and cross references follow.
30
Reviewing Notes
To review notes, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. Use the scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow
and down arrow to move through the comments as desired. If all comments
appear in the window, PG UP and PG DN will have no effect.
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F2 key involves
pressing F2 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the Selected
Heading field. The other method involves pressing F2 while a word in the
middle column is highlighted. The results obtained by each method and
practical applications of each method are described below.
F2 from the Selected Heading Field
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
heading in the Selected Heading field on the third line of the screen.
2) Press F2.
The subject screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. All phrases that
have been cross referenced to the selected heading are accessed. To
return to the subject screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from the Title Block of the
Middle Column.
Pressing F4 deletes cross reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
31
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F2.
The subject screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. Only those cross
referenced phrases that contain the highlighted word are accessed. To
return to the subject screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from a highlighted word in
the Middle Column.
Pressing F4 deletes cross reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F3 key involves
pressing F3 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the Selected
Heading field. Another method involves pressing F3 while a word in the
middle column is highlighted. A third method (mentioned previously)
involves using the F2 key to locate a specific phrase and then pressing
the F3 key. The results obtained by each method and practical
applications of each method are described below.
F3 from the Selected Heading Field
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
32
heading in the Selected Heading field on the third line of the screen.
2) Press F3.
The subject screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading on the 4th line of
the screen. (Exception is when cross reference occurs with 1st 4 or last
14 lines of active version or portion) To return to the subject screen
press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases using the
left and right arrow keys.
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F3.
The subject screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading that contains the
word you indicated on the 4th line of the screen. (Exception is when cross
reference occurs with 1st 4 or last 14 lines of active version or portion)
To return to the subject screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases that contain the
indicated word using the left and right arrow keys.
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading
Cross references can be added in two ways. Before you can add cross
references to a heading, the heading must already be created and accessed
33
according to the preceding materials. Once a heading is created and
accessed, you can indicate that every occurrence of a word is related to
the accessed heading or that an individual occurrence of a word is
related. You can access the heading and change the cross references as
many times as you want to.
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the ENTER key. The highlighted word appears in the middle
column. All occurrences of the highlighted word are now cross referenced
to the accessed heading. To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the
cross references as described previously.
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the F2 key. The subject screen is replaced by a series of
phrases that contain the word you indicated. All phrases in the
Constitution that contain the indicated word are accessed.
You can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
You can return to the subject screen without cross referencing any thing
by pressing the ESC key before you press the ENTER key.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. This is desirable sometimes to
verify that the phrase you have highlighted is actually the phrase you are
looking for. Press ESC to return to the subject screen without cross
34
referencing anything or press F2 to return to the phrase display.
With a desired phrase highlighted, press the ENTER key. The highlighted
occurrence of the word is now cross referenced to the accessed heading.
The word you indicated before pressing F2 is added to the middle column if
it was not already there.
You can cross reference as many phrases as you wish. If you attempt to
duplicate the cross reference of an occurrence of a word to the accessed
heading, the duplicate reference is ignored. However, that same word can
still be cross referenced to as many other headings under synonyms, or
subject in the same or other seminars as you wish.
When all desired occurrences of a word are cross referenced to the
accessed heading, press the ESC key to return to the subject screen.
4) To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the cross references as
described previously.
Adding Comments
With a heading accessed, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. On the typewriter keys, type up to 190 lines of
comments per heading, 2000 maximum lines per seminar. Use the INSERT key
to control INS and RPLCE modes. Use the DELETE key or the BACK SPACE key
to erase unwanted characters. The ENTER key moves the cursor to the
beginning of the next line. If the INS mode is selected, or if the cursor
is on the last line, it also adds a line. Active scroll keys are PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, left, right, up and down arrows. They do what they
usually do in common word processor programs. Each time you press the
down arrow key or the ENTER key with the cursor on the bottom line of
your comments, you consume 41 bytes of disk space. This can add up. For
more information, refer to the file named EDITOR.DOC.
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading
Individual cross references to the accessed heading can be deleted. Or
all cross references of a selected word to the accessed heading can be
deleted. Or the accessed heading can be deleted with ALL associated cross
references and comments. Procedures to accomplish each of these delete
functions follow.
Keep in mind that you are NOT affecting the source text file in any way
when you use the delete function (or any other feature of this program for
that matter). No words can or will be deleted from the vocabulary list
35
using the F4 key. Only the accessed heading and its cross references are
affected by the F4 key.
Deleting Individual Cross References
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the F2 key. You can use the F2 key from within the Selected
Heading field or from a highlighted word in the middle column as described
previously under 'Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key'.
2) Scroll through the displayed phrases until the phrase containing the
occurrence that you wish to delete is highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN,
HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow keys to move the highlighting.
NOTE: You can return to the subject screen without deleting anything by
pressing the ESC key.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. The cross
reference to the highlighted occurrence is now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted phrase eliminated. If the deleted phrase is
the only phrase displayed, you are returned to the subject screen.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you are
returned to the display of cross referenced phrases. The highlighted
phrase is NOT deleted.
You can delete as many cross references as you wish. When finished
deleting, press the ESC key to return to the subject screen. You can
return to delete cross references to other phrases anytime you wish.
When you delete individual references using this procedure, no words are
removed from the middle column, not even if you delete all cross
references to a particular word or words.
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the TAB key until the top word in the middle column is accessed.
2) Scroll through the displayed words until the desired word is
highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow
36
keys to move the highlighting.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. All cross
references to the highlighted word are now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted word eliminated. If the deleted word is the
only word in the middle column, the highlighting moves to the left column.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, the
highlighted word is NOT deleted.
You can delete as many words as you wish. When finished deleting, you can
continue performing other functions in any desired order. You can return
to delete other words anytime you wish.
Deleting the Accessed Heading
When you delete the accessed heading, the accessed heading no longer
appears on the screen with the list of subjects. All associated cross
references and comments are deleted. The space used for comments on the
disk is NOT freed up. To delete the accessed heading, proceed as follows:
1) With the heading accessed, press the TAB key until the heading is
highlighted in the Selected Heading field on the third line of the screen.
2) Press the F4 key.
3) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. You are
returned to the screen on which the list of subjects is displayed. The
list no longer contains the deleted heading.
NOTE: You can use the same heading multiple times. This capability has
its practical applications. If you have done this, only the heading that
you accessed is deleted.
If you type an N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you can
continue reviewing the accessed heading as per usual.
Printing your Cross References
To make a hard copy of your cross references to an accessed heading,
proceed as follows:
37
1) Prepare your printer.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Press the TAB key until the accessed heading is highlighted on the
third line of the screen.
4) Press F7. The print out should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
occur.
A common mistake is to press F7 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 25-page listing of the vocabulary list for the
default version. Press the ESC key to stop print out of the vocabulary
list. The ESC key will NOT stop print out of the accessed heading.
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File
To export a soft copy of your cross references to an ASCII file, proceed
as
follows:
1) Decide on a file name.
You are prompted for a file name during this procedure. The file name
must be a valid DOS file name. The program does not perform any check of
the file name.
If you enter an invalid file name, results are unpredictable.
If you enter the file name of an existing file, the existing file is
erased when you press F5. No warning or advisory message is provided.
The file name can include a drive specifier and path information.
You MUST type in the extension. The program will not provide one.
Without the extension, some word processors may not access the file. Many
will not access the file as easily without the proper extension. Check
the documentation provided with your word processor and use the proper
extension.
2) If working with floppies, insert the target diskette in the
appropriate drive.
As has been discussed elsewhere, it is a good idea to use a separate
diskette for the purpose of exporting these soft copy versions of your
cross
references.
38
Keep track of the space on your target diskette. As has been discussed
elsewhere, a full disk error is a fatal error. You will get kicked out of
the program.
Minimum space required is 1,000 bytes. To this add 10 bytes per word in
the middle column, 80 bytes per phrase displayed (when the F2 key is
pressed while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block of
the middle column), and 50 bytes per line of comments including all blank
lines.
The maximum possible space consumed by a single heading is 170,000
bytes. But this is ridiculous and will probably NEVER occur. Even if it
does, it will fit on a single floppy if you use one that is less than half
full. As a typical example, the soft copy file created by this procedure
for the provide cross references to the word 'rights' consumes
approximately 4,000 bytes of disk space.
3) Access the desired heading.
4) Press the TAB key until the accessed heading is highlighted on the
third line of the screen.
5) Press F5. You are prompted for a file name. Type in the file name
with drive specifier, path information and extension as discussed
previously.
6) Press ENTER. The export should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
occur.
A common mistake is to press F5 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 100,000 byte listing of the vocabulary list for
the default version. Press the ESC key to stop exporting of the
vocabulary list. The ESC key will NOT stop exporting of the accessed
heading.
Don't worry about swapping diskettes. If you are working with diskettes
and you forget to swap back to the index or program diskette, you are
prompted for them when they are needed. You are NOT prompted for the
alternate diskette to export soft copy files of your cross references.
You must do this on your own before pressing ENTER after typing in the
file name.
39
MM5.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SYNONYMS
The four major steps for cross referencing synonyms are:
1) Create a heading, if it does not already exist.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Review the heading while adding or deleting related references or
comments.
4) Exit to the main menu to save changes.
Creating a Synonym Heading
To create a synonym heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 5 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SYNONYMS. A box on the screen is
divided into 3 columns. The top word in the left column is highlighted.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press ENTER. When the highlighted word appears in the middle column,
your heading is created.
At this point you can access the created synonym heading by performing the
procedure that follows beginning at step 2. Or you can press ESC to
return to the Main Menu. Notice that the title of the middle column is
'Words with Synonyms'. ESC will not return you to the Main Menu if the
title of the middle column is 'Synonyms for xxxxxxx' where xxxxxx is a
word you have selected.
Accessing a Synonym Heading
To access a created synonym heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 5 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SYNONYMS. A box on the screen is
divided into 3 columns. The top word in the left column is highlighted.
2) Press the TAB key once. The highlighting moves to the middle column.
40
3) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired heading is highlighted. (F6
won't work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
4) Press ENTER. The title block of the middle column changes to
'Synonyms for xxxxxxx' where xxxxxx is the desired heading. The word you
selected as the desired heading is highlighted. You now have access to
the selected heading for review, print out, exporting to disk, updates
including additions, deletions to cross references or comments, or even
elimination of the entire synonym heading.
Words previously entered under this heading (if any) appear in the middle
column. Notes previously entered under this heading (if any) appear in
the right column.
The middle and right columns will be blank if this is the first time you
have accessed the subject heading. You can move the highlighting among
the three columns and the middle column title block using the TAB key. If
the middle column is blank, it will be skipped.
If you press ESC while the cursor is in the rightmost column, the cursor
is removed from the rightmost column and the highlighting appears in the
left column.
If you press ESC while the highlighting is in the left column, the middle
column title block, or in the middle column, the title of the middle
column changes to 'Words with Synonyms'.
Reviewing the Selected Heading
Cross references and notes associated with a heading can be reviewed after
the heading is accessed according to the preceding procedure. The
associated cross references can be reviewed using either the F2 or the F3
key. Procedures for reviewing notes and cross references follow.
Reviewing Notes
To review notes, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. Use the scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow
and down arrow to move through the comments as desired. If all comments
appear in the window, PG UP and PG DN will have no effect.
41
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F2 key involves
pressing F2 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block
of the middle column. The other method involves pressing F2 while a word
in the middle column is highlighted. The results obtained by each method
and practical applications of each method are described below.
F2 from the Title Block of the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
heading in the title block of the middle column.
2) Press F2.
The synonym screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. All phrases that
have been cross referenced to the selected heading are accessed. To
return to the synonym screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from the Title Block of the
Middle Column.
Pressing F4 deletes cross-reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F2.
42
The synonym screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. Only those cross
referenced phrases that contain the highlighted word are accessed. To
return to the synonym screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from a highlighted word in
the Middle Column
Pressing F4 deletes cross-reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F3 key involves
pressing F3 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block
of the middle column. Another method involves pressing F3 while a word in
the middle column is highlighted. A third method (mentioned previously)
involves using the F2 key to locate a specific phrase and then pressing
the F3 key. The results obtained by each method and practical
applications of each method are described below.
F3 from the Title Block of the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
heading in the title block of the middle column.
2) Press F3.
The synonym screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading on the 4th line of
the screen. (Exception is when cross reference occurs with 1st 4 or last
14 lines of active version or portion) To return to the synonym screen
press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases using the
left and right arrow keys.
43
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F3.
The synonym screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading that contains the
word you indicated on the 4th line of the screen. (Exception is when cross
reference occurs with 1st 4 or last 14 lines of active version or portion)
To return to the synonym screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases that contain the
indicated word using the left and right arrow keys.
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading
Cross references can be added in two ways. Before you can add cross
references to a heading, the heading must already be created and accessed
according to the preceding materials. Once a heading is created and
accessed, you can indicate that every occurrence of a word is a synonym to
the accessed heading or that an individual occurrence of a word is a
synonym. You can access the heading and change the cross references as
many times as you want to.
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
44
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the ENTER key. The highlighted word appears in the middle
column. All occurrences of the highlighted word are now cross referenced
to the accessed heading. To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the
cross references as described previously.
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the F2 key. The synonym screen is replaced by a series of
phrases that contain the word you indicated. All phrases in the
Constitution that contain the indicated word are accessed.
You can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
You can return to the synonym screen without cross referencing any thing
by pressing the ESC key before you press the ENTER key.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. This is desirable sometimes to
verify that the phrase you have highlighted is actually the phrase you are
looking for. Press ESC to return to the synonym screen without cross
referencing anything or press F2 to return to the phrase display.
With a desired phrase highlighted, press the ENTER key. The highlighted
occurrence of the word is now cross referenced to the accessed heading.
The word you indicated before pressing F2 is added to the middle column if
it was not already there.
You can cross reference as many phrases as you wish. If you attempt to
duplicate the cross reference of an occurrence of a word to the accessed
heading, the duplicate reference is ignored. However, that same word can
still be cross referenced to as many other headings under synonyms, or
45
subject in the same or other seminars as you wish.
When all desired occurrences of a word are cross referenced to the
accessed heading, press the ESC key to return to the synonym screen.
4) To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the cross references as
described previously.
Adding Comments
With a heading accessed, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. On the typewriter keys, type up to 190 lines of
comments per heading, 2000 maximum lines per seminar. Use the INSERT key
to control INS and RPLCE modes. Use the DELETE key or the BACK SPACE key
to erase unwanted characters. The ENTER key moves the cursor to the
beginning of the next line. If the INS mode is selected, or if the cursor
is on the last line, it also adds a line. Active scroll keys are PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, left, right, up and down arrows. They do what they
usually do in common word processor programs. Each time you press the
down arrow key or the ENTER key with the cursor on the bottom line of
your comments, you consume 41 bytes of disk space. This can add up. For
more information, refer to the file named EDITOR.DOC.
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading
Individual cross references to the accessed heading can be deleted. Or
all cross references of a selected word to the accessed heading can be
deleted. Or the accessed heading can be deleted with ALL associated cross
references and comments. Procedures to accomplish each of these delete
functions follow.
Keep in mind that you are NOT affecting the source text file in any way
when you use the delete function (or any other feature of this program for
that matter). No words can or will be deleted from the vocabulary list
using the F4 key. Only the accessed heading and its cross references are
affected by the F4 key.
Deleting Individual Cross References
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the F2 key. You can use the F2 key from within the title block
46
of the middle column or from a highlighted word in the middle column as
described previously under 'Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key'.
2) Scroll through the displayed phrases until the phrase containing the
occurrence that you wish to delete is highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN,
HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow keys to move the highlighting.
NOTE: You can return to the synonym screen without deleting anything by
pressing the ESC key.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. The cross
reference to the highlighted occurrence is now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted phrase eliminated. If the deleted phrase is
the only phrase displayed, you are returned to the synonym screen.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you are
returned to the display of cross referenced phrases. The highlighted
phrase is NOT deleted.
You can delete as many cross references as you wish. When finished
deleting, press the ESC key to return to the synonym screen. You can
return to delete other phrases anytime you wish.
When you delete individual references using this procedure, no words are
removed from the middle column, not even if you delete all cross
references to a particular word or words.
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the TAB key until the top word in the middle column is accessed.
2) Scroll through the displayed words until the desired word is
highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow
keys to move the highlighting.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. All cross
references to the highlighted word are now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted word eliminated. If the deleted word is the
only word in the middle column, the highlighting moves to the left column.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, the
highlighted word is NOT deleted.
47
You can delete as many words as you wish. When finished deleting, you can
continue performing other functions in any desired order. You can return
to delete other words anytime you wish.
Deleting the Accessed Heading
When you delete the accessed heading, the word no longer appears in the
middle column when the heading is Words with Synonyms. All associated
cross references and comments are deleted. The space used for comments on
the disk is NOT freed up. To delete the accessed heading, proceed as
follows:
1) With the heading accessed, press the TAB key until the heading is
highlighted in the title block of the middle column.
2) Press the F4 key.
3) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. Screen is
refreshed with the comments cleared from the right column. The title of
the middle column changes to Words with Synonyms. The middle column no
longer contains the deleted heading. If there are no other words in the
middle column, the highlighting appears in the left column.
NOTE: You can use the same word as a heading multiple times. This
capability has its practical applications. If you have done this, only
the heading that you accessed is deleted.
If you type an N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you can
continue reviewing the accessed heading as per usual.
Printing your Cross References
To make a hard copy of your cross references to an accessed heading,
proceed as follows:
1) Prepare your printer.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Press the TAB key until the desired heading is highlighted in the
title block of the middle column.
4) Press F7. The print out should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
48
occur.
A common mistake is to press F7 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 25-page listing of the vocabulary list for the
default version. Press the ESC key to stop print out of the vocabulary
list. The ESC key will NOT stop print out of the accessed heading.
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File
To export a soft copy of your cross references to an ASCII file, proceed
as follows:
1) Decide on a file name.
You are prompted for a file name during this procedure. The file name
must be a valid DOS file name. The program does not perform any check of
the file name.
If you enter an invalid file name, results are unpredictable.
If you enter the file name of an existing file, the existing file is
erased when you press F5. No warning or advisory message is provided.
The file name can include a drive specifier and path information.
You MUST type in the extension. The program will not provide one.
Without the extension, some word processors may not access the file. Many
will not access the file as easily without the proper extension. Check
the documentation provided with your word processor and use the proper
extension.
2) If working with floppies, insert the target diskette in the
appropriate drive.
As has been discussed elsewhere, it is a good idea to use a separate
diskette for the purpose of exporting these soft copy versions of your
cross references.
Keep track of the space on your target diskette. As has been discussed
elsewhere, a full disk error is a fatal error. You will get kicked out of
the program.
Minimum space required is 1,000 bytes. To this add 10 bytes per word in
the middle column, 80 bytes per phrase displayed (when the F2 key is
pressed while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block of
the middle column), and 50 bytes per line of comments including all blank
lines.
49
The maximum possible space consumed by a single heading is 170,000
bytes. But this is ridiculous and will probably NEVER occur. Even if it
does, it will fit on a single floppy if you use one that is less than half
full. As a typical example, the soft copy file created by this procedure
for the provide cross references to the word 'rights' consumes
approximately 4,000 bytes of disk space.
3) Access the desired heading.
4) Press the TAB key until the desired heading is highlighted in the
title block of the middle column.
5) Press F5. You are prompted for a file name. Type in the file name
with drive specifier, path information and extension as discussed
previously.
6) Press ENTER. The export should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
occur.
A common mistake is to press F5 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 100,000 byte listing of the vocabulary list for
the default version. Press the ESC key to stop exporting of the
vocabulary
list. The ESC key will NOT stop exporting of the accessed heading.
Don't worry about swapping diskettes. If you are working with diskettes
and you forget to swap back to the index or program diskette, you are
prompted for them when they are needed. You are NOT prompted for the
alternate diskette to export soft copy files of your cross references.
You must do this on your own.
50
MM6.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 6
The Parameter Search (Words) function allows you to compile a list of
words, the usage parameters of which conform to a set of values that you
indicate on an interactive screen. A description of the interactive
screen, task-oriented (step-by-step) procedures for using the screen, and
practical hints for using this function are included in this file.
Description of the Interactive Screen
When option 6 is selected from the Main Menu, the interactive screen for
the parameter search (words) function appears. On the top line of the
screen is the title WORD PARAMETER SEARCH.
On the third line of the screen is a field labeled 'Word List Selection'.
This field allows you to select a vocabulary list. When the screen is
first displayed, the cursor is placed in this field, and the default value
is 3.
Beginning at approximately mid screen, 5 other areas for input are
displayed. Each of these five areas (described in the following material)
has two fields to receive input related to a specific word usage
parameter. In each of these five areas, one field is for a maximum value,
and the other field is for a minimum value to be used during the search.
These maximum and minimum value determine what will be 'found' during the
search. Four of the areas require numeric input. The fifth area accepts
number(s), letter(s), or word(s). When the screen is first displayed, the
maximum and minimum occurring values for the selected version or portion
are displayed in each of these five areas as the defaults.
You can move the cursor among the fields using the TAB, up arrow, or down
arrow keys. You can enter data in each field using the typewriter keys,
F9, DELETE, and the left or right arrow keys.
Press ENTER when cursor is in the top field to select a vocabulary list.
Press ENTER when the cursor is anywhere else on this screen to initiate
specified search.
Press ESC while cursor is on this screen to return to the Main Menu.
51
Parameter Field Descriptions
Five areas on the screen contain two fields intended to receive your
input. The input for each field in an area depends on what you are
looking for. The value entered in the left field of any area can be equal
to or less than the value entered in the right field of that area. Words
falling within the limits specified by your input will be displayed in a
list on another screen. You can return to this screen by pressing ESC.
If no words fall within the limits you specify, an advisory message to
that effect is displayed. If a value in the left field of any area is
greater than the value in the right field of the same area, no matches
will be found.
Each area is displayed on two lines.
The top line has a number, a title and another number. Each title
specifies the word usage parameter that is entered in its area. The left
number indicates the minimum occurring value for a word usage parameter in
the selected version or portion. The right number indicates the maximum
occurring value for a word usage parameter in the selected version or
portion. The numbers displayed on the top line of each area may vary for
each version or portion. They are determined during execution of Main
Menu option 10. The numbers on the top line of an area cannot be changed
by the user.
The second line contains a number, the symbols '<= target <=' and another
number. When the screen is first displayed, the numbers displayed on the
second line are the same as the numbers displayed on the first line. The
left field for an area begins where the left number is displayed on the
second line. The right field for an area begins where the right number is
displayed on the second line. The second line can be read, 'The words
that I am searching for (target) have a value for 'the title on first
line' that is greater than or equal to the value in the left field and
smaller than or equal to the value in the right field. You can change
the value in any field on the second line by accessing it (use the TAB
key, up arrow or down arrow keys) and then typing in a desired value using
the typewriter keys.
Syllables Area
The area with the title syllables is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines
of the screen. This area is used to specify the maximum and minimum
number of syllables in the word(s) (if any) found during the specified
search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
52
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is 0 because that is
the number of syllables entered for punctuation marks. The maximum
default value depends on which version or portion you select. The number
1787 which occurs in Article VII with the signatures has 7 syllables. If
you select USACONST.DOC or ORIGINAL.DOC using Main Menu option 2, 7 is the
maximum default value for the syllables area. The maximum can be smaller
for other versions or portions.
To compile a list of 6 syllable words, you can enter 6 in both the left
and right fields of the syllables area. If you leave the values in the
fields of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the six syllable
words in the selected vocabulary list.
To compile a list of 7 syllable words, enter 7 in both fields of the
syllables area and leave the fields of the other areas at their default
values. When you press ENTER, you get the 'No matches found' advisory
message. Why is this? The reason is that 1787 is not included in the
default vocabulary list.
To access a list containing 1787, press the TAB or up arrow key until the
cursor is in the 'Word List Selection' field. Press ENTER. Select 4.
Return to the parameter search screen and repeat the search. The number
1787 is 'found'. The reason that 1787 is found is that it is included in
the vocabulary list number 4 that you selected. (This is not true if you
select the BILLRITE.DOC or AMENDS.DOC portion using Main Menu option 2).
The preceding exercise is intended to show the functioning of the
syllables field. The exercise demonstrates how the selected vocabulary
list and selected version or portion interact with the syllables field.
The 'Letters' area and the 'Occurrences' area behave in a similar fashion.
The exercises are not repeated for them. The 'Place' area and the 'Word'
area are somewhat different. See the corresponding paragraphs for further
information about the 'Place' and 'Word' areas.
For more information about vocabulary lists, see file MM13.DOC. For more
information about versions and portions, see file MM2.DOC. For
information about entering syllable data, see file MM11.DOC.
Letters Area
The area with the title letters is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines of
the screen to the right of the syllables area. This area is used to
specify the maximum and minimum number of letters in the word(s) (if any)
found during the specified search.
53
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 1 because that is the number of letters contained in the article
adjective "A", the Roman Numerals "I" and "X", as well as the personal
pronoun "I". The maximum default value is 16 for the default version
resulting from the use of 'constitutionally' and 'disqualification'. The
minimum and maximum default values may vary with the selected version or
portion.
To compile a list of 6 letter words, you can enter 6 in both the left and
right fields of the letters area. If you leave the values in the fields
of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the six letter words in
the selected vocabulary list.
Occurrences Area
The area with the title occurrences is displayed beneath the syllables
area on the 17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to
specify the maximum and minimum number of times that the word(s) (if any)
found by a specified search are used in the selected version or portion.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 1 because numerous words are used once in that version. The
maximum default value is 700 for the default version because that is the
number of times that the article adjective 'the' is used. No other word
occurs more times in the default version. The minimum and maximum default
values may vary with the selected version or portion.
To compile a list of words that occur 6 times, you can enter 6 in both the
left and right fields of the occurrences area. If you leave the values in
the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the words in
the selected vocabulary list that occur 6 times.
Place Area
The area with the title Place is displayed beneath the letters area on the
17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to specify where in
54
the Constitution you want to search for the word(s) (if any) found during
the specified search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is always 1 because of
the way place is defined. The maximum default value is depends on the
total number of words, numbers, and punctuation marks in the selected
version or portion. The maximum default value nearly always varies with
the selected version or portion.
Place is defined as the location of a word, number or punctuation mark
relative to the beginning of a selected version or portion. Remember, a
word is a group of alphanumeric characters between two blanks, a
punctuation mark and a blank, or between a blank and a punctuation mark.
To obtain place information for a particular occurrence of a word, number
or punctuation mark, highlight the item of interest in a vocabulary list
and press F2. Highlight the occurrence of interest. Place information is
displayed at the top of the screen.
To find what word occurs in the middle of the Constitution, divide the
default maximum by 2 and enter the rounded off value in the left and right
fields of the Place area. If you leave the other areas at their defaults,
the word displayed is the word in the exact middle of the Constitution.
A more practical application of this field might be to confine your search
to a particular Article, Section, or Amendment. This would involve
finding the place information for the beginning of two consecutive
articles, sections, or amendments. Enter the place information for the
first item in the left field and enter the place information for the
second item in the right field. This allows you to perform your search
with a given article, section, or amendment.
Actually, you can specify any place value as beginning or end. Valid
input is NOT limited to beginnings of Articles, Section, or Amendments.
Word Area
The area with the title Word is displayed beneath the Occurrences area on
the 21st and 22nd lines of the screen. This area is used to specify the
word(s) (if any) found during the specified search. The words that will
be found are based on an alphanumeric evaluation of your input.
To see what is greater than what in alphanumeric sorts performed by this
program, select Main Menu option 13 and then select option 4. The
55
displayed list is in the order that is used by this search function to
evaluate your input. Generally speaking, blank comes first, followed by
punctuation marks and numbers, then capital letters, then lower case
letters.
Also, to be found, a target word must be contained in the selected
vocabulary list. The default vocabulary list contains no Arabic numbers.
Hence, if you look for the item with 7 syllables while 3 appears in the
top field, you get 'No matches found'. But there is a term with 7
syllables. To find it, move the cursor to the top field and press ENTER.
Select 1 or 4 from the menu that appears. Enter 7 in the left field of
the syllable parameter. Press ENTER. Surprised?
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
The defaults on this screen are intended to be such that all words are
included within the default ranges. Hence, all blanks is always the
default for the left field and lower case zz is always the default for the
right field.
One practical application of this area involves using it in conjunction
with the place area. You can specify a search within a given article,
section, or amendment as previously described while the same word is
entered in the left and right fields of the word area. The resulting
display tells you if the word occurs in the specified article, section, or
amendment (get the place information by using F2 on the word ARTICLE,
SECTION, or AMENDMENT in all upper case), and if so, how many times.
Performing a Search
To perform a search, proceed as follows:
1) Determine the appropriate values to specify your search, including
which vocabulary list.
2) Select 6 from the Main Menu.
3) Select the appropriate vocabulary list if it is other than the one
indicated in the 'Word List Selection' field.
4) Type the previously determined values in the fields of the appropriate
areas.
5) With the cursor in any field except the 'Word List Selection' field,
press ENTER.
56
After a delay, you either get a list of words that fit your input, or
you get an advisory message, 'No matches found'.
If the 'No Matches found' message appears, press ENTER to return to
the interactive screen.
If the list of words 'found' requires more than one screen to display,
scroll through the list using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END keys. You cannot
access phrases or text using F2 and F3.
You can print the list using the F7 key.
You can export the list to disk using the F5 key.
Using the screen print function of your computer, you can print a hard
copy of the interactive screen title WORD PARAMETER SEARCH with your
input. F7 won't print that screen. F5 won't export it to disk.
57
MM7.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 7
The Parameter Search (Clauses) function allows you to compile a list of
clauses that conform to a set of values that you indicate on an
interactive screen. A description of the interactive screen, task-
oriented (step-by-step) procedures for using the screen, and practical
hints for using this function are included in this file.
Description of the Interactive Screen
When 7 is selected from the Main Menu, the interactive screen for the
parameter search (words) function appears. On the top line of the screen
is the title CLAUSE PARAMETER SEARCH.
Beginning at approximately mid screen, 4 areas for input are displayed.
Each of these four areas (described in the following material) has two
fields to receive input related to a specific parameter of clause
complexity. In each of these four areas, one field is for a maximum
value, and the other field is for a minimum value to be used during the
search. These maximum and minimum value determine what clauses will be
found during the search. The four areas require numeric input. When the
screen is first displayed, the maximum and minimum occurring values for
the selected version or portion are displayed in each of these four areas
as the defaults.
You can move the cursor among the fields using the TAB, up arrow, or down
arrow keys. You can enter data in each field using the typewriter keys,
F9, DELETE, and the left or right arrow keys.
Press ENTER when the cursor is anywhere on this screen to initiate
specified search.
Press ESC while cursor is on this screen to return to the Main Menu.
Parameter Field Descriptions
Four areas on the screen contain two fields intended to receive your
input. The input for each field in an area depends on what you are
looking for. The value entered in the left field of any area can be equal
to or less than the value entered in the right field of that area.
Clauses falling within the limits specified by your input will be
displayed one at a time on another screen. You can return to this screen
by pressing ESC. If no clauses fall within the limits you specify, an
advisory message to that effect is displayed. If a value in the left
58
field of any area is greater than the value in the right field of the same
area, no matches will be found.
Each area is displayed on two lines.
The top line has a number, a title and another number. Each title
specifies the clause complexity parameter that is entered in its area.
The left number indicates the minimum occurring value for a clause
complexity parameter in the selected version or portion. The right number
indicates the maximum occurring value for a clause complexity parameter in
the selected version or portion. The numbers displayed on the top line of
each area may vary for each version or portion. They are determined
during execution of Main Menu option 10. The numbers on the top line of
an area cannot be changed by the user.
The second line contains a number, the symbols '<= target <=' and another
number. When the screen is first displayed, the numbers displayed on the
second line are the same as the numbers displayed on the first line. The
left field for an area begins where the left number is displayed on the
second line. The right field for an area begins where the right number is
displayed on the second line. The second line can be read, 'The clauses
that I am searching for (target) have a value for the 'title on first
line' that is greater than or equal to the value in the left field and
smaller than or equal to the value in the right field.' You can change
the value in any field on the second line by accessing it (use the TAB
key, up arrow or down arrow keys) and then typing in a desired value using
the typewriter keys.
Syllables Area
The area with the title syllables is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines
of the screen. This area is used to specify the maximum and minimum
number of syllables in the clause(s) (if any) found during the specified
search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is 0 because of the
double dash between the semi colon and the quote mark that precedes the
President's inaugural oath. The maximum default value depends on which
version or portion you select. Sixty-six is the maximum number of
syllables in a clause for the default version. The maximum can be smaller
for other versions or portions.
To compile a series of clauses with a total 6 syllable words, you can
59
enter 6 in both the left and right fields of the syllables area. If you
leave the values in the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you
get all the six syllable clauses in the selected version or portion.
Letters Area
The area with the title letters is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines of
the screen to the right of the syllables area. This area is used to
specify the maximum and minimum number of letters in the clause(s) (if
any) found during the specified search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 3 because that is the number of letters contained in the
conjunction 'and' that occurs between two commas. The maximum default
value is 222 for the default version resulting from a phrase in the 22nd
amendment. The minimum and maximum default values may vary with the
selected version or portion.
To compile a list of clauses that consist of a total of 6 letters, you can
enter 6 in both the left and right fields of the letters area. If you
leave the values in the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you
get all the six letter clauses in the selected version or portion.
Words Area
The area with the title words is displayed beneath the syllables area on
the 17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to specify the
maximum and minimum number of words contained in clause(s) (if any) found
by a specified search in the selected version or portion.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 1 because of the use of the conjunction 'and' between two commas.
The maximum default value is 65 for the default version because of a
phrase in the 22nd amendment. No other phrase is longer in the default
version. The minimum and maximum default values may vary with the
60
selected version or portion.
To compile a list of clauses that contain 6 words, you can enter 6 in both
the left and right fields of the words area. If you leave the values in
the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the 6-word
clauses in the selected version or portion.
Place Area
The area with the title Place is displayed beneath the letters area on the
17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to specify where in
the Constitution you want to search for the clause(s) (if any) found
during the specified search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is always 1 because of
the way place is defined. The maximum default value is depends on the
total number of words, numbers, and punctuation marks in the selected
version or portion. The maximum default value nearly always varies with
the selected version or portion.
Place is defined as the location of a word, number or punctuation mark
relative to the beginning of a selected version or portion. Remember, a
clause is a group of words and numbers between two punctuation marks,
between a carriage return (a blank line) and a punctuation mark or between
a punctuation mark and a carriage return. To obtain place information for
a particular occurrence of a word, number or punctuation mark, highlight
the item of interest in a vocabulary list and press F2. Highlight the
occurrence of interest. Place information is displayed at the top of the
screen.
To find what phrase occurs in the middle of the Constitution, divide the
default maximum by 2 and enter the rounded off value in the left and right
fields of the Place area. If you leave the other areas at their defaults,
the phrase displayed is the phrase in the exact middle of the
Constitution.
A more practical application of this field would involve finding the place
information for the beginning of two consecutive articles, sections, or
amendments. Enter the place information for the first item in the left
field and enter the place information for the second item in the right
field. This allows you to perform your search within a given article,
section, or amendment.
61
Performing a Search
To perform a search, proceed as follows:
1) Determine the appropriate values to specify your search.
2) Select 7 from the Main Menu.
3) Type the previously determined values in the fields of the appropriate
areas.
4) Press ENTER.
After a delay, you either get a list of clauses that fit your input,
or you get an advisory message, 'No matches found'.
If the 'No Matches found' message appears, press ENTER to return to
the interactive screen.
Scroll through the list one at a time using any key except ESC. You
cannot access phrases or text using F2 and F3.
You can print the list using the F7 key.
You can export the list to disk using the F5 key.
Using the screen print function of your computer, you can print a hard
copy of the interactive screen entitled CLAUSE PARAMETER SEARCH with your
input. F7 won't print that screen. F5 won't export it to disk.
62
MM8.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 8
Main Menu option 8 allows you to review reports automatically generated
during execution of Main Menu option 10. It also allows you to regenerate
those reports manually following update of syllable information using Main
Menu option 11. This file provides information needed to use Main Menu
option 8.
The Secondary Menu
When you select Main Menu option 8, a secondary menu consisting of 5
options numbered 0 - 4 appears. Options 1 - 3 display reports. Option 4
regenerates the reports. Option 0 returns you to the Main Menu.
The Reports
Each of the three reports focuses on a single lexicographic statistic.
The reports 'read' themselves to you. The wording is not polished. You
can export a report to disk and improve the text using your word
processor. The F5 key accomplishes this. You can print the report out on
your printer using the F7 key. If a report occupies more than one screen,
use the HOME, END, PG UP, and PG DN keys to scroll through it. When
finished with a report, press ESC to return to the secondary menu.
Secondary Menu Option 4
The execution of this function is automatic, once it is selected.
Diskette users may be prompted to swap diskettes. If so, place the index
diskette in the appropriate drive. The swap prompt is repeated until the
expected diskette is placed in the appropriate drive. When the function
is completed, you are returned to the secondary menu. You can review
reports or return to the Main Menu.
63
MM9.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 9
Main Menu option 9 allows you to review reports automatically generated
during execution of Main Menu option 10. This file provides information
needed to use Main Menu option 9.
The Secondary Menu
When you select Main Menu option 9, a secondary menu consisting of 4
options numbered 0 - 3 appears. Options 1 - 3 display reports. Option 0
returns you to the Main Menu.
The Reports
Each of the three reports focuses on a single lexicographic statistic.
The reports 'read' themselves to you. The wording is not polished. You
can export a report to disk and improve the text using your word
processor. The F5 key accomplishes this. You can print the report out on
your printer using the F7 key. If a report occupies more than one screen,
use the HOME, END, PG UP, and PG DN keys to scroll through it. When
finished with a report, press ESC to return to the secondary menu.
64
PREFACE.DOC
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Most introductory materials are available on-screen in the TCN
program. Help is available from the F1 function key. Use the F2 or F3
keys at the Main Menu. Or operate Main Menu option 14 and use function
keys F2 through F6 to obtain other introductory information about this
package.
This file introduces a package of materials known as The CONSTITUTION
Notebook Program.
It provides information about the program, the user documentation, and the
other materials included on the diskettes with The CONSTITUTION Notebook
Program.
You don't have to be a computer expert to install or operate The
CONSTITUTION Notebook Program. However, knowledge of general DOS file
name and path conventions is helpful. Refer to the documentation that was
included with your personal computer for information on this topic.
GENERAL PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
The materials included with The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program facilitate
an individual study of The United States Constitution.
The program is helpful in the study of questions that hinge on word
usage.
Two of the Main Menu options allow you to take notes on the United
States Constitution in an interactive manner. Your notes consist of a
heading, a list of related words, a compilation of related phrases, and a
set of comments. Your heading and comments are limited only by your
imagination. However, only words that appear in the Constitution can be
placed in the list of related words. Also, only phrases that appear in
the Constitution can be placed in the compilation of related phrases.
The restriction on words and phrases is deliberate. This restriction
provides a measure of conciseness and objectivity to notes produced using
this program.
When you generate such notes using this program, the program
automatically saves them on diskette for review, and update. You can
print your notes using your printer. You can also save your notes in a
file that can be used by many common word processors. With your notes in
such a file, you can embellish and expand your comments or you can
enhance the typestyles and format of the notes.
i
Lexicography statistics compiled by the program can be used to determine
the relative simplicity or complexity of various parts of the US
Constitution.
More information about capabilities of this program are contained in this
file under the heading DETAILED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION.
PROGRAM LIMITATIONS
This parse engine included with this program can accommodate no more than
12 additional (39 total) amendments to the US Constitution. No more than
2,000 additional words can be accommodated. There is a limit of 30
versions or portions.
Mouse pointer interface is not supported.
Some features might not work on non-standard keyboards.
The numeric key pad won't work for entering numbers on many
computers. These keys control scrolling and cursor movement. Use
the top row of typewriter keys to enter numbers.
The CAPS lock key or the NUM LOCK key may disable scroll keys when
enabled. If scroll keys don't work, toggle the setting of the CAPS
lock or NUM LOCK functions.
Extent of Error Recovery
A reasonable effort has been made to prevent your being ejected from the
program when mistakes are made during ordinary operator input. However,
the program is not idiot-proof. If you are reviewing the provided
materials or materials generated by you, getting kicked out of the
program means the inconvenience of a 3 to 8 minute start up. If you are
generating cross references or adding comments, getting kicked out of the
program means the possible loss of considerable effort in addition to the
3 to 8 minute start up. To avoid this, take your time while learning the
system. Type carefully to ensure you strike the intended key and review
input carefully before pressing ENTER. Save often when using Main Menu
options 4, 5, or 11. (The other options either do not require files to
be saved or else they do it automatically. Also, do not confuse the file
save function of Xport, the F5 function key, with the kind of save
described here.) To save, exit from the option to the Main Menu. The
pertinent files are saved before the Main Menu is displayed. Then return
to the option and continue working.
ii
KEYBOARD
General. The typewriter keys on your keyboard work as per usual.
Depending on the function or task being performed, some inappropriate keys
are ignored. For example, you can't type a comma in a filename.
If your keyboard has cursor movement keys (up arrow, down arrow, left
arrow, and right arrow) separate from the numeric key pad and they
don't work, try using the 8, 2, 4, and 6 keys on the numeric key pad
instead.
The BREAK, CTRL, ALT, PRINT, F9, F11 and F12 keys have no function
for this program. The TCN program ignores them.
ESC, ENTER, TAB, INSERT, DELETE, BACK SPACE, HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN,
and the up, down, left, and right arrow keys do things that they are
often used to do. Function keys F1 through F10 have mnemonics
displayed at the bottom of the screen to remind you what they do.
More information is contained in the file FUNCKEYS.DOC.
The SHIFT TAB combination is not recognized by the program.
The \ (backslash) key doesn't perform as expected on some keyboards.
If you have trouble with it,
1. Press and hold the ALT key.
2. On the numeric keypad (not the typewriter keys), type a 9
and release the 9.
3. On the numeric keypad (not the typewriter keys), type a 2
and release the 2.
4. Release the ALT key.
NOTE: You may have to toggle the NUM LOCK setting to make this
work.
This is the only use for the ALT key and the only time that you
should type numbers on the numeric keypad while using this
program.
PARAMETER SEARCH PROCEDURES
Generally, the concept for parameter search is similar for words and
clauses, Main Menu options 6 and 7, respectively. When the screen first
appears a set of parameter fields is displayed with defaults set to
maximum and minimum values that occur in the selected version or portion.
The idea is to narrow the search parameters to produce a compilation that
iii
contains a list of words or phrases of interest. The procedures to do
this are contained in files MM6.DOC and MM7.DOC for words and clauses,
respectively.
DETAILED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
The program is stored on diskette 1, the Program Diskette, in the file
TCN.EXE.
The program supports an individual study of the United States Constitution
by providing the following capabilities:
I. Parse text files containing US Constitution which produces:
A. A replication of the input file that can be accessed by the
other features of this program, but which cannot be edited.
Input file is not altered.
B. Exhaustive index of every word.
C. Lexicography data base including:
1. Gross word count.
2. Individual word count.
3. Individual word length (number of letters)
4. Lexicon that accepts manual input of syllable data for
each word.
5. Profiles of word data in 2., 3., and 4..
6. Gross clause count.
7. Word count of each clause.
8. Total characters in each clause (minus blanks).
9. Total syllables in each clause (based on 4., above).
10. Profiles of clause data in 7., 8., and 9..
11. Nine unique selectable vocabulary lists.
II. Access to Lexicography Data Base for Review, Update, Output
iv
III. A Four-Level Data Hierarchy
Allows for Organization of Results Produced by Notebook Functions
Described in Item IV.. In the outline which follows, the top tier is
represented by the capital letter A. The second tier is represented by
the Arabic numeral 1. The third tier is represented by lower case Roman
numerals i and ii. The fourth tier is represented by the lower case
letters a, b, c, and d.
A. Version or portion
Created using Main Menu option 10, accessed using Main Menu option 2.
1. Seminar
Created and accessed using Main Menu option 3.
i). Subject
Created and accessed using Main Menu option 4.
a). Heading
Up to 60 characters that names anything you can imagine
typed in on the primary subjects screen.
b). List of related words
Generated by pressing ENTER while a word is highlighted in
the vocabulary list on the secondary subjects screen, or when
F2 is pressed while a word in the vocabulary list (again, on
the secondary subjects screen) is highlighted followed by
ENTER being pressed while a desired phrase is highlighted.
c). Compilation of related phrases
Compilation of related phrases is generated by the same
keystrokes that generate the list of related words.
d). Comments
Generated by manually typing in your thoughts while the
cursor is in the third column of the secondary subjects
screen.
v
ii). Synonym
Created and accessed using Main Menu option 5.
a). Heading
Can only be a word in the vocabulary list for the selected
version or portion. Generated by highlighting a desired word
in the vocabulary list and then pressing ENTER.
b). Word list
Generated by making a heading active and pressing ENTER while
a word is highlighted in the vocabulary list, or when F2 is
pressed while a word in the vocabulary list is highlighted
followed by ENTER being pressed while a desired phrase is
highlighted.
c). Compilation of related phrases
Compilation of related phrases is generated by the same
keystrokes that generate the list of related words.
d). Comments
Generated by manually typing in your thoughts while the cursor
is in the third column of the synonym screen.
As an example of how this hierarchy can be used to some advantage, have a
supreme court case as a title for a seminar or as a subject. Use the
subordinate levels in the hierarchy to compile your research findings.
Or, use a phrase in the Constitution as the title of a subject or seminar.
If you do this, you can list supreme court cases in the comments column to
correlate the phrase with rulings.
Generally, the less information is related to a heading, the lower you can
place it in the hierarchy. Conversely, the more information related to a
heading, the higher you should place it in the hierarchy. If you have a
great deal of information to go under one heading, you could even devote
an entire version or portion to it.
IV. Notebook Functions
A. Access output described in I.A. for review.
B. Create Topic Heading
C. Access of Topic Headings for Review, Update, Deletion, Output
vi
D. Compile Index of Phrases Related to Accessed Topic
NOTE: User highlights word or phrase, then presses ENTER or
the F4 function key to achieve following. Program
automatically extracts pertinent indices from
exhaustive output described in I.B..
1. Index (under accessed topic) all phrases containing key
word.
2. Index (under accessed topic) specific occurrence(s) of
phrases containing key word.
3. Delete (from accessed topic) indices of all phrases
containing key word.
4. Delete (from accessed topic) index of specific
occurrence(s) of phrase containing key word.
E. Edit User Comments Related to Accessed Topic
NOTE: User TABs into 'Comments' column and blazes away at the
keyboard to type in up to approximately 1,000 words of
comments related to accessed topic.
TEXT OF THE UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION IN ASCII FILES
The package includes the text of the United States Constitution in ASCII
files. These files are in a directory named RIGHTS. There are four files
that contain this text. One file contains the entire Constitution with
all twenty-seven amendments. The other three files were produced by
breaking up this file. More information about these files can be found in
the file USATEXT.DOC.
Also included in the RIGHTS directory are files containing the text of 5
other significant historical documents related to individual rights.
vii
USACONST.DOC
CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES
We the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.
ARTICLE I
SECTION 1. All legislative Powers herein granted shall be vested in a Congress of the United States, which shall consist of a Senate and House of Representatives.
SECTION 2. The House of Representatives shall be composed of Members chosen every second Year by the People of the several States, and the Electors in each State shall have the Qualifications requisite for Electors of the most numerous Branch of the State Legislature.
No Person shall be a Representative who shall not have attained to the Age of twenty five Years, and been seven Years a Citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an Inhabitant of that State in which he shall be chosen.
Representatives and direct Taxes shall be apportioned among the several States which may be included within this Union, according to their respective Numbers, which shall be determined by adding to the whole Number of free Persons, including those bound to Service for a Term of Years, and excluding Indians not taxed, three-fifths of all other Persons. The actual Enumeration shall be made within three Years after the first Meeting of the Congress of the United States, and within every subsequent Term of ten Years, in such Manner as they shall by Law direct. The Number of Representatives shall not exceed one for every thirty Thousand, but each State shall have at Least one Representative; and until such enumeration shall be made, the State of New Hampshire shall be entitled to chuse three, Massachusetts eight, Rhode-Island and Providence Plantations one, Connecticut five, New York six, New Jersey four, Pennsylvania eight, Delaware one, Maryland six, Virginia ten, North Carolina five, South Carolina five, and Georgia three.
When vacancies happen in the Representation from any State, the Executive Authority thereof shall issue Writs of Election to fill such Vacancies.
The House of Representatives shall chuse their Speaker and other Officers; and shall have the sole Power of Impeachment.
SECTION 3. The Senate of the United States shall be composed of two Senators from each State, chosen by the Legislature thereof, for six Years; and each Senator shall have one Vote.
Immediately after they shall be assembled in Consequence of the first Election, they shall be divided as equally as may be into three Classes. The Seats of the Senators of the first Class shall be vacated at the Expiration of the second Year, of the second Class at the Expiration of the fourth Year, and of the third Class at the Expiration of the sixth Year, so that one-third may be chosen every second Year; and if Vacancies happen by Resignation, or otherwise, during the Recess of the Legislature of any State, the Executive thereof may make temporary Appointments until the next Meeting of the Legislature, which shall then fill such Vacancies.
No Person shall be a Senator who shall not have attained to the Age of thirty Years, and been nine Years a Citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an Inhabitant of that State for which he shall be chosen.
The Vice-President of the United States shall be President of the Senate, but shall have no Vote, unless they be equally divided.
The Senate shall chuse their other Officers, and also a President pro tempore, in the Absence of the Vice-President, or when he shall exercise the Office of President of the United States.
The Senate shall have the sole Power to try all Impeachments. When sitting for that Purpose, they shall be on Oath or Affirmation. When the President of the United States is tried, the Chief Justice shall preside: And no Person shall be convicted without the Concurrence of two-thirds of the Members present.
Judgment in Cases of Impeachment shall not extend further than to removal from Office, and disqualification to hold and enjoy any Office of honor, Trust or Profit under the United States: but the Party convicted shall nevertheless be liable and subject to Indictment, Trial, Judgment and Punishment, according to Law.
SECTION 4. The Times, Places and Manner of holding Elections for Senators and Representatives, shall be prescribed in each State by the Legislature thereof; but the Congress may at any time by Law make or alter such Regulations, except as to the Places of chusing Senators.
The Congress shall assemble at least once in every Year, and such Meeting shall be on the first Monday in December, unless they shall by Law appoint a different Day.
SECTION 5. Each House shall be the Judge of the Elections, Returns and Qualifications of its own Members, and a Majority of each shall constitute a Quorum to do Business; but a smaller Number may adjourn from day to day, and may be authorized to compel the Attendance of absent Members, in such Manner, and under such Penalties as each House may provide.
Each House may determine the Rules of its Proceedings, punish its Members for disorderly Behaviour, and, with the Concurrence of two-thirds, expel a Member.
Each House shall keep a Journal of its Proceedings, and from time to time publish the same, excepting such Parts as may in their Judgment require Secrecy; and the Yeas and Nays of the Members of either House on any question shall, at the Desire of one-fifth of those Present, be entered on the Journal.
Neither House, during the Session of Congress, shall, without the Consent of the other, adjourn for more than three days, nor to any other Place than that in which the two Houses shall be sitting.
SECTION 6. The Senators and Representatives shall receive a Compensation for their Services, to be ascertained by Law, and paid out of the Treasury of the United States. They shall in all Cases, except Treason, Felony and Breach of the Peace, be privileged from Arrest during their Attendance at the Session of their respective Houses, and in going to and returning from the same; and for any Speech or Debate in either House, they shall not be questioned in any other Place.
No Senator or Representative shall, during the Time for which he was elected, be appointed to any civil Office under the Authority of the United States, which shall have been created, or the Emoluments whereof shall have been encreased during such time; and no Person holding any Office under the United States, shall be a Member of either House during his Continuance in Office.
SECTION 7. All Bills for raising Revenue shall originate in the House of Representatives; but the Senate may propose or concur with Amendments as on other Bills.
Every Bill which shall have passed the House of Representatives and the Senate, shall, before it become a Law, be presented to the President of the United States; If he approve he shall sign it, but if not he shall return it, with his Objections to that House in which it shall have originated, who shall enter the Objections at large on their Journal, and proceed to reconsider it. If after such Reconsideration two-thirds of that House shall agree to pass the Bill, it shall be sent, together with the Objections, to the other House, by which it shall likewise be reconsidered, and if approved by two-thirds of that House, it shall become a Law. But in all such Cases the Votes of both Houses shall be determined by yeas and Nays, and the Names of the Persons voting for and against the Bill shall be entered on the Journal of each House respectively. If any Bill shall not be returned by the President within ten Days (Sundays excepted) after it shall have been presented to him, the Same shall be a Law, in like Manner as if he had signed it, unless the Congress by their Adjournment prevent its Return, in which Case it shall not be a Law.
Every Order, Resolution, or Vote to which the Concurrence of the Senate and House of Representatives may be necessary (except on a question of Adjournment) shall be presented to the President of the United States; and before the Same shall take Effect, shall be approved by him, or being disapproved by him, shall be repassed by two-thirds of the Senate and House of Representatives, according to the Rules and Limitations prescribed in the Case of a Bill.
SECTION 8. The Congress shall have Power To lay and collect Taxes, Duties, Imposts and Excises, to pay the Debts and provide for the common Defence and general Welfare of the United States; but all Duties, Imposts and Excises shall be uniform throughout the United States;
To borrow Money on the credit of the United States;
To regulate Commerce with foreign Nations, and among the several States, and with the Indian Tribes;
To establish an uniform Rule of Naturalization, and uniform Laws on the subject of Bankruptcies throughout the United States;
To coin Money, regulate the Value thereof, and of foreign Coin, and fix the Standard of Weights and Measures;
To provide for the Punishment of counterfeiting the Securities and current Coin of the United States;
To establish Post Offices and post Roads;
To promote the Progress of Science and useful Arts, by securing for limited Times to Authors and Inventors the exclusive Right to their respective Writings and Discoveries;
To constitute Tribunals inferior to the supreme Court;
To define and punish Piracies and Felonies committed on the high Seas, and Offences against the Law of Nations;
To declare War, grant Letters of Marque and Reprisal, and make Rules concerning Captures on Land and Water;
To raise and support Armies, but no Appropriation of Money to that Use shall be for a longer Term than two Years;
To provide and maintain a Navy;
To make Rules for the Government and Regulation of the land and naval Forces;
To provide for calling forth the Militia to execute the Laws of the Union, suppress Insurrections and repel Invasions;
To provide for organizing, arming, and disciplining, the Militia, and for governing such Part of them as may be employed in the Service of the United States, reserving to the States respectively, the Appointment of the Officers, and the Authority of training the Militia according to the discipline prescribed by Congress;
To exercise exclusive Legislation in all Cases whatsoever, over such District (not exceeding ten Miles square) as may, by Cession of particular States, and the Acceptance of Congress, become the Seat of the Government of the United States, and to exercise like Authority over all Places purchased by the Consent of the Legislature of the State in which the Same shall be, for the Erection of Forts, Magazines, Arsenals, dock-Yards, and other needful Buildings; -- And
To make all Laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into Execution the foregoing Powers, and all other Powers vested by this Constitution in the Government of the United States, or in any Department or Officer thereof.
SECTION 9. The Migration or Importation of such Persons as any of the States now existing shall think proper to admit, shall not be prohibited by the Congress prior to the Year one thousand eight hundred and eight, but a Tax or duty may be imposed on such Importation, not exceeding ten dollars for each Person.
The Privilege of the Writ of Habeas Corpus shall not be suspended, unless when in Cases of Rebellion or Invasion the public Safety may require it.
No Bill of Attainder or ex post facto Law shall be passed.
No Capitation, or other direct, Tax shall be laid, unless in Proportion to the Census or Enumeration herein before directed to be taken.
No Tax or Duty shall be laid on Articles exported from any State.
No Preference shall be given by any Regulation of Commerce or Revenue to the Ports of one State over those of another: nor shall Vessels bound to, or from, one State, be obliged to enter, clear, or pay Duties in another.
No Money shall be drawn from the Treasury, but in Consequence of Appropriations made by Law; and a regular Statement and Account of the Receipts and Expenditures of all public Money shall be published from time to time.
No Title of Nobility shall be granted by the United States: And no Person holding any Office of Profit or Trust under them, shall, without the Consent of the Congress, accept of any present, Emolument, Office, or Title, of any kind whatever, from any King, Prince, or foreign State.
SECTION 10. No State shall enter into any Treaty, Alliance, or Confederation; grant Letters of Marque and Reprisal; coin Money; emit Bills of Credit; make any Thing but gold and silver Coin a Tender in Payment of Debts; pass any Bill of Attainder, ex post facto Law, or Law impairing the Obligation of Contracts, or grant any Title of Nobility.
No State shall, without the Consent of the Congress, lay any Imposts or Duties on Imports or Exports, except what may be absolutely necessary for executing its inspection Laws: and the net Produce of all Duties and Imposts, laid by any State on Imports or Exports, shall be for the Use of the Treasury of the United States; and all such Laws shall be subject to the Revision and Controul of the Congress.
No State shall, without the Consent of Congress, lay any Duty of Tonnage, keep Troops, or Ships of War in time of Peace, enter into any Agreement or Compact with another State, or with a foreign Power, or engage in War, unless actually invaded, or in such imminent Danger as will not admit of delay.
ARTICLE II
SECTION 1. The executive Power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. He shall hold his Office during the Term of four Years, and, together with the Vice-President, chosen for the same Term, be elected, as follows
Each State shall appoint, in such Manner as the Legislature thereof may direct, a Number of Electors, equal to the whole Number of Senators and Representatives to which the State may be entitled in the Congress: but no Senator or Representative, or Person holding an Office of Trust or Profit under the United States, shall be appointed an Elector.
The Electors shall meet in their respective States, and vote by Ballot for two Persons, of whom one at least shall not be an Inhabitant of the same State with themselves. And they shall make a List of all the Persons voted for, and of the Number of Votes for each; which List they shall sign and certify, and transmit sealed to the Seat of the Government of the United States, directed to the President of the Senate. The President of the Senate shall, in the Presence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open all the Certificates, and the Votes shall then be counted. The Person having the greatest Number of Votes shall be the President, if such Number be a Majority of the whole Number of Electors appointed; and if there be more than one who have such Majority, and have an equal Number of Votes, then the House of Representatives shall immediately chuse by Ballot one of them for President; and if no Person have a Majority, then from the five highest on the List the said House shall in like Manner chuse the President. But in chusing the President, the Votes shall be taken by States, the Representation from each State having one Vote; A quorum for this Purpose shall consist of a Member or Members from two-thirds of the States, and a Majority of all the States shall be necessary to a Choice. In every Case, after the Choice of the President, the Person having the greatest Number of Votes of the Electors shall be the Vice-President. But if there should remain two or more who have equal Votes, the Senate shall chuse from them by Ballot the Vice-President.
The Congress may determine the Time of chusing the Electors, and the Day on which they shall give their Votes; which Day shall be the same throughout the United States.
No Person except a natural born Citizen, or a Citizen of the United States, at the time of the Adoption of this Constitution, shall be eligible to the Office of President; neither shall any Person be eligible to that Office who shall not have attained to the Age of thirty five Years, and been fourteen Years a Resident within the United States.
In Case of the Removal of the President from Office, or of his Death, Resignation, or Inability to discharge the Powers and Duties of the said Office, the Same shall devolve on the Vice-President, and the Congress may by Law provide for the Case of Removal, Death, Resignation or Inability, both of the President and Vice-President, declaring what Officer shall then act as President, and such Officer shall act accordingly, until the Disability be removed, or a President shall be elected.
The President shall, at stated Times, receive for his Services, a Compensation, which shall neither be encreased nor diminished during the Period for which he shall have been elected, and he shall not receive within that Period any other Emolument from the United States, or any of them.
Before he enter on the Execution of his Office, he shall take the following Oath or Affirmation: -- "I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faithfully execute the Office of President of the United States, and will to the best of my Ability, preserve, protect and defend the Constitution of the United States."
SECTION 2. The President shall be Commander in Chief of the Army and Navy of the United States, and of the Militia of the several States, when called into the actual Service of the United States; he may require the Opinion, in writing, of the principal Officer in each of the executive Departments, upon any Subject relating to the Duties of their respective Offices, and he shall have Power to grant Reprieves and Pardons for Offences against the United States, except in Cases of Impeachment.
He shall have Power, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Senate, to make Treaties, provided two-thirds of the Senators present concur; and he shall nominate, and by and with the Advice and Consent of the Senate, shall appoint Ambassadors, other public Ministers and Consuls, Judges of the supreme Court, and all other Officers of the United States, whose Appointments are not herein otherwise provided for, and which shall be established by Law; but the Congress may by Law vest the Appointment of such inferior Officers, as they think proper, in the President alone, in the Courts of Law, or in the Heads of Departments.
The President shall have Power to fill up all Vacancies that may happen during the Recess of the Senate, by granting Commissions which shall expire at the End of their next Session.
SECTION 3. He shall from time to time give to the Congress Information of the State of the Union, and recommend to their Consideration such Measures as he shall judge necessary and expedient; he may, on extraordinary Occasions, convene both Houses, or either of them, and in Case of Disagreement between them, with Respect to the Time of Adjournment, he may adjourn them to such Time as he shall think proper; he shall receive Ambassadors and other public Ministers; he shall take Care that the Laws be faithfully executed, and shall Commission all the Officers of the United States.
SECTION 4. The President, Vice-President and all civil Officers of the United States, shall be removed from Office on Impeachment for, and Conviction of, Treason, Bribery, or other high Crimes and Misdemeanors.
ARTICLE III
SECTION 1. The judicial Power of the United States, shall be vested in one supreme Court, and in such inferior Courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish. The Judges, both of the supreme and inferior Courts, shall hold their Offices during good Behaviour, and shall at stated Times, receive for their Services, a Compensation, which shall not be diminished during their Continuance in Office.
SECTION 2. The judicial Power shall extend to all Cases, in Law and Equity, arising under this Constitution, the Laws of the United States, and Treaties made, or which shall be made, under their Authority; -- to all Cases affecting Ambassadors, other public Ministers and Consuls; -- to all Cases of admiralty and maritime Jurisdiction; -- to Controversies to which the United States shall be a Party; -- to Controversies between two or more States; between a State and Citizens of another State; -- between Citizens of different States; -- between Citizens of the same State claiming Lands under Grants of different States, and between a State, or the Citizens thereof, and foreign States, Citizens or Subjects.
In all Cases affecting Ambassadors, other public Ministers and Consuls, and those in which a State shall be Party, the supreme Court shall have original Jurisdiction. In all the other Cases before mentioned, the supreme Court shall have appellate Jurisdiction, both as to Law and Fact, with such Exceptions, and under such Regulations as the Congress shall make.
The Trial of all Crimes, except in Cases of Impeachment, shall be by Jury; and such Trial shall be held in the State where the said Crimes shall have been committed; but when not committed within any State, the Trial shall be at such Place or Places as the Congress may by Law have directed.
SECTION 3. Treason against the United States, shall consist only in levying War against them, or in adhering to their Enemies, giving them Aid and Comfort. No Person shall be convicted of Treason unless on the Testimony of two Witnesses to the same overt Act, or on Confession in open Court.
The Congress shall have Power to declare the Punishment of Treason, but no Attainder of Treason shall work Corruption of Blood, or Forfeiture except during the Life of the Person attainted.
ARTICLE IV
SECTION 1. Full Faith and Credit shall be given in each State to the public Acts, Records, and judicial Proceedings of every other State. And the Congress may by general Laws prescribe the Manner in which such Acts, Records and Proceedings shall be proved, and the Effect thereof.
SECTION 2. The Citizens of each State shall be entitled to all Privileges and Immunities of Citizens in the several States.
A Person charged in any State with Treason, Felony, or other Crime, who shall flee from Justice, and be found in another State, shall on Demand of the executive Authority of the State from which he fled, be delivered up, to be removed to the State having Jurisdiction of the Crime.
No Person held to Service or Labour in one State, under the Laws thereof, escaping into another, shall, in Consequence of any Law or Regulation therein, be discharged from such Service or Labour, but shall be delivered up on Claim of the Party to whom such Service or Labour may be due.
SECTION 3. New States may be admitted by the Congress into this Union; but no new State shall be formed or erected within the Jurisdiction of any other State; nor any State be formed by the Junction of two or more States, or Parts of States, without the Consent of the Legislatures of the States concerned as well as of the Congress.
The Congress shall have Power to dispose of and make all needful Rules and Regulations respecting the Territory or other Property belonging to the United States; and nothing in this Constitution shall be so construed as to Prejudice any Claims of the United States, or of any particular State.
SECTION 4. The United States shall guarantee to every State in this Union a Republican Form of Government, and shall protect each of them against Invasion; and on Application of the Legislature, or of the Executive (when the Legislature cannot be convened) against domestic Violence.
ARTICLE V
The Congress, whenever two-thirds of both Houses shall deem it necessary, shall propose Amendments to this Constitution, or, on the Application of the Legislatures of two-thirds of the several States, shall call a Convention for proposing Amendments, which, in either Case, shall be valid to all Intents and Purposes, as Part of this Constitution, when ratified by the Legislatures of three-fourths of the several States, or by Conventions in three-fourths thereof, as the one or the other Mode of Ratification may be proposed by the Congress; Provided that no Amendment which may be made prior to the Year One thousand eight hundred and eight shall in any Manner affect the first and fourth Clauses in the Ninth Section of the first Article; and that no State, without its Consent, shall be deprived of its equal Suffrage in the Senate.
ARTICLE VI
All Debts contracted and Engagements entered into, before the Adoption of this Constitution, shall be as valid against the United States under this Constitution, as under the Confederation.
This Constitution, and the Laws of the United States which shall be made in Pursuance thereof; and all Treaties made, or which shall be made, under the Authority of the United States, shall be the supreme Law of the Land; and the Judges in every State shall be bound thereby, any Thing in the Constitution or Laws of any State to the contrary notwithstanding.
The Senators and Representatives before mentioned, and the Members of the several State Legislatures, and all executive and judicial Officers, both of the United States and of the several States, shall be bound by Oath or Affirmation, to support this Constitution; but no religious Test shall ever be required as a Qualification to any Office or public Trust under the United States.
ARTICLE VII
The Ratification of the Conventions of nine States, shall be sufficient for the Establishment of this Constitution between the States so ratifying the Same.
Done in Convention by the Unanimous Consent of the States present the Seventeenth Day of September in the year of our Lord one thousand seven hundred and Eighty seven and of the Independence of the United States of America the Twelfth IN WITNESS whereof We have hereunto subscribed our Names,
Go. Washington - Presidt. and deputy from Virginia
New Hampshire John Langdon Nicholas Gilman
Massachusetts Nathaniel Gorham Rufus King
Connecticut Wm: Saml. Johnson Roger Sherman
New York Alexander Hamilton
New Jersey Wil: Livingston David Brearley Wm. Paterson. Jona: Dayton
Pennsylvania B Franklin Thomas Mifflin Robt Morris Geo. Clymer Thos FitzSimons Jared Ingersoll James Wilson Gouv Morris
Delaware Geo: Read Gunning Bedford jun John Dickinson Richard Bassett Jaco: Broom
Maryland James McHenry Dan of St Thos. Jenifer Danl Carroll
Virginia John Blair -- James Madison Jr.
North Carolina Wm. Blount Richd. Dobbs Spaight. Hu Williamson
South Carolina J. Rutledge Charles Cotesworth Pinckney Charles Pinckney Pierce Butler
Georgia William Few Abr Baldwin
Attest William Jackson Secretary
In Convention Monday, September 17th. 1787.
Present
The States of
New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Connecticut, Mr. Hamilton from New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina and Georgia.
Resolved,
That the preceding Constitution be laid before the United States in Congress assembled, and that it is the Opinion of this Convention, that it should afterwards be submitted to a Convention of Delegates, chosen in each State by the People thereof, under the Recommendation of its Legislature, for their Assent and Ratification; and that each Convention assenting to, and ratifying the Same, should give Notice thereof to the United States in Congress assembled.
Resolved, That it is the Opinion of this Convention, that as soon as the Conventions of nine States shall have ratified this Constitution, the United States in Congress assembled should fix a Day on which Electors should be appointed by the States which shall have ratified the same, and a Day on which the Electors should assemble to vote for the President, and the Time and Place for commencing Proceedings under this Constitution. That after such Publication the Electors should be appointed, and the Senators and Representatives elected: That the Electors should meet on the Day fixed for the Election of the President, and should transmit their votes certified signed, sealed and directed, as the Constitution requires, to the Secretary of the United States in Congress assembled, that the Senators and Representatives should convene at the Time and Place assigned; that the Senators should appoint a President of the Senate, for the sole Purpose of receiving, opening and counting the Votes for President; and, that after he shall be chosen, the Congress, together with the President should, without Delay, proceed to execute this Constitution.
By the Unanimous Order of the Convention.
Go: Washington Presidt.
W. Jackson Secretary.
Congress of the United States
begun and held at the City of New-York, on Wednesday the fourth of March, one thousand seven hundred and eighty-nine
THE Conventions of a number of the States, having at the time of their adopting the Constitution, expressed a desire, in order to prevent misconstruction or abuse of its powers, that further declaratory and restrictive clauses should be added: And as extending the ground of public confidence in the Government, will best ensure the beneficent ends of its institution:
RESOLVED by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress assembled, two thirds of both Houses concurring, that the following Articles be proposed to the Legislatures of the several States, as Amendments to the Constitution of the United States, all or any of which Articles, when ratified by three fourths of the said Legislatures, to be valid to all intents and purposes, as part of the said Constitution; vizt.
ARTICLES in addition to, and Amendment of the Constitution of the United States of America, proposed by Congress, and ratified by the Legislatures of the several States, pursuant to the fifth Article of the original Constitution. . . .
FREDERICK AUGUSTUS MUHLENBERG
Speaker of the House of Representatives.
JOHN ADAMS, Vice-President of the United States, and President of the Senate.
ATTEST,
JOHN BECKLEY, Clerk of the House of Representatives.
SAM. A. OTIS Secretary of the Senate.
AMENDMENTS TO THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
AMENDMENT I
Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof; or abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press, or the right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition the Government for a redress of grievances.
AMENDMENT II
A well regulated Militia, being necessary to the security of a free State, the right of the people to keep and bear Arms, shall not be infringed.
AMENDMENT III
No Soldier shall, in time of peace be quartered in any house, without the consent of the Owner, nor in time of war, but in a manner to be prescribed by law.
AMENDMENT IV
The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers, and effects, against unreasonable searches and seizures, shall not be violated, and no Warrants shall issue, but upon probable cause, supported by Oath or affirmation, and particularly describing the place to be searched, and the persons or things to be seized.
AMENDMENT V
No person shall be held to answer for a capital, or otherwise infamous crime, unless on a presentment or indictment of a Grand Jury, except in cases arising in the land or naval forces, or in the Militia, when in actual service in time of War or public danger; nor shall any person be subject for the same offence to be twice put in jeopardy of life or limb, nor shall be compelled in any criminal case to be a witness against himself, nor be deprived of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law; nor shall private property be taken for public use without just compensation.
AMENDMENT VI
In all criminal prosecutions, the accused shall enjoy the right to a speedy and public trial, by an impartial jury of the State and district wherein the crime shall have been committed, which district shall have been previously ascertained by law, and to be informed of the nature and cause of the accusation; to be confronted with the witnesses against him; to have compulsory process for obtaining witnesses in his favor, and to have the Assistance of Counsel for his defence.
AMENDMENT VII
In Suits at common law, where the value in controversy shall exceed twenty dollars, the right of trial by jury shall be preserved, and no fact tried by a jury shall be otherwise re-examined in any Court of the United States, than according to the rules of the common law.
AMENDMENT VIII
Excessive bail shall not be required, nor excessive fines imposed, nor cruel and unusual punishments inflicted.
AMENDMENT IX
The enumeration in the Constitution, of certain rights, shall not be construed to deny or disparage others retained by the people.
AMENDMENT X
The powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respectively, or to the people.
AMENDMENT XI
The Judicial power of the United States shall not be construed to extend to any suit in law or equity, commenced or prosecuted against one of the United States by Citizens of another State, or by Citizens or Subjects of any Foreign State.
AMENDMENT XII
The Electors shall meet in their respective States and vote by ballot for President and Vice-President, one of whom, at least, shall not be an inhabitant of the same State with themselves; they shall name in their ballots the person voted for as President, and in distinct ballots the person voted for as Vice-President, and they shall make distinct lists of all persons voted for as President, and of all persons voted for as Vice-President, and of the number of votes for each, which lists they shall sign and certify, and transmit sealed to the seat of the Government of the United States, directed to the President of the Senate; the President of the Senate shall, in the presence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open all the certificates and the votes shall then be counted; The person having the greatest number of votes for President, shall be the President, if such number be a majority of the whole number of Electors appointed; and if no person have such majority, then from the persons having the highest numbers not exceeding three on the list of those voted for as President, the House of Representatives shall choose immediately, by ballot, the President. But in choosing the President, the votes shall be taken by States, the representation from each State having one vote; a quorum for this purpose shall consist of a member or members from two-thirds of the States, and a majority of all the States shall be necessary to a choice. And if the House of Representatives shall not choose a President whenever the right of choice shall devolve upon them, before the fourth day of March next following, then the Vice-President shall act as President, as in the case of the death or other constitutional disability of the President. The person having the greatest number of votes as Vice-President, shall be the Vice-President, if such number be a majority of the whole number of Electors appointed, and if no person have a majority, then from the two highest numbers on the list, the Senate shall choose the Vice-President; a quorum for the purpose shall consist of two-thirds of the whole number of Senators, and a majority of the whole number shall be necessary to a choice. But no person constitutionally ineligible to the office of the President shall be eligible to that of Vice-President of the United States.
AMENDMENT XIII
SECTION 1. Neither slavery nor involuntary servitude, except as a punishment for crime whereof the party shall have been duly convicted, shall exist within the United States or any place subject to their jurisdiction.
SECTION 2. Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XIV
SECTION 1. All persons born or naturalized in the United States, and subject to the jurisdiction thereof, are citizens of the United States and of the State wherein they reside. No State shall make or enforce any law which shall abridge the privileges or immunities of citizens of the United States; nor shall any State deprive any person of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law; nor deny to any person within its jurisdiction the equal protection of the laws.
SECTION 2. Representatives shall be apportioned among the several States according to their respective numbers, counting the whole number of persons in each State, excluding Indians not taxed. But when the right to vote at any election for the choice of Electors for President and Vice-President of the United States, Representatives in Congress, the executive and judicial officers of a State, or the members of the Legislature thereof, is denied to any of the male inhabitants of such State, being twenty-one years of age, and citizens of the United States, or in any way abridged, except for participation in rebellion, or other crime, the basis or representation therein shall be reduced in the proportion which the number of such male citizens shall bear to the whole number of male citizens twenty-one years of age in such State.
SECTION 3. No person shall be a Senator or Representative in Congress, or Elector of President and Vice-President, or hold any office, civil or military, under the United States, or under any State, who, having previously taken an oath, as a member of Congress, or as an officer of the United States, or as a member of any State Legislature, or as an executive or judicial officer of any State, to support the Constitution of the United States, shall have engaged in insurrection or rebellion against the same, or given aid or comfort to the enemies thereof. But Congress may by a vote of two-thirds of each House, remove such disability.
SECTION 4. The validity of the public debt of the United States, authorized by law, including debts incurred for payment of pensions and bounties for services in suppressing insurrection or rebellion, shall not be questioned. But neither the United States nor any State shall assume or pay any debt or obligation incurred in aid of insurrection or rebellion against the United States, or any claim for the loss or emancipation of any slave; but all such debts, obligations and claims shall be held illegal and void.
SECTION 5. The Congress shall have power to enforce, by appropriate legislation, the provisions of this article.
AMENDMENT XV
SECTION 1. The right of citizens of the United States to vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or by any State on account of race, color, or previous condition of servitude.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XVI
The Congress shall have power to lay and collect taxes on incomes, from whatever source derived, without apportionment among the several States, and without regard to any census or enumeration.
AMENDMENT XVII
The Senate of the United States shall be composed of two Senators from each State, elected by the people thereof, for six years; and each Senator shall have one vote. The electors in each State shall have the qualifications requisite for electors of the most numerous branch of the State Legislatures.
When vacancies happen in the representation of any State in the Senate, the executive authority of such State shall issue writs of election to fill such vacancies: Provided, That the Legislature of any State may empower the Executive thereof to make temporary appointments until the people fill the vacancies by election as the Legislature may direct.
This amendment shall not be so construed as to affect the election or term of any Senator chosen before it becomes valid as part of the Constitution.
AMENDMENT XVIII
SECTION 1. After one year from the ratification of this article the manufacture, sale, or transportation of intoxicating liquors within, the importation thereof into, or the exportation thereof from the United States and all territory subject to the jurisdiction thereof for beverage purposes is hereby prohibited.
SECTION 2. The Congress and the several States shall have concurrent power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
SECTION 3. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by the legislatures of the several States, as provided in the Constitution, within seven years from the date of the submission hereof to the States by the Congress.
AMENDMENT XIX
The right of citizens of the United States to vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or by any State on account of sex.
Congress shall have power to enforce this Article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XX
SECTION 1. The terms of the President and Vice-President shall end at noon on the 20th day of January, and the terms of Senators and Representatives at noon on the 3rd day of January, of the years in which such terms would have ended if this article had not been ratified; and the terms of their successors shall then begin.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall assemble at least once in every year, and such meeting shall begin at noon on the 3rd day of January, unless they shall by law appoint a different day.
SECTION 3. If, at the time fixed for the beginning of the term of the President, the President elect shall have died, the Vice-President elect shall become President. If a President shall not have been chosen before the the time fixed for the beginning of his term, or if the President elect shall have failed to qualify, then the Vice-President elect shall act as President until a President shall have qualified; and the Congress may by law provide for the case wherein neither a President elect nor a Vice-President elect shall have qualified, declaring who shall then act as President, or the manner in which one who is to act shall be selected, and such person shall act accordingly until a President or Vice-President shall have qualified.
SECTION 4. The Congress may by law provide for the case of the death of any of the persons from whom the House of Representatives may choose a President whenever the right of choice shall have devolved upon them, and for the case of the death of any of the persons from whom the Senate may choose a Vice-President whenever the right of choice shall have devolved upon them.
SECTION 5. Sections 1 and 2 shall take effect on the 15th day of October following the ratification of this article.
SECTION 6. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by the Legislatures of three-fourths of the several States within seven years from the date of its submission.
AMENDMENT XXI
SECTION 1. The eighteenth article of amendment to the Constitution of the United States is hereby repealed.
SECTION 2. The transportation or importation into any State, Territory, or Possession of the United States for delivery or use therein of intoxicating liquors, in violation of the laws thereof, is hereby prohibited.
SECTION 3. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by conventions in the several States, as provided in the Constitution, within seven years from the date of the submission hereof to the States by the Congress.
AMENDMENT XXII
SECTION 1. No person shall be elected to the office of the President more than twice, and no person who has held the office of President, or acted as President, for more than two years of a term to which some other person was elected President shall be elected to the office of the President more than once. But this article shall not apply to any person holding the office of President when this Article was proposed by the Congress, and shall not prevent any person who may be holding the office of President, or acting as President, during the term within which this Article becomes operative from holding the office of President or acting as President during the remainder of such term.
SECTION 2. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by the Legislatures of three-fourths of the several States within seven years from the date of its submission to the States by the Congress.
AMENDMENT XXIII
SECTION 1. The District constituting the seat of Government of the United States shall appoint in such manner as the Congress may direct:
A number of electors of President and Vice-President equal to the whole number of Senators and Representatives in Congress to which the District would be entitled if it were a State, but in no event more than the least populous State; they shall be in addition to those appointed by the States, but they shall be considered, for the purposes of the election of President and Vice-President, to be electors appointed by a State; and they shall meet in the District and perform such duties as provided by the twelfth article of amendment.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XXIV
SECTION 1. The right of citizens of the United States to vote in any primary or other election for President or Vice-President, for electors for President or Vice-President, or for Senator or Representative in Congress, shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or any State by reason of failure to pay any poll tax or other tax.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XXV
SECTION 1. In case of the removal of the President from office or of his death or resignation, the Vice-President shall become President.
SECTION 2. Whenever there is a vacancy in the office of the Vice-President, the President shall nominate a Vice-President who shall take office upon confirmation by a majority vote of both houses of Congress.
SECTION 3. Whenever the President transmits to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives his written declaration that he is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, and until he transmits to them a written declaration to the contrary, such powers and duties shall be discharged by the Vice-President as Acting President.
SECTION 4. Whenever the Vice-President and a majority of either the principal officers of the executive departments or of such other body as Congress may by law provide, transmit to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives their written declaration that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, the Vice-President shall immediately assume the powers and duties of the office as Acting President.
Thereafter, when the President transmits to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives his written declaration that no inability exists, he shall resume the powers and duties of his office unless the Vice-President and a majority of either the principal officers of the executive department or of such other body as Congress may by law provide, transmit within four days to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives their written declaration that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office. Thereupon Congress shall decide the issue, assembling within forty-eight hours for that purpose if not in session. If the Congress, within twenty-one days after receipt of the latter written declaration, or, if Congress is not in session, within twenty-one days after Congress is required to assemble, determines by two-thirds vote of both houses that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, the Vice-President shall continue to discharge the same as Acting President; otherwise, the President shall resume the powers and duties of his office.
AMENDMENT XXVI
SECTION 1. The right of citizens of the United States, who are eighteen years of age or older, to vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or by any State on account of age.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have the power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XXVII
No law, varying the compensation for the services of the Senators and Representatives, shall take effect, until an election of Representatives shall have intervened.
USACONST.DOC
CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES
We the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.
ARTICLE I
SECTION 1. All legislative Powers herein granted shall be vested in a Congress of the United States, which shall consist of a Senate and House of Representatives.
SECTION 2. The House of Representatives shall be composed of Members chosen every second Year by the People of the several States, and the Electors in each State shall have the Qualifications requisite for Electors of the most numerous Branch of the State Legislature.
No Person shall be a Representative who shall not have attained to the Age of twenty five Years, and been seven Years a Citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an Inhabitant of that State in which he shall be chosen.
Representatives and direct Taxes shall be apportioned among the several States which may be included within this Union, according to their respective Numbers, which shall be determined by adding to the whole Number of free Persons, including those bound to Service for a Term of Years, and excluding Indians not taxed, three-fifths of all other Persons. The actual Enumeration shall be made within three Years after the first Meeting of the Congress of the United States, and within every subsequent Term of ten Years, in such Manner as they shall by Law direct. The Number of Representatives shall not exceed one for every thirty Thousand, but each State shall have at Least one Representative; and until such enumeration shall be made, the State of New Hampshire shall be entitled to chuse three, Massachusetts eight, Rhode-Island and Providence Plantations one, Connecticut five, New York six, New Jersey four, Pennsylvania eight, Delaware one, Maryland six, Virginia ten, North Carolina five, South Carolina five, and Georgia three.
When vacancies happen in the Representation from any State, the Executive Authority thereof shall issue Writs of Election to fill such Vacancies.
The House of Representatives shall chuse their Speaker and other Officers; and shall have the sole Power of Impeachment.
SECTION 3. The Senate of the United States shall be composed of two Senators from each State, chosen by the Legislature thereof, for six Years; and each Senator shall have one Vote.
Immediately after they shall be assembled in Consequence of the first Election, they shall be divided as equally as may be into three Classes. The Seats of the Senators of the first Class shall be vacated at the Expiration of the second Year, of the second Class at the Expiration of the fourth Year, and of the third Class at the Expiration of the sixth Year, so that one-third may be chosen every second Year; and if Vacancies happen by Resignation, or otherwise, during the Recess of the Legislature of any State, the Executive thereof may make temporary Appointments until the next Meeting of the Legislature, which shall then fill such Vacancies.
No Person shall be a Senator who shall not have attained to the Age of thirty Years, and been nine Years a Citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an Inhabitant of that State for which he shall be chosen.
The Vice-President of the United States shall be President of the Senate, but shall have no Vote, unless they be equally divided.
The Senate shall chuse their other Officers, and also a President pro tempore, in the Absence of the Vice-President, or when he shall exercise the Office of President of the United States.
The Senate shall have the sole Power to try all Impeachments. When sitting for that Purpose, they shall be on Oath or Affirmation. When the President of the United States is tried, the Chief Justice shall preside: And no Person shall be convicted without the Concurrence of two-thirds of the Members present.
Judgment in Cases of Impeachment shall not extend further than to removal from Office, and disqualification to hold and enjoy any Office of honor, Trust or Profit under the United States: but the Party convicted shall nevertheless be liable and subject to Indictment, Trial, Judgment and Punishment, according to Law.
SECTION 4. The Times, Places and Manner of holding Elections for Senators and Representatives, shall be prescribed in each State by the Legislature thereof; but the Congress may at any time by Law make or alter such Regulations, except as to the Places of chusing Senators.
The Congress shall assemble at least once in every Year, and such Meeting shall be on the first Monday in December, unless they shall by Law appoint a different Day.
SECTION 5. Each House shall be the Judge of the Elections, Returns and Qualifications of its own Members, and a Majority of each shall constitute a Quorum to do Business; but a smaller Number may adjourn from day to day, and may be authorized to compel the Attendance of absent Members, in such Manner, and under such Penalties as each House may provide.
Each House may determine the Rules of its Proceedings, punish its Members for disorderly Behaviour, and, with the Concurrence of two-thirds, expel a Member.
Each House shall keep a Journal of its Proceedings, and from time to time publish the same, excepting such Parts as may in their Judgment require Secrecy; and the Yeas and Nays of the Members of either House on any question shall, at the Desire of one-fifth of those Present, be entered on the Journal.
Neither House, during the Session of Congress, shall, without the Consent of the other, adjourn for more than three days, nor to any other Place than that in which the two Houses shall be sitting.
SECTION 6. The Senators and Representatives shall receive a Compensation for their Services, to be ascertained by Law, and paid out of the Treasury of the United States. They shall in all Cases, except Treason, Felony and Breach of the Peace, be privileged from Arrest during their Attendance at the Session of their respective Houses, and in going to and returning from the same; and for any Speech or Debate in either House, they shall not be questioned in any other Place.
No Senator or Representative shall, during the Time for which he was elected, be appointed to any civil Office under the Authority of the United States, which shall have been created, or the Emoluments whereof shall have been encreased during such time; and no Person holding any Office under the United States, shall be a Member of either House during his Continuance in Office.
SECTION 7. All Bills for raising Revenue shall originate in the House of Representatives; but the Senate may propose or concur with Amendments as on other Bills.
Every Bill which shall have passed the House of Representatives and the Senate, shall, before it become a Law, be presented to the President of the United States; If he approve he shall sign it, but if not he shall return it, with his Objections to that House in which it shall have originated, who shall enter the Objections at large on their Journal, and proceed to reconsider it. If after such Reconsideration two-thirds of that House shall agree to pass the Bill, it shall be sent, together with the Objections, to the other House, by which it shall likewise be reconsidered, and if approved by two-thirds of that House, it shall become a Law. But in all such Cases the Votes of both Houses shall be determined by yeas and Nays, and the Names of the Persons voting for and against the Bill shall be entered on the Journal of each House respectively. If any Bill shall not be returned by the President within ten Days (Sundays excepted) after it shall have been presented to him, the Same shall be a Law, in like Manner as if he had signed it, unless the Congress by their Adjournment prevent its Return, in which Case it shall not be a Law.
Every Order, Resolution, or Vote to which the Concurrence of the Senate and House of Representatives may be necessary (except on a question of Adjournment) shall be presented to the President of the United States; and before the Same shall take Effect, shall be approved by him, or being disapproved by him, shall be repassed by two-thirds of the Senate and House of Representatives, according to the Rules and Limitations prescribed in the Case of a Bill.
SECTION 8. The Congress shall have Power To lay and collect Taxes, Duties, Imposts and Excises, to pay the Debts and provide for the common Defence and general Welfare of the United States; but all Duties, Imposts and Excises shall be uniform throughout the United States;
To borrow Money on the credit of the United States;
To regulate Commerce with foreign Nations, and among the several States, and with the Indian Tribes;
To establish an uniform Rule of Naturalization, and uniform Laws on the subject of Bankruptcies throughout the United States;
To coin Money, regulate the Value thereof, and of foreign Coin, and fix the Standard of Weights and Measures;
To provide for the Punishment of counterfeiting the Securities and current Coin of the United States;
To establish Post Offices and post Roads;
To promote the Progress of Science and useful Arts, by securing for limited Times to Authors and Inventors the exclusive Right to their respective Writings and Discoveries;
To constitute Tribunals inferior to the supreme Court;
To define and punish Piracies and Felonies committed on the high Seas, and Offences against the Law of Nations;
To declare War, grant Letters of Marque and Reprisal, and make Rules concerning Captures on Land and Water;
To raise and support Armies, but no Appropriation of Money to that Use shall be for a longer Term than two Years;
To provide and maintain a Navy;
To make Rules for the Government and Regulation of the land and naval Forces;
To provide for calling forth the Militia to execute the Laws of the Union, suppress Insurrections and repel Invasions;
To provide for organizing, arming, and disciplining, the Militia, and for governing such Part of them as may be employed in the Service of the United States, reserving to the States respectively, the Appointment of the Officers, and the Authority of training the Militia according to the discipline prescribed by Congress;
To exercise exclusive Legislation in all Cases whatsoever, over such District (not exceeding ten Miles square) as may, by Cession of particular States, and the Acceptance of Congress, become the Seat of the Government of the United States, and to exercise like Authority over all Places purchased by the Consent of the Legislature of the State in which the Same shall be, for the Erection of Forts, Magazines, Arsenals, dock-Yards, and other needful Buildings; -- And
To make all Laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into Execution the foregoing Powers, and all other Powers vested by this Constitution in the Government of the United States, or in any Department or Officer thereof.
SECTION 9. The Migration or Importation of such Persons as any of the States now existing shall think proper to admit, shall not be prohibited by the Congress prior to the Year one thousand eight hundred and eight, but a Tax or duty may be imposed on such Importation, not exceeding ten dollars for each Person.
The Privilege of the Writ of Habeas Corpus shall not be suspended, unless when in Cases of Rebellion or Invasion the public Safety may require it.
No Bill of Attainder or ex post facto Law shall be passed.
No Capitation, or other direct, Tax shall be laid, unless in Proportion to the Census or Enumeration herein before directed to be taken.
No Tax or Duty shall be laid on Articles exported from any State.
No Preference shall be given by any Regulation of Commerce or Revenue to the Ports of one State over those of another: nor shall Vessels bound to, or from, one State, be obliged to enter, clear, or pay Duties in another.
No Money shall be drawn from the Treasury, but in Consequence of Appropriations made by Law; and a regular Statement and Account of the Receipts and Expenditures of all public Money shall be published from time to time.
No Title of Nobility shall be granted by the United States: And no Person holding any Office of Profit or Trust under them, shall, without the Consent of the Congress, accept of any present, Emolument, Office, or Title, of any kind whatever, from any King, Prince, or foreign State.
SECTION 10. No State shall enter into any Treaty, Alliance, or Confederation; grant Letters of Marque and Reprisal; coin Money; emit Bills of Credit; make any Thing but gold and silver Coin a Tender in Payment of Debts; pass any Bill of Attainder, ex post facto Law, or Law impairing the Obligation of Contracts, or grant any Title of Nobility.
No State shall, without the Consent of the Congress, lay any Imposts or Duties on Imports or Exports, except what may be absolutely necessary for executing its inspection Laws: and the net Produce of all Duties and Imposts, laid by any State on Imports or Exports, shall be for the Use of the Treasury of the United States; and all such Laws shall be subject to the Revision and Controul of the Congress.
No State shall, without the Consent of Congress, lay any Duty of Tonnage, keep Troops, or Ships of War in time of Peace, enter into any Agreement or Compact with another State, or with a foreign Power, or engage in War, unless actually invaded, or in such imminent Danger as will not admit of delay.
ARTICLE II
SECTION 1. The executive Power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. He shall hold his Office during the Term of four Years, and, together with the Vice-President, chosen for the same Term, be elected, as follows
Each State shall appoint, in such Manner as the Legislature thereof may direct, a Number of Electors, equal to the whole Number of Senators and Representatives to which the State may be entitled in the Congress: but no Senator or Representative, or Person holding an Office of Trust or Profit under the United States, shall be appointed an Elector.
The Electors shall meet in their respective States, and vote by Ballot for two Persons, of whom one at least shall not be an Inhabitant of the same State with themselves. And they shall make a List of all the Persons voted for, and of the Number of Votes for each; which List they shall sign and certify, and transmit sealed to the Seat of the Government of the United States, directed to the President of the Senate. The President of the Senate shall, in the Presence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open all the Certificates, and the Votes shall then be counted. The Person having the greatest Number of Votes shall be the President, if such Number be a Majority of the whole Number of Electors appointed; and if there be more than one who have such Majority, and have an equal Number of Votes, then the House of Representatives shall immediately chuse by Ballot one of them for President; and if no Person have a Majority, then from the five highest on the List the said House shall in like Manner chuse the President. But in chusing the President, the Votes shall be taken by States, the Representation from each State having one Vote; A quorum for this Purpose shall consist of a Member or Members from two-thirds of the States, and a Majority of all the States shall be necessary to a Choice. In every Case, after the Choice of the President, the Person having the greatest Number of Votes of the Electors shall be the Vice-President. But if there should remain two or more who have equal Votes, the Senate shall chuse from them by Ballot the Vice-President.
The Congress may determine the Time of chusing the Electors, and the Day on which they shall give their Votes; which Day shall be the same throughout the United States.
No Person except a natural born Citizen, or a Citizen of the United States, at the time of the Adoption of this Constitution, shall be eligible to the Office of President; neither shall any Person be eligible to that Office who shall not have attained to the Age of thirty five Years, and been fourteen Years a Resident within the United States.
In Case of the Removal of the President from Office, or of his Death, Resignation, or Inability to discharge the Powers and Duties of the said Office, the Same shall devolve on the Vice-President, and the Congress may by Law provide for the Case of Removal, Death, Resignation or Inability, both of the President and Vice-President, declaring what Officer shall then act as President, and such Officer shall act accordingly, until the Disability be removed, or a President shall be elected.
The President shall, at stated Times, receive for his Services, a Compensation, which shall neither be encreased nor diminished during the Period for which he shall have been elected, and he shall not receive within that Period any other Emolument from the United States, or any of them.
Before he enter on the Execution of his Office, he shall take the following Oath or Affirmation: -- "I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faithfully execute the Office of President of the United States, and will to the best of my Ability, preserve, protect and defend the Constitution of the United States."
SECTION 2. The President shall be Commander in Chief of the Army and Navy of the United States, and of the Militia of the several States, when called into the actual Service of the United States; he may require the Opinion, in writing, of the principal Officer in each of the executive Departments, upon any Subject relating to the Duties of their respective Offices, and he shall have Power to grant Reprieves and Pardons for Offences against the United States, except in Cases of Impeachment.
He shall have Power, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Senate, to make Treaties, provided two-thirds of the Senators present concur; and he shall nominate, and by and with the Advice and Consent of the Senate, shall appoint Ambassadors, other public Ministers and Consuls, Judges of the supreme Court, and all other Officers of the United States, whose Appointments are not herein otherwise provided for, and which shall be established by Law; but the Congress may by Law vest the Appointment of such inferior Officers, as they think proper, in the President alone, in the Courts of Law, or in the Heads of Departments.
The President shall have Power to fill up all Vacancies that may happen during the Recess of the Senate, by granting Commissions which shall expire at the End of their next Session.
SECTION 3. He shall from time to time give to the Congress Information of the State of the Union, and recommend to their Consideration such Measures as he shall judge necessary and expedient; he may, on extraordinary Occasions, convene both Houses, or either of them, and in Case of Disagreement between them, with Respect to the Time of Adjournment, he may adjourn them to such Time as he shall think proper; he shall receive Ambassadors and other public Ministers; he shall take Care that the Laws be faithfully executed, and shall Commission all the Officers of the United States.
SECTION 4. The President, Vice-President and all civil Officers of the United States, shall be removed from Office on Impeachment for, and Conviction of, Treason, Bribery, or other high Crimes and Misdemeanors.
ARTICLE III
SECTION 1. The judicial Power of the United States, shall be vested in one supreme Court, and in such inferior Courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish. The Judges, both of the supreme and inferior Courts, shall hold their Offices during good Behaviour, and shall at stated Times, receive for their Services, a Compensation, which shall not be diminished during their Continuance in Office.
SECTION 2. The judicial Power shall extend to all Cases, in Law and Equity, arising under this Constitution, the Laws of the United States, and Treaties made, or which shall be made, under their Authority; -- to all Cases affecting Ambassadors, other public Ministers and Consuls; -- to all Cases of admiralty and maritime Jurisdiction; -- to Controversies to which the United States shall be a Party; -- to Controversies between two or more States; between a State and Citizens of another State; -- between Citizens of different States; -- between Citizens of the same State claiming Lands under Grants of different States, and between a State, or the Citizens thereof, and foreign States, Citizens or Subjects.
In all Cases affecting Ambassadors, other public Ministers and Consuls, and those in which a State shall be Party, the supreme Court shall have original Jurisdiction. In all the other Cases before mentioned, the supreme Court shall have appellate Jurisdiction, both as to Law and Fact, with such Exceptions, and under such Regulations as the Congress shall make.
The Trial of all Crimes, except in Cases of Impeachment, shall be by Jury; and such Trial shall be held in the State where the said Crimes shall have been committed; but when not committed within any State, the Trial shall be at such Place or Places as the Congress may by Law have directed.
SECTION 3. Treason against the United States, shall consist only in levying War against them, or in adhering to their Enemies, giving them Aid and Comfort. No Person shall be convicted of Treason unless on the Testimony of two Witnesses to the same overt Act, or on Confession in open Court.
The Congress shall have Power to declare the Punishment of Treason, but no Attainder of Treason shall work Corruption of Blood, or Forfeiture except during the Life of the Person attainted.
ARTICLE IV
SECTION 1. Full Faith and Credit shall be given in each State to the public Acts, Records, and judicial Proceedings of every other State. And the Congress may by general Laws prescribe the Manner in which such Acts, Records and Proceedings shall be proved, and the Effect thereof.
SECTION 2. The Citizens of each State shall be entitled to all Privileges and Immunities of Citizens in the several States.
A Person charged in any State with Treason, Felony, or other Crime, who shall flee from Justice, and be found in another State, shall on Demand of the executive Authority of the State from which he fled, be delivered up, to be removed to the State having Jurisdiction of the Crime.
No Person held to Service or Labour in one State, under the Laws thereof, escaping into another, shall, in Consequence of any Law or Regulation therein, be discharged from such Service or Labour, but shall be delivered up on Claim of the Party to whom such Service or Labour may be due.
SECTION 3. New States may be admitted by the Congress into this Union; but no new State shall be formed or erected within the Jurisdiction of any other State; nor any State be formed by the Junction of two or more States, or Parts of States, without the Consent of the Legislatures of the States concerned as well as of the Congress.
The Congress shall have Power to dispose of and make all needful Rules and Regulations respecting the Territory or other Property belonging to the United States; and nothing in this Constitution shall be so construed as to Prejudice any Claims of the United States, or of any particular State.
SECTION 4. The United States shall guarantee to every State in this Union a Republican Form of Government, and shall protect each of them against Invasion; and on Application of the Legislature, or of the Executive (when the Legislature cannot be convened) against domestic Violence.
ARTICLE V
The Congress, whenever two-thirds of both Houses shall deem it necessary, shall propose Amendments to this Constitution, or, on the Application of the Legislatures of two-thirds of the several States, shall call a Convention for proposing Amendments, which, in either Case, shall be valid to all Intents and Purposes, as Part of this Constitution, when ratified by the Legislatures of three-fourths of the several States, or by Conventions in three-fourths thereof, as the one or the other Mode of Ratification may be proposed by the Congress; Provided that no Amendment which may be made prior to the Year One thousand eight hundred and eight shall in any Manner affect the first and fourth Clauses in the Ninth Section of the first Article; and that no State, without its Consent, shall be deprived of its equal Suffrage in the Senate.
ARTICLE VI
All Debts contracted and Engagements entered into, before the Adoption of this Constitution, shall be as valid against the United States under this Constitution, as under the Confederation.
This Constitution, and the Laws of the United States which shall be made in Pursuance thereof; and all Treaties made, or which shall be made, under the Authority of the United States, shall be the supreme Law of the Land; and the Judges in every State shall be bound thereby, any Thing in the Constitution or Laws of any State to the contrary notwithstanding.
The Senators and Representatives before mentioned, and the Members of the several State Legislatures, and all executive and judicial Officers, both of the United States and of the several States, shall be bound by Oath or Affirmation, to support this Constitution; but no religious Test shall ever be required as a Qualification to any Office or public Trust under the United States.
ARTICLE VII
The Ratification of the Conventions of nine States, shall be sufficient for the Establishment of this Constitution between the States so ratifying the Same.
Done in Convention by the Unanimous Consent of the States present the Seventeenth Day of September in the year of our Lord one thousand seven hundred and Eighty seven and of the Independence of the United States of America the Twelfth IN WITNESS whereof We have hereunto subscribed our Names,
Go. Washington - Presidt. and deputy from Virginia
New Hampshire John Langdon Nicholas Gilman
Massachusetts Nathaniel Gorham Rufus King
Connecticut Wm: Saml. Johnson Roger Sherman
New York Alexander Hamilton
New Jersey Wil: Livingston David Brearley Wm. Paterson. Jona: Dayton
Pennsylvania B Franklin Thomas Mifflin Robt Morris Geo. Clymer Thos FitzSimons Jared Ingersoll James Wilson Gouv Morris
Delaware Geo: Read Gunning Bedford jun John Dickinson Richard Bassett Jaco: Broom
Maryland James McHenry Dan of St Thos. Jenifer Danl Carroll
Virginia John Blair -- James Madison Jr.
North Carolina Wm. Blount Richd. Dobbs Spaight. Hu Williamson
South Carolina J. Rutledge Charles Cotesworth Pinckney Charles Pinckney Pierce Butler
Georgia William Few Abr Baldwin
Attest William Jackson Secretary
In Convention Monday, September 17th. 1787.
Present
The States of
New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Connecticut, Mr. Hamilton from New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina and Georgia.
Resolved,
That the preceding Constitution be laid before the United States in Congress assembled, and that it is the Opinion of this Convention, that it should afterwards be submitted to a Convention of Delegates, chosen in each State by the People thereof, under the Recommendation of its Legislature, for their Assent and Ratification; and that each Convention assenting to, and ratifying the Same, should give Notice thereof to the United States in Congress assembled.
Resolved, That it is the Opinion of this Convention, that as soon as the Conventions of nine States shall have ratified this Constitution, the United States in Congress assembled should fix a Day on which Electors should be appointed by the States which shall have ratified the same, and a Day on which the Electors should assemble to vote for the President, and the Time and Place for commencing Proceedings under this Constitution. That after such Publication the Electors should be appointed, and the Senators and Representatives elected: That the Electors should meet on the Day fixed for the Election of the President, and should transmit their votes certified signed, sealed and directed, as the Constitution requires, to the Secretary of the United States in Congress assembled, that the Senators and Representatives should convene at the Time and Place assigned; that the Senators should appoint a President of the Senate, for the sole Purpose of receiving, opening and counting the Votes for President; and, that after he shall be chosen, the Congress, together with the President should, without Delay, proceed to execute this Constitution.
By the Unanimous Order of the Convention.
Go: Washington Presidt.
W. Jackson Secretary.
Congress of the United States
begun and held at the City of New-York, on Wednesday the fourth of March, one thousand seven hundred and eighty-nine
THE Conventions of a number of the States, having at the time of their adopting the Constitution, expressed a desire, in order to prevent misconstruction or abuse of its powers, that further declaratory and restrictive clauses should be added: And as extending the ground of public confidence in the Government, will best ensure the beneficent ends of its institution:
RESOLVED by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress assembled, two thirds of both Houses concurring, that the following Articles be proposed to the Legislatures of the several States, as Amendments to the Constitution of the United States, all or any of which Articles, when ratified by three fourths of the said Legislatures, to be valid to all intents and purposes, as part of the said Constitution; vizt.
ARTICLES in addition to, and Amendment of the Constitution of the United States of America, proposed by Congress, and ratified by the Legislatures of the several States, pursuant to the fifth Article of the original Constitution. . . .
FREDERICK AUGUSTUS MUHLENBERG
Speaker of the House of Representatives.
JOHN ADAMS, Vice-President of the United States, and President of the Senate.
ATTEST,
JOHN BECKLEY, Clerk of the House of Representatives.
SAM. A. OTIS Secretary of the Senate.
AMENDMENTS TO THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
AMENDMENT I
Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof; or abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press, or the right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition the Government for a redress of grievances.
AMENDMENT II
A well regulated Militia, being necessary to the security of a free State, the right of the people to keep and bear Arms, shall not be infringed.
AMENDMENT III
No Soldier shall, in time of peace be quartered in any house, without the consent of the Owner, nor in time of war, but in a manner to be prescribed by law.
AMENDMENT IV
The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers, and effects, against unreasonable searches and seizures, shall not be violated, and no Warrants shall issue, but upon probable cause, supported by Oath or affirmation, and particularly describing the place to be searched, and the persons or things to be seized.
AMENDMENT V
No person shall be held to answer for a capital, or otherwise infamous crime, unless on a presentment or indictment of a Grand Jury, except in cases arising in the land or naval forces, or in the Militia, when in actual service in time of War or public danger; nor shall any person be subject for the same offence to be twice put in jeopardy of life or limb, nor shall be compelled in any criminal case to be a witness against himself, nor be deprived of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law; nor shall private property be taken for public use without just compensation.
AMENDMENT VI
In all criminal prosecutions, the accused shall enjoy the right to a speedy and public trial, by an impartial jury of the State and district wherein the crime shall have been committed, which district shall have been previously ascertained by law, and to be informed of the nature and cause of the accusation; to be confronted with the witnesses against him; to have compulsory process for obtaining witnesses in his favor, and to have the Assistance of Counsel for his defence.
AMENDMENT VII
In Suits at common law, where the value in controversy shall exceed twenty dollars, the right of trial by jury shall be preserved, and no fact tried by a jury shall be otherwise re-examined in any Court of the United States, than according to the rules of the common law.
AMENDMENT VIII
Excessive bail shall not be required, nor excessive fines imposed, nor cruel and unusual punishments inflicted.
AMENDMENT IX
The enumeration in the Constitution, of certain rights, shall not be construed to deny or disparage others retained by the people.
AMENDMENT X
The powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respectively, or to the people.
AMENDMENT XI
The Judicial power of the United States shall not be construed to extend to any suit in law or equity, commenced or prosecuted against one of the United States by Citizens of another State, or by Citizens or Subjects of any Foreign State.
AMENDMENT XII
The Electors shall meet in their respective States and vote by ballot for President and Vice-President, one of whom, at least, shall not be an inhabitant of the same State with themselves; they shall name in their ballots the person voted for as President, and in distinct ballots the person voted for as Vice-President, and they shall make distinct lists of all persons voted for as President, and of all persons voted for as Vice-President, and of the number of votes for each, which lists they shall sign and certify, and transmit sealed to the seat of the Government of the United States, directed to the President of the Senate; the President of the Senate shall, in the presence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open all the certificates and the votes shall then be counted; The person having the greatest number of votes for President, shall be the President, if such number be a majority of the whole number of Electors appointed; and if no person have such majority, then from the persons having the highest numbers not exceeding three on the list of those voted for as President, the House of Representatives shall choose immediately, by ballot, the President. But in choosing the President, the votes shall be taken by States, the representation from each State having one vote; a quorum for this purpose shall consist of a member or members from two-thirds of the States, and a majority of all the States shall be necessary to a choice. And if the House of Representatives shall not choose a President whenever the right of choice shall devolve upon them, before the fourth day of March next following, then the Vice-President shall act as President, as in the case of the death or other constitutional disability of the President. The person having the greatest number of votes as Vice-President, shall be the Vice-President, if such number be a majority of the whole number of Electors appointed, and if no person have a majority, then from the two highest numbers on the list, the Senate shall choose the Vice-President; a quorum for the purpose shall consist of two-thirds of the whole number of Senators, and a majority of the whole number shall be necessary to a choice. But no person constitutionally ineligible to the office of the President shall be eligible to that of Vice-President of the United States.
AMENDMENT XIII
SECTION 1. Neither slavery nor involuntary servitude, except as a punishment for crime whereof the party shall have been duly convicted, shall exist within the United States or any place subject to their jurisdiction.
SECTION 2. Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XIV
SECTION 1. All persons born or naturalized in the United States, and subject to the jurisdiction thereof, are citizens of the United States and of the State wherein they reside. No State shall make or enforce any law which shall abridge the privileges or immunities of citizens of the United States; nor shall any State deprive any person of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law; nor deny to any person within its jurisdiction the equal protection of the laws.
SECTION 2. Representatives shall be apportioned among the several States according to their respective numbers, counting the whole number of persons in each State, excluding Indians not taxed. But when the right to vote at any election for the choice of Electors for President and Vice-President of the United States, Representatives in Congress, the executive and judicial officers of a State, or the members of the Legislature thereof, is denied to any of the male inhabitants of such State, being twenty-one years of age, and citizens of the United States, or in any way abridged, except for participation in rebellion, or other crime, the basis or representation therein shall be reduced in the proportion which the number of such male citizens shall bear to the whole number of male citizens twenty-one years of age in such State.
SECTION 3. No person shall be a Senator or Representative in Congress, or Elector of President and Vice-President, or hold any office, civil or military, under the United States, or under any State, who, having previously taken an oath, as a member of Congress, or as an officer of the United States, or as a member of any State Legislature, or as an executive or judicial officer of any State, to support the Constitution of the United States, shall have engaged in insurrection or rebellion against the same, or given aid or comfort to the enemies thereof. But Congress may by a vote of two-thirds of each House, remove such disability.
SECTION 4. The validity of the public debt of the United States, authorized by law, including debts incurred for payment of pensions and bounties for services in suppressing insurrection or rebellion, shall not be questioned. But neither the United States nor any State shall assume or pay any debt or obligation incurred in aid of insurrection or rebellion against the United States, or any claim for the loss or emancipation of any slave; but all such debts, obligations and claims shall be held illegal and void.
SECTION 5. The Congress shall have power to enforce, by appropriate legislation, the provisions of this article.
AMENDMENT XV
SECTION 1. The right of citizens of the United States to vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or by any State on account of race, color, or previous condition of servitude.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XVI
The Congress shall have power to lay and collect taxes on incomes, from whatever source derived, without apportionment among the several States, and without regard to any census or enumeration.
AMENDMENT XVII
The Senate of the United States shall be composed of two Senators from each State, elected by the people thereof, for six years; and each Senator shall have one vote. The electors in each State shall have the qualifications requisite for electors of the most numerous branch of the State Legislatures.
When vacancies happen in the representation of any State in the Senate, the executive authority of such State shall issue writs of election to fill such vacancies: Provided, That the Legislature of any State may empower the Executive thereof to make temporary appointments until the people fill the vacancies by election as the Legislature may direct.
This amendment shall not be so construed as to affect the election or term of any Senator chosen before it becomes valid as part of the Constitution.
AMENDMENT XVIII
SECTION 1. After one year from the ratification of this article the manufacture, sale, or transportation of intoxicating liquors within, the importation thereof into, or the exportation thereof from the United States and all territory subject to the jurisdiction thereof for beverage purposes is hereby prohibited.
SECTION 2. The Congress and the several States shall have concurrent power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
SECTION 3. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by the legislatures of the several States, as provided in the Constitution, within seven years from the date of the submission hereof to the States by the Congress.
AMENDMENT XIX
The right of citizens of the United States to vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or by any State on account of sex.
Congress shall have power to enforce this Article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XX
SECTION 1. The terms of the President and Vice-President shall end at noon on the 20th day of January, and the terms of Senators and Representatives at noon on the 3rd day of January, of the years in which such terms would have ended if this article had not been ratified; and the terms of their successors shall then begin.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall assemble at least once in every year, and such meeting shall begin at noon on the 3rd day of January, unless they shall by law appoint a different day.
SECTION 3. If, at the time fixed for the beginning of the term of the President, the President elect shall have died, the Vice-President elect shall become President. If a President shall not have been chosen before the the time fixed for the beginning of his term, or if the President elect shall have failed to qualify, then the Vice-President elect shall act as President until a President shall have qualified; and the Congress may by law provide for the case wherein neither a President elect nor a Vice-President elect shall have qualified, declaring who shall then act as President, or the manner in which one who is to act shall be selected, and such person shall act accordingly until a President or Vice-President shall have qualified.
SECTION 4. The Congress may by law provide for the case of the death of any of the persons from whom the House of Representatives may choose a President whenever the right of choice shall have devolved upon them, and for the case of the death of any of the persons from whom the Senate may choose a Vice-President whenever the right of choice shall have devolved upon them.
SECTION 5. Sections 1 and 2 shall take effect on the 15th day of October following the ratification of this article.
SECTION 6. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by the Legislatures of three-fourths of the several States within seven years from the date of its submission.
AMENDMENT XXI
SECTION 1. The eighteenth article of amendment to the Constitution of the United States is hereby repealed.
SECTION 2. The transportation or importation into any State, Territory, or Possession of the United States for delivery or use therein of intoxicating liquors, in violation of the laws thereof, is hereby prohibited.
SECTION 3. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by conventions in the several States, as provided in the Constitution, within seven years from the date of the submission hereof to the States by the Congress.
AMENDMENT XXII
SECTION 1. No person shall be elected to the office of the President more than twice, and no person who has held the office of President, or acted as President, for more than two years of a term to which some other person was elected President shall be elected to the office of the President more than once. But this article shall not apply to any person holding the office of President when this Article was proposed by the Congress, and shall not prevent any person who may be holding the office of President, or acting as President, during the term within which this Article becomes operative from holding the office of President or acting as President during the remainder of such term.
SECTION 2. This article shall be inoperative unless it shall have been ratified as an amendment to the Constitution by the Legislatures of three-fourths of the several States within seven years from the date of its submission to the States by the Congress.
AMENDMENT XXIII
SECTION 1. The District constituting the seat of Government of the United States shall appoint in such manner as the Congress may direct:
A number of electors of President and Vice-President equal to the whole number of Senators and Representatives in Congress to which the District would be entitled if it were a State, but in no event more than the least populous State; they shall be in addition to those appointed by the States, but they shall be considered, for the purposes of the election of President and Vice-President, to be electors appointed by a State; and they shall meet in the District and perform such duties as provided by the twelfth article of amendment.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XXIV
SECTION 1. The right of citizens of the United States to vote in any primary or other election for President or Vice-President, for electors for President or Vice-President, or for Senator or Representative in Congress, shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or any State by reason of failure to pay any poll tax or other tax.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XXV
SECTION 1. In case of the removal of the President from office or of his death or resignation, the Vice-President shall become President.
SECTION 2. Whenever there is a vacancy in the office of the Vice-President, the President shall nominate a Vice-President who shall take office upon confirmation by a majority vote of both houses of Congress.
SECTION 3. Whenever the President transmits to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives his written declaration that he is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, and until he transmits to them a written declaration to the contrary, such powers and duties shall be discharged by the Vice-President as Acting President.
SECTION 4. Whenever the Vice-President and a majority of either the principal officers of the executive departments or of such other body as Congress may by law provide, transmit to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives their written declaration that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, the Vice-President shall immediately assume the powers and duties of the office as Acting President.
Thereafter, when the President transmits to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives his written declaration that no inability exists, he shall resume the powers and duties of his office unless the Vice-President and a majority of either the principal officers of the executive department or of such other body as Congress may by law provide, transmit within four days to the President pro tempore of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives their written declaration that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office. Thereupon Congress shall decide the issue, assembling within forty-eight hours for that purpose if not in session. If the Congress, within twenty-one days after receipt of the latter written declaration, or, if Congress is not in session, within twenty-one days after Congress is required to assemble, determines by two-thirds vote of both houses that the President is unable to discharge the powers and duties of his office, the Vice-President shall continue to discharge the same as Acting President; otherwise, the President shall resume the powers and duties of his office.
AMENDMENT XXVI
SECTION 1. The right of citizens of the United States, who are eighteen years of age or older, to vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or by any State on account of age.
SECTION 2. The Congress shall have the power to enforce this article by appropriate legislation.
AMENDMENT XXVII
No law, varying the compensation for the services of the Senators and Representatives, shall take effect, until an election of Representatives shall have intervened.
USATEXT.DOC
THE CONSTITUTION ON DISK
This file contains information about the files included as part of this
package that contain the text of the United States Constitution. These
files were used with Main Menu option 10 of The CONSTITUTION Notebook
Program to produce the versions and portions of the Constitution that are
provided with that package. If you do not have a copy of The
CONSTITUTION Notebook Program, send LSASE to TCNbP Company, P.O. Box 516,
Olla, LA 71465-0516 for information.
Included are files that contain the text of the United States
Constitution in a format that can be used with many common word
processors. These files are contained in a directory named RIGHTS. This
directory is on diskette 3 of 4 for 5.25 inch format or diskette 2 of 2
for 3.5 inch diskettes in the 720 K format. One file named USACONST.DOC
contains the text of the entire Constitution including the Bill of Rights
and the other 17 amendments. Three more files were formed by breaking
USACONST.DOC into three sections. The file named ORIGINAL.DOC contains
the first 7 articles, the signatures, the resolution proposing
ratification of the Constitution, and the resolution proposing the
amendments that became the Bill of Rights. The file named BILLRITE.DOC
contains the 10 (of the first 12 proposed) amendments which were ratified
and have come to be commonly referred to as the Bill of Rights. Another
file named AMENDS.DOC contains amendments 11 through 27.
The files containing portions of the Constitution were provided for the
benefit of those whose word processors might not hold USACONST.DOC.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVIDED TEXT OF THE CONSTITUTION
As has been noted previously, the text of the entire Constitution is
provided with this program. The version provided is an attempt to match
the original text to the extent possible while maintaining viability for
use with the program. A description of concessions required to adapt the
text of the Constitution for use with this program follows:
Hyphenation
The text of the Constitution contains very few hyphenated words (less
than a dozen). The text used with this program contains many. The
program treats everything between two blanks as a word. Therefore, all
occurrences of the term 'Vice President' are hyphenated so the program
will automatically distinguish 'Vice-President' from President. The
fractions are hyphenated to be counted as one word. The term 'one third'
is more properly thought of as one word than two. If you feel otherwise,
edit the source file, removing the hyphens and analyze the file using
Main Menu option 10.
86
No words are hyphenated in order to be divided at the end of a line in
the text provided with this program.
Initial Capitalization of Words
The text of the Constitution contains numerous words that are spelled
with initial caps in the middle of a sentence. Many of these words would
not ordinarily be capitalized according to contemporary writing
conventions. The provided text preserves the original use of initial
caps. A photographic reproduction of the original was employed for this
purpose. The photographic reproduction ended with the 10th amendment in
the Bill of Rights. Past that point, no reliable source was located to
resolve differences among sources.
Archaic Spellings
The text of the Constitution contains several words with archaic
spellings. Defence, chuse, labour, encrease and chusing come immediately
to mind. The provided text preserves original spellings to the end of
the 10th amendment in the Bill of Rights. Past that point, no reliable
source was found to resolve differences among sources.
NOTE: More correctly stated, multiple sources did not corroborate with
total consistency. Sources agreeing on one detail might not agree on
another.
Punctuation
The punctuation of the Constitution is difficult to see on a photographic
reproduction. There is disagreement among sources as to the exact
punctuation. Punctuation in the provided files is best guess. If your
guess is better, by all means, change to suit.
One punctuation mark used in the Constitution has no keyboard equivalent
on this type of computer. This punctuation mark is a long dash used in 7
places. It is represented in the provided files as two consecutive
dashes. A space precedes the first dash and another space follows the
second dash. There is NOT a space between the dashes. The spaces tell
the program that the dashes are not part of a word. If you fail to use
spaces with this punctuation mark, you will get some interesting
additions to the beginning of your alphabetically sorted vocabulary list.
Indentation
The text of the Constitution used indentation to indicate the start of a
new paragraph. The provided files use vertical spacing for this purpose.
At least one blank line must separate two paragraphs. In the provided
files, 3 blank lines precede each new article or amendment, 2 blank lines
87
precede each new section and 1 blank line precedes each new paragraph.
The extra vertical spaces preceding articles, sections and amendments are
for visual effect only. They are intended to make the file easier for
you to read. They have no effect on the program. As long as you have
one blank line (2 presses of the ENTER key or carriage return key),
preceding each new paragraph, section, article or amendment, the program
should produce accurate references.
Article Titles
The text of the Constitution used Article with initial caps (albeit,
large bold fancy letters were used) to indicate the beginning of a new
article. The provided files use ARTICLE in all caps for this purpose.
When creating files to be analyzed by this program, do not use article in
all caps for any purpose except to start a new article. That is, do not
use ARTICLE (all caps) in the text of any paragraph of any section
article or amendment.
Also, a period appears after the word Article each time it is used in a
heading in the original Constitution. These periods were omitted from
these text files to avoid running up the number of clauses.
Section Titles
The text of the Constitution used Section with initial caps to indicate
the beginning of a new section. The provided files use SECTION in all
caps for this purpose. When creating files to be analyzed by this
program, do not use section in all caps for any purpose except to start a
new section. That is, do not use section (all caps) in the text of any
paragraph of any section article or amendment.
Also, a period appears after the word Section each time it is used in a
heading in the original Constitution. These periods were omitted from
these text files to avoid running up the number of clauses. However, the
period after the associated Arabic numberal is included to avoid having
the Section title counted as words and syllables in the first clause
following.
Amendment Titles
Headings for the amendments posed a special problem in terms of
consistency with the original text and program efficacy. Since not all
proposed amendments were adopted, a numbering problem developed right
away. Also, there is not one consistent heading throughout the
amendments according to the sources used. The provided files use
AMENDMENT in all caps to indicate the start of a new amendment. When
creating files to be analyzed by this program, do not use amendment in
88
all caps for any purpose except to start a new amendment. That is, do
not use AMENDMENT (all caps) in the text of any paragraph of any section
article or amendment. The provided files contain only those amendments
which were ratified.
Inclusion of Resolution
The provided files contain the resolution by which the Constitution was
brought into effect. Also included is the resolution proposing the
amendments that became the Bill of Rights. These resolutions follow the
signatures in Article VII and precede Amendment I in the Bill of Rights.
Both resolutions are included in USACONST.DOC as well as in ORIGINAL.DOC.
Due to the way the TCN program generates references, both resolutions get
the reference prefix Art 7. Given the relatedness of the purpose of both
these resolutions, this is not entirely inappropriate.
Any attempt to parse a portion with the second resolution at the
beginning of BILLRITE.DOC is guaranteed to produce disappointing results
regarding references.
Calligraphy
The TCN program is limited to the use of initial caps or all caps in the
attempt to express an infinite range of emphasis made possible by human
penmanship.
For example, the word "done" at the opening of the signature section of
the Constitution is in all lower case. However, the letters are
deliberately made much larger. In its attempt to express this emphasis,
TCNbP Company decided to use an initial capital letter.
A similar dilemna is presented by the words "In Witness" and "We the
People".
Unresolved Questions
Several questions are left unresolved by the photogenic copy. One
concerns the use of the apostrophe with its. Another concerns use of
initial capitalization in the word suits in amendment VII in the Bill of
Rights.
Further difficult questions are raised by the issue of calligraphy.
Frankly, due to the difficulty in reading some words, not every source
agrees as to whether a particular word is capitalized. In some cases,
89
not every source agrees on the spelling of some words. TCNbP tried
heroically to resolve these issues, but did not totally succeed.
What to do? Give users Main Menu option 10. You prepare a source file
to suit yourself. Parse it using Main Menu option 10 and work from that
version. Modification of source files is described in the text that
follows.
MODIFICATION OF PROVIDED FILES CONTAINING CONSTITUTIONAL TEXT
Within limits, you can use this program to produce its full compliment of
output files on modified versions of the provided files. This capability
is provided mainly in the event that the Constitution is amended as well
it may be in the not too distant future.
Roman Numerals
The program can read Roman Numerals (Arabic not allowed for amendment
numbers) up to 39.
Additional Words
The program can accept at least 1,000 additional words (quite a lot
considering the average size of amendments). An exact maximum cannot be
determined; however, it will probably hold nearer to 2,000 additional
words.
Why Modify the Provided Source Files?
Other than possible amendments, one reason is that you may wish to
analyze a version that has all superseded phrases omitted. (Given the
amount of superseded text devoted to the election of the President and
order of succession in the event of his death or resignation, parsing a
file with superseded phrases omitted should produce interesting results
concerning the relative number of times Congress and President are used
if nothing else.) Or, you may wish to analyze the Constitution on an
Article-by-Article basis.
Another reason to modify the source file is to incorporate modern
spelling and capitalization conventions. The spelling used in the
provided files is intended to match the original spelling. This includes
archaic spellings as well as the use of initial caps or in one or two
cases all caps. Several versions of the Constitution were compared, but
the decision where multiple sources did not match was not always certain.
If you can obtain a photographic copy of the original (amendments 11 - 27
of this version were not derived from that), believe it before these
files.
90
Other variations of valid modifications are limited only by your
imagination.
Use of CONSTITUTION, ARTICLE, and AMENDMENT
In addition to the carriage return usage and hyphenation effects
described previously, the first line of the file MUST contain the word
"CONSTITUTION", "ARTICLE", or "AMENDMENT" in all upper case. "ARTICLE",
or "AMENDMENT" in all upper case must be followed by a Roman numeral that
goes with the material that follows the heading. The Roman numeral must
be followed by two (minimum) carriage returns. Start the file with
"CONSTITUTION" if your analysis includes the Preamble. Start the file
with "ARTICLE" if your analysis begins in the first 7 articles following
the preamble. Start the file with "AMENDMENT" if your analysis begins in
the Bill of Rights or thereafter.
Use of Section or SECTION
Where "Section" is used to indicate the beginning of a new section
reference in the text, the word must be in all upper case, SECTION. Even
if it is eventually used as upper case in the text of an amendment
(unlikely), you must use initial caps. The same is true for ARTICLE, or
AMENDMENT. The word "Constitution" can be used anywhere in the file as
initial cap, all lower case or all upper case. However, if the first
word in a file is CONSTITUTION in all caps, the program will 'think' that
it is in the Preamble, whether it is or not. For clarification about the
effect of using these words in all caps, initial caps, all lower case,
refer to the provided text files and the resulting output of the program.
The words in all caps ARTICLE, AMENDMENT, SECTION, and CONSTITUTION can
easily be found in the alphabetically sorted vocabulary lists using F6.
Failure to use CONSTITUTION, AMENDMENT, ARTICLE, or SECTION properly may
result in improper references.
Hyphenation
Analysis of files that incorporate automatic hyphenation may produce
unpredictable results.
Effects of Vertical Spacing
At least one vertical space (blank line) must appear between paragraphs.
Always use two presses of the ENTER or carriage return key, even if one
press gives you a blank line. You can put more than one blank line if
you wish. In the provided files, three blank lines precede each article
91
or amendment heading, two blank lines precede each section, and one blank
line precedes each paragraph.
Use of Horizontal (Linear) Spaces
In the provided file, two spaces follow each period (except at the end of
a paragraph), two follow each colon and semicolon. One space follows
each comma. You can use one linear (horizontal) space where two are used
without affecting the output.
Carriage Returns and Horizontal Spaces in the Signature Section
If your word processor has a feature that allows you to view the
placement of carriage return characters in a file, enable that feature
and look at the signatures in ORIGINAL.DOC. Notice that in the
signatures, blanks are used as separators except after the last signature
for each state. In this manner, the signatures for each state get
treated as one paragraph. If you put carriage returns after each
signature (press the ENTER key), each individual signature will get a
separate paragraph reference. This can place your references in Article
7 at variance with the same references of other individuals using this
program. To maintain the consistency of your references, do not change
the use of carriage returns (ENTER key presses) in the signature section.
Closing Carriage Returns
Always put at least 4 carriage returns after the last word or punctuation
mark in a version or portion of the Constitution that you prepare for
parsing. To do this, press your end of file combination (usually CTRL
END). Just get the cursor located past the last punctuation mark or the
last character in the last word. Press ENTER 4 times.
Use of ASCII File
Use the 'Text Only' or ASCII file save option of your word processor to
store your modified file. Parsing a non-ASCII file may produce
unreliable results.
Use the carriage return after paragraphs option. If your word processor
does not provide this function, or you do not use it, the TCN program
will generate a unique reference (Art 1 Sec 1.1, etc.) for each line of
text. You will crash the program guaranteed on a full blown version of
the Constitution. Even if the program does not crash, your references
will be useless.
92
BACKUP.DOC
BACKUP PROCEDURES
Operation of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program involves the creation of
files that represent a lot of work on your part.
Files associated with this package are created or modified when you: edit,
delete, or modify (synonym or subject) reports; create a new seminar; parse
another version or portion of the US Constitution, or; edit syllable data.
TCNbP Company recommends that you periodically backup your data files
associated with the TCN program.
To emerge unscathed from an otherwise catastrophic hard drive or floppy
drive head crash, backup your files on the occasions and in the manner
described in this file. Of course, you are free to backup more often if it
gives you a warm feeling. But don't backup any less often. And if you have
utilities other then DOS to backup your hard drive, by all means use them if
you care to. Use the information in this file to determine what to back up.
If your computer has a magnetic tape, you can use it to backup your TCN data
files.
Otherwise, information is presented under the heading MAKING BACKUP TARGETS
to help you prepare backup targets.
Details of when, which diskette(s), and how to backup vary depending on
whether you operate from a 5-1/4" floppy drive, a 3-1/2" floppy drive, or a
hard drive.
Refer to the procedure in this file that applies to the manner in which you
operate The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program and backup your TCN package
diskettes when and as instructed.
When to Backup
The titles of the following paragraphs describe an event after which you
should backup certain TCN files. Each paragraph explains WHAT to back up.
Following changes made using Main Menu options 3, 4, or 5, backup:
5-1/4 inch Index diskettes (2 of 4 and 3 of 4)
3-1/2 inch Program diskette and User Documentation diskette (1 of 2 and
2 of 2)
Hard drive install directory and all its subdirectories
97
After Using Main Menu option 10, backup
5-1/4 inch Program Diskette and Index Diskettes
3-1/2 inch Program diskette and User Documentation diskette (1 of 2 and
2 of 2)
Hard drive install directory and all its subdirectories
After Updating Syllable data with Main Menu option 11, backup
5-1/4 inch Program Diskette
3-1/2 inch Program Diskette
Hard drive install directory and all its subdirectories
Back Up Procedure for Floppy Diskettes
On the occasions listed above, copy your working copy of a diskette onto the
backup target for that diskette. Use the DOS DISKCOPY command.
Back Up Procedure for Hard Drives
On the occasions listed above, copy your install directory and all its files
and subdirectories onto a backup target diskette or diskettes. Use the DOS
BACKUP command with the /S option. Have a blank formatted diskette handy in
case you run out of room on your backup diskettes. This works for
everybody. If you have DOS 4.0 or later, BACKUP will automatically format
and continue the backup process without ill effect. DOS 3.3 has a /F option
that will format an unformatted diskette and continue. Earlier versions
will fail and you have to start over.
You may wonder why backing up the install directory and everything below it
is always recommended when you can easily see by the information for
diskettes that not everything has to be backed up. The answer to that is,
it doesn't take very long anyway and it makes the recovery process much
simpler.
Recovery Procedure for Floppies
If a working copy of a floppy diskette becomes defective, discard it. Get
another diskette that formats flawlessly. Label it. Copy your backup copy
of the defective diskette onto the new diskette.
98
Recovery Procedures for Hard Drives
If you lose data on a hard drive, get the drive fixed.
Use the DOS RESTORE command to transfer the contents of your backup
diskette(s) back onto your hard drive.
MAKING BACKUP TARGETS
Refer to the following materials to make backup targets for your TCN program
package.
Floppy Targets
If you operate your TCN program on floppy disks, use the DOS DISKCOPY
command to make a duplicate of each diskette in the package. Label each
duplicate diskette sufficiently to identify:
a. which diskette it backs up
b. that it is the backup diskette, not the working copy
Hard Disk Targets
Format diskettes to be used as a target with the DOS BACKUP command. Label
the diskettes sufficiently to identify:
a. that it is a backup target for the TCN program
b. the install drive and directory.
c. how many backup target diskettes you are using for the TCN program
(four 5 1/4" targets or two 3 1/2" targets is sufficient to start
with, though more may be required later if you do a lot of work with
the TCN program)
d. the sequence number of each target
e. if it is formatted for high density
99
CONTENTS.DOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
File Names Start Pages
BACKUP.DOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
CONTENTS.DOC (Table of Contents)
COVER.DOC (Cover Page)
DISKROOM.DOC 92
EDITOR.DOC 81
EVAL.DOC 1
FUNCKEYS.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
MAINMENU.DOC 15
MM1.DOC 22
MM10.DOC 65
MM11.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
MM12.DOC 74
MM13.DOC 75
MM2.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MM3.DOC 26
MM4.DOC 29
MM5.DOC 40
MM6.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
MM7.DOC 58
MM8.DOC 63
MM9.DOC 64
PREFACE.DOC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
USATEXT.DOC 85
Contents by File Name and Pages
FILENAME: PREFACE.DOC
INTRODUCTION i
GENERAL PROGRAM DESCRIPTION i
PROGRAM LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Extent of Error Recovery ii
KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
DETAILED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
I. Parse text files containing US Constitution which produces: iv
II. Access to Lexicography Data Base for Review, Update, Output iv
III. A Four-Level Data Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
A. Version or portion v
1. Seminar v
i). Subject v
a). Heading v
b). List of related words v
c). Compilation of related phrases v
d). Comments v
ii). Synonym vi
a). Heading vi
b). Word list vi
c). Compilation of related phrases vi
d). Comments vi
IV. Notebook Functions vi
A. Access output described in I.A. for review. vi
B. Create Topic Heading vi
C. Access of Topic Headings for Review,
Update, Deletion, Output vi
D. Compile Index of Phrases Related to Accessed Topic . . . . vii
E. Edit User Comments Related to Accessed Topic vii
TEXT OF THE UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION IN ASCII FILES vii
FILENAME: EVAL.DOC
EVALUATION MATERIALS 1
GENERAL 1
PARSE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NOTEBOOK FUNCTIONS 2
LEXICOGRAPHY FUNCTIONS 2
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EVALUATION EXERCISES 3
ON-SCREEN EXERCISES 3
CROSS REFERENCING EXERCISES 3
Cross Reference Exercises for Synonyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Creating a Synonym Heading 4
Now to access the heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Deleting cross references to all occurrences of a word . . . . . . 7
Now to cross reference a specific occurrence of a word 7
Deleting a reference to a specific occurrence of a word . . . . . . 8
CREATING A SUBJECT HEADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
A Timely Exercise 9
CONTINUING YOUR EVALUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Continuing Evaluation of the Notebook Function 10
Review of Provided On-Screen Comments 10
Producing Your Own Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lexicography Functions 11
Word and Clause Profiles 11
Parameter Searches 11
Vocabulary Lists 11
Parse Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Registration 12
Continuing Your Study of the Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FILENAME: MAINMENU.DOC
MAIN MENU 15
Exit. 15
Choose version or portion. 15
Choose Seminar. 15
Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Synonym. 16
Parameter Searches, Word. 16
Parameter Searches, Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Profiles, word use. 17
Profiles, clauses. 17
Analyze source file. 17
Enter Syllable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Options. 18
Choose Vocabulary List. 18
Shareware Information. 18
FILENAME: FUNCKEYS.DOC
FUNCTION KEYS 19
F1 Help. 19
F2 Function Key. 19
F3 Function Key. 19
F4 DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
F5 Xport. 20
F6 Find. 20
F7 Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
F8 New. 21
F9 21
F10 TGKEY. 21
FILENAME: MM1.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 1, EXIT 22
FILENAME: MM2.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 2, Version or Portion 23
Description of the Screen 23
[File Name] 23
[Comments] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
[ Source Path ] 24
[ Output Path ] 24
Selecting a Version or Portion 24
FILENAME: MM3.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 3, Choose Seminar 26
What is a Seminar? 26
Screen Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Accessing a Seminar 27
Creating a Seminar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
FILENAME: MM4.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SUBJECTS 29
Creating a Subject Heading 29
Accessing a Subject Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reviewing the Selected Heading 30
Reviewing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key 31
F2 from the Selected Heading Field 31
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column . . . . . . . . . . 32
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key 32
F3 from the Selected Heading Field 32
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column . . . . . . . . . . 33
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading 33
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word 34
Adding Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading 35
Deleting Individual Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word 36
Deleting the Accessed Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Printing your Cross References 37
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File . . . . . . . . . 38
FILENAME: MM5.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SYNONYMS 40
Creating a Synonym Heading 40
Accessing a Synonym Heading 40
Reviewing the Selected Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reviewing Notes 41
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
F2 from the Title Block of the Middle Column 42
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column 42
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
F3 from the Title Block of the Middle Column 43
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column . . . . . . . . . . 44
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading 44
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word 44
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word 45
Adding Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading 46
Deleting Individual Cross References 46
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word . . . . . . . . . 47
Deleting the Accessed Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Printing your Cross References 48
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File . . . . . . . . . 49
FILENAME: MM6.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 6 51
Description of the Interactive Screen 51
Parameter Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Syllables Area 52
Letters Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Occurrences Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Place Area 54
Word Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Performing a Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
FILENAME: MM7.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 7 58
Description of the Interactive Screen 58
Parameter Field Descriptions 58
Syllables Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Letters Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Words Area 60
Place Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Performing a Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
FILENAME: MM8.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 8 63
The Secondary Menu 63
The Reports 63
Secondary Menu Option 4 63
FILENAME: MM9.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 9 64
The Secondary Menu 64
The Reports 64
FILENAME: MM10.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 10, ANALYZING (PARSING) A SOURCE FILE 65
1) Source file preparation. 65
2) Diskette preparation. 65
3) Analysis dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4) Analysis. 66
Analysis Dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1) Source Text File Drive Specifier Prompt. 67
3) Source Text File Name Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4) Output Drive Prompt. 68
5) Output Path Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6) Comments Prompt. 69
Analysis of the Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
FILENAME: MM11.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 11 72
The Secondary Menu 72
Entering Syllable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
FILENAME: MM12.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 12 74
Name of Install Directory 74
Colors 74
User Documentation Drive 74
FILENAME: MM13.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 13 75
The Secondary Menu 75
Words In Order Of Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Words Sorted By Number Of Syllables 76
Alphabetical List, Capitalized Words and Uncapitalized Words Merged 76
Alphabetical List, Caps separate from Not caps, plus Numbers, Punct 77
Words That Appear In Uppercase Only 77
Words That Appear In Lower Case Only 77
Words That Appear In Both Upper And Lower Case . . . . . . . . . . 78
Words Sorted By Number Of Times They Are Used 78
Words Sorted By Number Of Letters 78
Reviewing the Vocabulary Lists 78
LEXICOGRAPHY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Length 79
Syllables 79
Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Place 80
Reference 80
FILENAME: EDITOR.DOC
COMMENT EDITOR 82
Accessing the Comment Editor 82
Exiting the Comment Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using the Comment Editor 83
Suggestions for Content of Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Saving Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Printing Your Comments 85
Exporting Your Comments 85
FILENAME: USATEXT.DOC
THE CONSTITUTION ON DISK 86
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVIDED TEXT OF THE CONSTITUTION 86
Hyphenation 86
Initial Capitalization of Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Archaic Spellings 87
Punctuation 87
Indentation 87
Article Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Section Titles 88
Amendment Titles 88
Inclusion of Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Calligraphy 89
Unresolved Questions 89
MODIFICATION OF PROVIDED FILES CONTAINING CONSTITUTIONAL TEXT . . . . 90
Roman Numerals 90
Additional Words 90
Why Modify the Provided Source Files? 90
Use of CONSTITUTION, ARTICLE, and AMENDMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7
Use of Section or SECTION 91
Hyphenation 91
Effects of Vertical Spacing 91
Use of Horizontal (Linear) Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Carriage Returns and Horizontal Spaces in the Signature Section 92
Closing Carriage Returns 92
Use of ASCII File 92
FILENAME: DISKROOM.DOC
EFFICIENT UTILIZATION OF DISK SPACE 93
5-1/4" Floppy Tips 93
3-1/2" Floppy Tips 93
Hard Disk Tips 93
DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS 93
The Simple Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
When to Check Space Left on Floppies 94
What You Need to Know 94
Absolute Minimum Required Space 94
Estimation of Additional Space Requirements 94
Sample Space Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Space Requirements for Seminars 95
Consequences of a Disk full Error 95
Summary 95
FILENAME: BACKUP.DOC
BACKUP PROCEDURES 97
When to Backup 97
Following changes made using Main Menu options 3, 4, or 5, backup: 97
After using Main Menu option 10, backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
After updating Syllable data with Main Menu option 11, backup 98
Back Up Procedure for Floppy Diskettes 98
Back Up Procedure for Hard Drives 98
Recovery Procedure for Floppies 98
Recovery Procedures for Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
MAKING BACKUP TARGETS 99
Floppy Targets 99
Hard Disk Targets 99
8
COVER.DOC
User Documentation
for
The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program
Copyright 1989 - 1992 by TCNbP Company
Shareware Version 1.22
DISKROOM.DOC
EFFICIENT UTILIZATION OF DISK SPACE
This file contains information about efficient disk space utilization with
The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program. Tips for saving space on 5-1/4"
floppies, 3-1/2" floppies, and fixed (hard) drives are provided.
5-1/4" Floppy Tips
With version 1.22, you can delete the GO.EXE file.
You can also make another copy of the Index (Main) Diskette (2 of 4) and
delete some of the seminar directories on each of them. The seminar
directories have a path name "VERSION1\SMNR#" where # is an Arabic numeral
between 1 and 6, inclusive. You can put 1 - 3 on one diskette and 4 - 6
on the other. Do NOT delete the same seminar from both diskettes. When
you access the various seminars, the swap index diskette prompt will be
repeated until you get the right diskette in the floppy drive.
NOTE: The information in the preceding paragraph is for the benefit of
those users who have no fixed drive or a very crowded one. TCNbP Company
recommends a hard drive for use of the TCN program beyond evaluation.
3-1/2" Floppy Tips
You can delete the GO.EXE file from your working copy. Restore it from
your original if you ever need it.
You can copy the HELP.TCN, HELPINDX.TCN files to other floppies and erase
them from your working copy.
You now have more available room on diskette 1. You can fill it up, but
you'll have to do a LOT of work.
Hard Disk Tips
About all hard disk users can do is erase GO.EXE from the directory you
installed to on the fixed disk.
DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A full disk error is a fatal error. You will get kicked out of the
program. Depending on what file is being saved when a disk gets full, you
could lose all your subject cross references or all your synonym cross
references including notes in a seminar. The program provides no warning.
You have to manually monitor available space on a diskette to make the
93
appropriate decisions. The following information tells you what you need
to know to prevent loss of data resulting from a full disk error.
The Simple Rule
A simple rule to follow regarding diskette use is 1 version or portion per
360 K 5.25 inch diskette, 2 per 720 K 3.5 inch diskette, or 3 per 1.44 M
3.5 inch diskette. This rule will always work. It results in decent
diskette utilization (better than 50% if version includes complete text of
Constitution) while leaving adequate room for additional comments and
cross references that you generate manually.
If you are analyzing small portions of the text of the Constitution, you
may wish to place more than one version or portion on a diskette. There
is an absolute limit of 9, 18, or 36 such portions per 360K, 720K, or 1.44
M diskettes, respectively. Placing this number of portions on each size
diskette leaves very little room for exported files, or for additional
comments and cross references that you generate manually. Practical
maximums are 4, 12, and 27.
When to Check Space Left on Floppies
The above guidelines give you a good way to estimate the number of
diskettes you will need over the life of this program. There are two
times that more specific information should be considered. One of these
times is before you analyze a version or portion of the Constitution using
Main Menu option 10. Another time is before creating another seminar or
adding a lot of notes.
What You Need to Know
The specific information that you need is the amount of unused space on
the diskette. If the diskette has just been formatted and no data is
saved on it, the amount of unused space is equal to the capacity of the
diskette. Otherwise, you can use the DOS DIR command (or a disk status
information feature of your desk top software) to obtain this information.
Absolute Minimum Required Space
If the diskette has less than 40,000 bytes available, there is no way you
can save the output produced by Main Menu option 10 on it. Don't even
try. Even if you are analyzing a portion of the Constitution with only
one sentence in it, this much disk space is required.
Estimation of Additional Space Requirements
94
To estimate additional space required by larger portions of the
Constitution, determine the size of the source file using the DOS DIR
command (or a related feature of your desktop), and double the size. This
is the additional space. To determine total estimated space, add the
doubled size to 40,000. This number is an absolute minimum. To give
yourself a little working room, add 20,000. If the diskette has less
space than this, clear off some space by deleting unrelated files
including exported files, if any, (don't delete files with the file type
.lex or .lxx), or use another diskette.
Sample Space Calculation
Example calculation using USACONST.DOC with a size of 51,352 bytes.
40,000 absolute minimum
104,000 2 times 51,352 (rounded up to 52,000)
20,000 working room
-----------
164,000 minimum practical space required.
Space Requirements for Seminars
Concerning notes and seminars, 20,000 bytes is the minimum practical space
to open a new seminar. Additionally, allow 1,000 bytes of disk space for
each 20 lines of notes that you estimate you will write.
Consequences of a Disk full Error
Remember, a disk full error is a fatal error. It can result in the loss
of a considerable amount of work. It is up to you to manually monitor the
available disk space to prevent this error. This is a simple check that
can be performed from DOS or your desk top before starting the program.
If you are generous with spare space, you can prevent this error with
occasional checks.
Summary
The purchased materials require about 1.5 Megabytes of disk space install.
If you intend to analyze different versions, additional space is required.
The files generated by the program as a result of analyzing the
Constitution occupy 40 Kilobytes of disk space (minimum, even if the
portion or version consists of one word) to 164 Kilobytes (worst case,
unless amendments are added).
95
If you don't write very many notes, the disk space used by the cross
reference functions is nominal. Each line of notes requires 41 bytes of
disk space. (This holds even if the entire line is blank and even if it
was created using the down arrow key. Don't worry, the PG DN key will not
create blank lines.) Once a line has been created, it's there whether it
was created by wrapping from a previous line or with the down arrow key.
That 41 bytes of disk space is forever taken. If you don't enter a line,
no disk space is used.
You can enter 190 lines per subject or synonym. This is a maximum of 8
Kilobytes per subject or synonym. You can enter up to 200 subjects or
2,000 synonyms. Hence, if you type in the maximum allowed notes for 45
subjects or synonyms, you can exceed the capacity of a 5.25 inch diskette
forcing you to use a fixed drive. The same thing happens at 90 subjects
with maximum notes for a 3.5 inch diskette. In practice, this is a lot of
notes and most users will not encounter this limit.
96
EDITOR.DOC
COMMENT EDITOR
This file contains information about the comment editor for Main Menu
options 4 and 5, Subjects and Synonyms, respectively. The comment editor is
the part of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program that lets you type in your
thoughts concerning interpretation of the Constitution. Your comments can
be typed in the rightmost column of the secondary screen for Subjects. Your
comments for Synonyms are entered in the rightmost column of the Synonym
screen.
Accessing the Comment Editor
Accessing the Comment Editor is slightly different for Subjects and
Synonyms. A procedure for each follows.
To access the Comment Editor for Subjects, proceed as follows:
1) Select Main Menu option 4.
2) Access a topic. (Highlight a selection and press ENTER.)
3) Press the TAB key until the flashing cursor appears in the top left
corner of the rightmost column of the screen.
To access the Comment Editor for Synonyms, proceed as follows:
1) Select Main Menu option 5.
2) Access a topic.
a) Press the TAB key once. The highlighting moves to the second
column.
NOTE: If the Highlighting does not move to the second column, it
is because no Synonym headings have been created. To create a
Synonym heading, select a word of interest in the left column and
press ENTER. Then start at step a.
b) Highlight the desired heading.
c) Press ENTER.
3) Press the TAB key until the flashing cursor appears in the top left
corner of the rightmost column of the screen.
82
Exiting the Comment Editor
To exit the Comment Editor, press the TAB key or the ESC key. In either
case, the flashing cursor disappears from the rightmost column and
highlighting appears in the leftmost column.
NOTE: On older computers, a delay up to 15 seconds can occur when you exit
the comment editor. This delay is normal for the TCN program. Your
computer is not locked up. This delay never occurs when you only browse
comments without making changes. It occurs as a seminar gets full of
comments. If you add or delete one or more lines of comments in one of the
first titles (as determined by where it is displayed) in the list of titles,
the delay is most pronounced.
Using the Comment Editor
The following material describes modes of the Comment Editor and actions of
the various keys.
The Comment Editor operates in an insert mode or a strikeover mode
controlled by the INSERT key. An underline cursor indicates insert
mode. On most computers strikeover mode is indicated by a rectangular
cursor. On some computers, the strikeover cursor is a line at the top
of the letter and another line at the bottom of the letter.
Each letter you type appears where the cursor is and the cursor is
moved to the right one space or to the next line.
In the insert mode, when you type a character, text beginning at the
cursor and the cursor itself moves one space to the right and the
character you typed appears where the cursor was. When appropriate,
words are wrapped to the next line and the cursor moves to the next
line.
In the strikeover mode, when you type a character, the character you
type replaces whatever was there and the cursor moves to the right one
space or to the next line.
If you press the ENTER key in the insert mode, a new line is created
with text at and to the right of the cursor on it. If the line is not
wrapped properly, place the cursor past the end of the last word on it
and press the DELETE key.
If you press the ENTER key in the strikeover mode, the cursor is moved
to the beginning of the next line. If you press the ENTER key while
the cursor is on the last line of your comments, a new line is created.
83
To delete a character in either mode, place the flashing cursor under
the character and press the DELETE key. Use the BACK SPACE key to
erase the character to the left of the cursor.
To delete a blank line in either mode, place the flashing cursor
anywhere on the line and press the DELETE key. If the last line of
your comments is a blank line, it cannot be deleted.
To control the position of the flashing cursor without typing text, use
the HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN, and the cursor movement (arrow) keys.
Until you enter comments for a topic, only the ENTER key, the right
arrow key and the down arrow cursor keys will move the cursor.
If you have two or more lines of comments (even if they are blank), the
HOME key and the END key will move the flashing cursor to the first and
last line, respectively, of your comments. The column is not affected
with the END key. The HOME key moves the flashing cursor to the first
character in the first line.
If the flashing cursor is not in the first column of the first line,
the left arrow key (or CTRL-L combination) will move the cursor to the
left one space or up one line.
If the flashing cursor is not on the first line of comments, the up
arrow key will move the cursor toward the first line one line at a
time. The cursor stays in the same column.
Until you have 14 or more lines of comments, the PG UP key and the
PG DN key have no effect.
Once you type 14 or more lines, the PG UP key will move the text 13
lines toward the first line. If the first line of comments is on the
screen, the PG UP key has no effect. The cursor stays in the same
column on the same line of the screen.
Once you type 14 or more lines, the PG DN key will move the text 13
lines toward the last line. If the last line of comments is on the
screen, the PG DN key has no effect. The cursor stays in the same
column on the same line of the screen.
Suggestions for Content of Your Comments
While the cross referencing functions of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program
limit you strictly to internal parts of the Constitution, the Comment Editor
does not so restrict you.
In your comments, you can interpret indexes related to the current
topic.
84
You can cite other topics indexed in the same seminar.
You can cite other topics indexed in different seminars.
You can cite topics indexed in other versions or portions of the
Constitution.
You can cite relevant Court cases or Supreme Court cases.
You can cite titles, authors, and pages of relevant research material.
Saving Your Comments
To save your comments, press the ESC key until the Main Menu appears. If
desired, you can access your comments again for further editing. Do not
turn your computer off after entering comments until you exit from The
CONSTITUTION Notebook Program using Main Menu option 1. If you do, results
are unpredictable.
Printing Your Comments
To print your comments, press the TAB key as required to highlight the title
of your topic and press the F7 key. Your comments are printed following the
title of the topic, the list of related words, and the list of indexed
phrases.
Exporting Your Comments
To export your comments, press the TAB key as required to highlight the
title of your topic and press the F5 key. Prepare the appropriate disk
drive if exporting to a floppy drive; enter a drive specifier, path,
filename and extension and press ENTER. Your comments are exported to the
file you specified. The format of the export file is the same as the
printout obtained using the F7 key as described in the preceding procedure.
That is, your comments follow the title of the topic, the list of related
words, and the list of indexed phrases.
When accessing the exported file with a word processing application, specify
carriage return at the end of lines if prompted for this information.
If you erroneously press the F5 key, press the ESC key to exit without
exporting a topic. Control of the program resumes with the highlighting on
the title of your topic.
85
EVAL.DOC
EVALUATION MATERIALS
The following materials contain information and exercises to help you
evaluate the TCN program.
EVALUATION MATERIALS 1
GENERAL 1
PARSE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NOTEBOOK FUNCTIONS 2
LEXICOGRAPHY FUNCTIONS 2
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EVALUATION EXERCISES 3
ON-SCREEN EXERCISES 3
CROSS REFERENCING EXERCISES 3
Cross Reference Exercises for Synonyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Creating a Synonym Heading 4
Now to access the heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Deleting cross references to all occurrences of a word . . . . . . 7
Now to cross reference a specific occurrence of a word 7
Deleting a reference to a specific occurrence of a word . . . . . . 8
CREATING A SUBJECT HEADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
A Timely Exercise 9
CONTINUING YOUR EVALUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Continuing Evaluation of the Notebook Function 10
Review of Provided On-Screen Comments 10
Producing Your Own Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lexicography Functions 11
Word and Clause Profiles 11
Parameter Searches 11
Vocabulary Lists 11
Parse Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Registration 12
Continuing Your Study of the Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
GENERAL
The TCN program has 14 options on the Main Menu that can be grouped as
follows:
1. Parse engine
2. Notebook functions
3. Lexicography functions (analysis based on word complexity or use)
4. Miscellaneous
A brief description of each group follows.
1
PARSE ENGINE
Main Menu option 10 is the parse engine.
You don't have to know anything about the parse engine at this point
except that it exists. It is provided with the TCN package so you can
update your package if the Constitution is amended. It is discussed here
to support the descriptions of the notebook functions and the lexicography
functions.
For input, the parse engine uses an ASCII file that contains the text of
the Constitution. Preparation of this file is covered in MM10.DOC and
USATEXT.DOC. So you can begin evaluating the TCN program without learning
all that material, 3 complete sets of parse engine output are provided
with this evaluation copy of the TCN program.
The output of the parse engine includes encrypted files that contain the
text of the Constitution and an exhaustive index of every word. The
notebook functions use this part of the parse engine output.
Other output produced by the parse engine is used by the lexicography
functions.
NOTEBOOK FUNCTIONS
Main Menu options 2, 3, 4, and 5 are the notebook functions. These are
the functions that lend the word "Notebook" to the title of the TCN
program. You can use the notebook functions to:
1. Review provided comments about the Constitution and rights.
2. Modify, output (to ASCII file or printer), or delete provided
comments about the Constitution and rights.
3. Create, review, modify, output (to ASCII file or printer), or
delete your own comments about the Constitution and rights.
The TCN program's interactive search and indexing features are part of the
notebook functions.
The notebook functions are introduced by exercises in this file.
LEXICOGRAPHY FUNCTIONS
Main Menu options 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, and 13 are the lexicography functions.
You can use the lexicography functions to:
1. Review or output (to ASCII file or printer)
word profile data
2
clause profile data
vocabulary lists
2. Review, edit, or output (to ASCII file or printer) syllable data
3. Review or output (to ASCII file or printer)
lists of WORDS that fit user specified lexicography parameters
lists of CLAUSES that fit user specified lexicography parameters
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
Main Menu options 1 and 14 are miscellaneous functions. Main Menu option
1 lets you exit the TCN program. Main Menu option 14 tells you how to
register the TCN program.
EVALUATION EXERCISES
The following materials contain a battery of exercises to introduce you to
the notebook functions of the TCN program.
ON-SCREEN EXERCISES
A set of on-screen exercises is part of the TCN program itself. These
exercises are intended to help you get started with the program. To
access the on-screen exercises, proceed as follows:
1) Start the TCN program as described previously.
2) When the Main Menu appears, type 4 and press ENTER.
3) Notice that the title 'Exercises' is highlighted.
4) Press ENTER.
5) Press the TAB key twice and scroll through the exercises using the
PG UP, PG DN, HOME and END keys. Try some of the things the exercises
suggest.
CROSS REFERENCING EXERCISES
Generally, cross referencing procedures are analogous for synonyms and
subjects. The four major steps are:
1) Create a heading, if it does not already exist.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Review the heading while adding or deleting related references or
comments.
3
4) Exit to the Main Menu to save changes.
Steps 3 and 4 are identical for subjects and synonyms. Steps 1 and 2 are
analogous, but not identical. The on-screen exercises have taken you
through step 2 and the review portion of step 3 for subjects. The
following exercises take you through all 4 steps for synonyms. Following
that, a final exercise shows you how to create a subject heading.
Specific procedures for subjects and synonyms are contained in files
MM4.DOC and MM5.DOC, respectively.
Cross Reference Exercises for Synonyms
If you have just performed the on-screen exercises, you have to get the
default seminar to begin this exercise. The following steps do that.
They are not required steps in typical cross referencing procedures.
1) Select option 3 from the Main Menu.
2) Press the HOME key to highlight the top seminar, Sample Subjects
and Synonyms Cross References.
3) Press ENTER.
Ok, we are back at the Main Menu now ready to begin the synonym cross
referencing exercise. The following steps create a heading for the word
Power. Other parts of the exercise will cross reference synonyms to the
word power as used in the Constitution. As an introduction to the
comments editor, you will be provided with a question to type in.
Creating a Synonym Heading
1) Select option 5 from the Main Menu.
NOTE: On 2 of the lowest lines of the screen just above the function
key mnemonics, messages appear to advise you what functions are
available. Note these messages as you go through the procedure.
They will help you operate the program without documentation.
2) When the SYNONYMS screen appears, press the F6 key.
3) Type the word power and press ENTER.
Notice the words power, Power, Powers, powers at the top of the
left column. You are already familiar with use of the F6 key
from the on-screen exercises.
4) Using the up or down arrow keys, highlight the word Power,
singular, initial capital letter.
4
5) Press ENTER.
Notice that the word Power is inserted above the word rights in
the middle column. Its placement is explained in MM5.DOC. The
heading is now created.
Now to access the heading . . .
1) Press the TAB key once.
Notice the highlighting is removed from the left column and now
appears in the middle column.
2) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight the word Power in the
middle column.
3) Press ENTER.
Notice the list of words in the middle column disappears and the
title block over the middle column changes. The highlighting is
removed from the middle column and now appears in the title block
of the middle column.
The heading is accessed. In this exercise, we accessed the
heading immediately after creating it. This is perfectly ok, but
it is not required. You can do other things first if you want
to.
Now to cross reference some phrases . . .
1) First, press the F2 key.
Don't be alarmed by the blank screen. When F2 is pressed while
the heading in the title block is highlighted, all cross
referenced phrases are displayed. Since you haven't cross
referenced anything yet, a blank screen shows exactly what is
cross referenced.
2) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
3) Press the TAB key once and notice it goes into the comments
column. It skips the middle column since the middle column is
presently empty.
4) Press the TAB key and notice the highlighting returns to the left
column. If you are following this exercise exactly, the word Power
is highlighted. The program keeps track of this sort of thing for
you.
5) Press ENTER.
Notice the word Power appears in the middle column. But isn't
that what already happened? Well, yes and no. To see the
difference . . .
5
6) Press the TAB key once. The highlighting moves to the title
block of the middle column.
7) Press F2. Hey, no blank screen this time!
All occurrences of the word Power are now cross referenced as
synonyms to the heading Power. Of course, any word can be
considered a synonym to itself. So doing this is ok, but it is
not required. You identify synonyms to the program; it does not
find them for you or even give you hints.
8) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
9) Press the TAB key once and notice where it goes.
10) Press the TAB key again and type, "How does the use of the word
Power in the US Constitution compare or contrast with the use of the
word rights therein?" Congratulations! You've just entered comments
using the comments editor. More information about it is contained in
the file EDITOR.DOC. (You can access that file using the help on
help feature at the Main Menu.)
11) Press the TAB key and notice the highlighting back in the left
column.
12) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight the word power,
singular, lower case.
13) Press ENTER.
Notice that power now appears in the middle column.
14) Highlight Powers and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
15) Highlight powers and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
16) Using the F6 key, find the word authority in the vocabulary list.
This word is being sought out because it is suspected of being a
synonym for the word power.
17) Highlight Authority and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
18) Highlight authority and press ENTER to cross reference all
occurrences.
19) Press the TAB key once.
20) Press F2 to view cross referenced phrases. Notice the order.
Optionally, scroll using the PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END keys.
6
21) Press F3 to view cross referenced text. Left and right arrow
keys move you among cross referenced portions of text.
22) If you performed step 20 or 21, press the ESC key to get the
SYNONYMS screen back.
Ok, now that you have added cross references, you are ready to delete a
few. It is useful to be able to delete cross references if you change
your mind or if you make a mistake.
As with adding cross references, you can delete the cross references to
all occurrences of a word with just two keystrokes. But you don't have to
add or delete them all. In the following exercises you will first delete
the cross references to all occurrences of a word. Then you will add a
cross reference to one occurrence of a word. Then you will delete a cross
reference to a single occurrence of a word.
On with the next exercise,
Deleting cross references to all occurrences of a word . . .
1) Press the TAB key once to place the highlighting in the middle
column (not in the title block).
2) Highlight the word Powers, plural, initial capital letter. (Use
up and down arrow keys as needed.
3) Press the F4 key.
Notice prompt that appears a bottom left side of screen.
4) Type the letter Y (no need to press ENTER).
Notice that the word Powers disappears from the middle column.
But this is not all that has happened.
5) Press the TAB key 3 times to highlight the title block.
6) Press the F2 key.
Notice that no phrases containing the word Powers are displayed.
This is the process to delete cross references to all occurrences of a
word.
7) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
Now to cross reference a specific occurrence of a word . . .
1) Press the TAB key three times to move the highlighting to the
left column.
7
2) Using the F6 key and the up and down arrow keys, highlight the
word Powers.
3) Press F2.
4) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight any of the displayed
phrases that you choose. Make a note of the reference at the left
side of the screen.
5) Press ENTER.
It doesn't look like much happened but it did.
6) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
Notice that the word Powers is back in the middle column. But
that's not all.
7) Press the TAB key once to highlight the title block of the middle
column.
8) Press F2 and look for the reference you noted in step 4. You
might have to use the PG UP or PG DN scroll keys. There's your
phrase.
9) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
Deleting a reference to a specific occurrence of a word . . .
1) Press the F2 key.
2) Using the up and down arrow keys, highlight a phrase, any phrase.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y.
The phrase is gone. You saw it happen.
5) Press the ESC key to get the SYNONYMS screen back.
NOTE: You've done a lot of work. Before saving it, you might want to go
back and re-cross reference all occurrences of the word Powers (not to
mention the single cross reference you just deleted) in order to be able
to complete the exercise you so thoughtfully typed in the comments column.
Whatever you decide to do about that, no doubt you will be happy to know
that when you press the ESC key twice, your work is saved on disk and you
are returned to the Main Menu.
8
CREATING A SUBJECT HEADING
The procedure to create a subject heading is as follows:
1) Select option 4 from the Main Menu.
2) When the primary SUBJECTS screen appears, press the F8 key.
Notice that a blank highlighted line appears at the end of the
list of subjects. But the title is not complete yet.
3) Type in up to 60 letters and numbers to form a meaningful title.
Now the title is created and complete.
To access it, just press ENTER anytime it is highlighted,
including right now. After you access it, cross references are
created in exactly the same manner that was shown for synonyms.
You cannot delete a subject heading from the primary screen. To
delete it, access it and proceed to the secondary screen. Press
the TAB key once to highlight the heading on the 3rd line, press
F4 and type a Y. You are returned to the primary screen and the
heading is gone.
If you do not delete the heading, it is automatically saved on
disk when you return to the Main Menu.
A Timely Exercise
During a recent event, the issue addressed in this exercise became
relevant. The question arose, "Are supreme court justices appointed for
life?" What does the Constitution have to say on this matter?
Aha! You have the TCN program. It has an interactive search feature.
But to use it, you have to know what words to look for. However, the
vocabulary list provides a source of exact search words. BUT (!!!), those
lists are almost 1400 words long!
You could search the entire list of words for promising search key words.
And if you have absolutely no idea about what is in the Constitution,
that's exactly what you will have to do. BUT(!!!), if you have absolutely
no idea about what is in the Constitution, how likely does it appear that
you will be able to spot pertinent search key words or recognize the
relevant text?
To illustrate the intended point, can you answer the following question:
Is the issue of the length of terms for supreme court justices even
addressed in the Constitution? Yes or No.
9
If you answered yes, in what Article of the Constitution would you expect
to find the answer? Is it in the original document? . . . the Bill of
Rights, maybe? . . . or in amendments 11 - 26?
Enough. Happily, in this case, TCNbP company will provide you with
relevant search words and leading questions. The key words are:
Behaviour,
Impeachment
Impeachments.
The questions are,
"Does the Constitution explicitly state that supreme court justices are
appointed for life?"
"Does the Constitution explicitly exempt supreme court justices from
impeachment?"
By now, you should be able to use the key words to find and index the
relevant phrases. And you should be able to use the comment editor to
type in the preceding questions and your answers to them.
And this is what the TCN program was designed to do.
What the TCN program cannot do is ask the question. To ask the question,
you must have some idea about what is in the Constitution. Having the TCN
program is no substitute for that awareness. Acquiring that awareness is
your responsibility.
This completes the provided EVALUATION EXERCISES.
CONTINUING YOUR EVALUATION
The foregoing exercises have demonstrated:
How to move around in the notebook functions of the TCN program.
How to use the interactive search and indexing functions.
However, your evaluation of the TCN program is not complete. Neither is
your study of the United States Constitution.
Continuing Evaluation of the Notebook Function
There are a few more things you can do with the notebook function.
Review of Provided On-Screen Comments
On-screen with the the US Constitution under this evaluation copy of
the TCN program are five historically significant documents that
10
address rights of the human individual. These documents are
presented in 180 (or so) paragraph-sized segments in five seminars.
Along with many of these paragraphs from other rights documents,
TCNbP Company has provided comments and has indexed a few related
phrases from the US Constitution.
Now that you know how to navigate using the notebook functions of the
TCN program, review some of these provided comments. In all, TCNbP
Company provides approximately 20,000 words of comments.
Producing Your Own Comments
If you have some issue of Constitutional interpretation in mind, try
using the interactive search of the TCN program to find relevant
phrases. After searching, create a relevant heading and compile any
relevant phrases under it using the indexing features of the TCN
program. Add a few comments that come to mind.
If you don't find any related phrases, make a heading and type in
some comments under it. Mention events that raised the question you
have in mind. List search words you tried. Note whether you found
the search words you were looking for. Note why you decided any
phrases found were not related to the question.
Lexicography Functions
Then, in addition to the notebook functions covered in the evaluation
exercises, there are the lexicography functions.
Word and Clause Profiles
Main Menu options 8 and 9 provide profiles of vocabulary and sentence
complexity. Calling up the various profiles is easy enough.
Interpreting the profiles is another matter. The profiles contain
raw data. Whether you use them and how you interpret them is up to
you.
Parameter Searches
Main Menu options 6 and 7 compile lists of words or clauses that fit
user specified lexicography parameters. These functions require more
input than just a menu number. The user documentation helps.
Vocabulary Lists
Perusing the vocabulary lists available under Main Menu option 13
could prove interesting. Call up the help and browse the related
user documentation for information about each list.
11
Parse Engine
You might want to try the parse engine.
This evaluation copy of the TCN program comes with 3 complete sets of
parse engine output. The provided evaluation exercises used the default
set of output. Before running the parse engine, you ought to have a look
at the other two sets.
Use Main Menu option 2 to access the other set of output, called a version
or portion.
There are no comments provided with the other portions. However, the
lexicography profiles are there. Have a look. They give one example of a
reason to use the parse engine.
Then read or print out the files USATEXT.DOC and MM10.DOC. Use help on
help to print out USATEXT.DOC. Call up help for Main Menu option 10 and
press F3 to browse MM10.DOC. While browsing it, press F7 to print it out.
To run the parse engine, prepare an ASCII file according to USATEXT.DOC.
Then refer to MM10.DOC for instructions about the parse dialogue.
Registration
Is the TCN program useful?
Sure it is.
But is it useful to you?
Possibly not.
(Embarrassed silence interrupted at intervals by sounds of throat
clearing)
No need for all that. If the TCN program does not appear to be useful to
you, simply clear it off your hard drive and pass the trial diskettes on
to someone else or format them so they can be useful to you.
But if the TCN program is useful to you and you continue to use it (either
sporadically or regularly), please register. See Main Menu option 14 for
fees and benefits.
12
Continuing Your Study of the Constitution.
The evaluation exercises demonstrated the strengths of the TCN program.
Limitations of the TCN program were also demonstrated. Some of these
limitations were limitations not only of the TCN program, but limitations
also of any computer program (and any computer for that matter).
The TCN program cannot ask a question.
The TCN program cannot become concerned about its rights and neither can
the computer it runs on.
The computer it runs on cannot experience happiness, so why would it ever
pursue it?
But the individual who operates the computer CAN experience happiness.
And that person is probably actively involved in the pursuit of happiness
every waking moment.
And that person must be concerned with the possibility of undue
interference with legitimate activities involved in that pursuit.
And that person must be concerned with the legitimate limits of activity
involved in that pursuit.
And out of these concerns arise the questions about rights.
And out of these concerns arise questions about the legitimate limits of
government powers and the proper exercise thereof.
The TCN program can help you find what the Constitution has to say
regarding such questions.
If you find segments of the Constitution related to such questions, the
TCN program can help you organize what you find and store it for future
reference along with your comments about what you did or did not find.
But it is up to you to ask the question.
And it is up to you to decide whether the policies, procedures and
activities of officials are in keeping with the Constitution.
And it is important for every Citizen to ask these questions and make the
judgments.
The Constitution contains a guarantee to provide a Republican form of
government to every state. With the active participation of the private
Citizenry, this guarantee IS fulfilled. Without it, that guarantee CANNOT
be fulfilled.
And what has been said here concerning the Constitution's guarantee of a
Republican form of government is also true of every guarantee the
Constitution contains.
13
For the guarantee to be fulfilled, the Citizenry must participate.
To participate, to ask relevant questions and make reasonable judgments,
each Citizen must know at least what is written in the Constitution.
Whether or not you continue to use the TCN program, please continue your
study of the Constitution.
Thank you for trying The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program.
14
FUNCKEYS.DOC
FUNCTION KEYS
F1 Help.
The TCN program features help-on-help, help at the Main Menu, and context
sensitive help. At the Main Menu, press F1 to get help-on-help. Or type
the number of a Main Menu option and press F1 to get help related to that
Main Menu option. At other times, press F1 to get context sensitive help.
When help is displayed, you can browse or print related information by
pressing F3 and then F7.
NOTE: F2 - F6 have special mnemonics for Main Menu option 14. These
mnemonics are self explaining. They are not described in this file.
F2 Function Key.
The F2 function key has the mnemonic "INTRO" at the Main Menu. At other
times it has the mnemonic "CONC".
"INTRO" is an abbreviation for introduction. When "F2 INTRO" is
displayed, press F2 to view an introduction to the TCN program.
"CONC" is an abbreviation for concordance which is a compilation of
phrases that contain a common word. When you press F2, a list of phrases
is displayed. A reference is displayed for each phrase at the left of the
screen. (For more information about this reference, see MM13.DOC.) One
word is highlighted in each phrase. If you are working from a vocabulary
list, the same word is highlighted in all the displayed phrases. If you
are working from a synonym or subject cross reference list, a different
word may be highlighted in each phrase. One phrase is highlighted. The
PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow, down arrow keys can be used to
highlight a desired phrase. When working in synonym and subject cross-
reference lists, you can operate on the highlighted phrase with the ENTER
key or the F4 key. If you press F3, the text of the Constitution is
displayed with the highlighted phrase on the 4th line of the screen.
(exception is when phrase within 4 lines of top of file or within 14 lines
of end of file).
F3 Function Key.
The F3 key has the mnemonic "EVAL" at the Main Menu. At other times, it
has the word "Text" associated with it.
"EVAL" is an abbreviation for evaluation. When "F3 EVAL" is displayed,
press F3 to print out evaluation instructions for the TCN program. Have
14 sheets of paper in your printer. TCNbP Company strongly recommends
19
that all users take advantage of these materials to evaluate the TCN
program.
If you press F3 while a vocabulary list is displayed, the text of the
Constitution is displayed with the first occurrence of the highlighted
word on the fourth line of the screen (with exceptions noted previously).
If the selected word occurs more than once, you can use the right and left
arrow keys to move among the occurrences. The left arrow key will not
move you from the first occurrence to the last occurrence. The right
arrow key will not move you from the last occurrence to the first
occurrence. The PG UP, PG DN, HOME, and END keys are active while text is
displayed using F3.
F4 DEL.
DEL is a mnemonic for delete. However, F4 is not used to delete
characters. F4 is used to delete seminars, subject headings, or cross
references. You always get a double check prompt when you press F4. Type
an N to exit without deleting anything. What gets deleted depends on what
is highlighted on the screen. Take your time. One keystroke can delete
hours of work if a subject heading, synonym list heading, or a seminar
title is highlighted.
F5 Xport.
This key allows you to export some of the reports generated using this
program. You can use exported files with your own word processing or
spreadsheet software applications. You are prompted for a file name.
Type in the drive specifier, path, file name and extension. If you don't
know what this means, refer to the manuals that came with your computer or
other software. To avoid erasing files generated automatically by this
program, do not use .lex or .lxx as the extension. As an added measure,
set aside a separate diskette or directory specifically for the purpose of
holding files created using the F5 key. Content and format of the file is
the same as what you get when you press the F7 key with a given field
highlighted.
F6 Find.
If you are in an alphabetically sorted vocabulary list, this key will get
you within a few keystrokes of a specific word. You can type the whole
word if desired, but the first 3 or 4 letters of the word will get you
close. As a rule, don't use all caps. Also, capitalizing or not
capitalizing the first letter makes a big difference in some lists. F6 is
active when an alphabetical vocabulary list is selected (Main Menu option
13, secondary menu options 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) and Main Menu options 4, 5,
6, 11, or 13 are in use. To escape from F6 without performing a search,
press ENTER without typing anything.
20
F7 Print.
Use this key to produce hard copy printout of vocabulary lists, word
concordances, synonym and subject cross references or profiles. If F7
doesn't print something, press the F10 key to turn off display of function
key mnemonics and use the screen print function of your computer. F7 will
not produce hard copy of Constitutional text. Use your word processor to
do that with the provided Constitutional text files.
F8 New.
Use this key to add a new seminar title or subject heading. You must
select option 3 or 4 from the Main Menu for this key to be active.
F9
Not used.
F10 TGKEY.
Turns display of function key mnemonics on or off with repeated presses.
Default mode is keys displayed. Press F10 to turn off display. When
desired, press F10 again to turn display of mnemonics back on. Useful for
screen prints if you do not want to have the function key mnemonics
included in your output.
21
MAINMENU.DOC
MAIN MENU
The Main Menu is the menu that is displayed when you start the program.
It consists of 14 options numbered 1 through 14.
To select an option, use the typewriter number keys (not the numeric
keypad keys) to type the corresponding number and press ENTER.
If you make a mistake, use the BACK SPACE key to erase it before pressing
ENTER.
A brief discussion of each option follows.
Exit.
The exit option allows you to exit the notebook program without rebooting
your computer. Get in the habit of exiting the program with this option.
To do so ensures that any notes you have made will be saved on disk. For
more information, see file MM1.DOC.
Choose version or portion.
Within limits, The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program allows you to parse any
complete version or any portion of any version of the United States
Constitution that you wish. The files associated with one complete
version of the Constitution and three portions of the Constitution are
provided with the program. The choose version or portion option allows
you to indicate which version or portion of the Constitution you want to
examine. The information displayed about each version or portion is
entered in the dialogue associated with Main Menu option 10 Analyze Source
File. To select a version or portion, scroll through the list displayed
when you select option 2 until the entry for the desired portion or
version is highlighted and then press ENTER. The default selection is the
complete version of the Constitution provided with the program. To read
the files associated with a selected version or portion requires up to 5
minutes depending on the amount of text included as well as what kind of
computer you have. For more information, see file MM2.DOC.
Choose Seminar.
The notes (subject cross references, synonym cross references and related
comments) that you compile for each version or portion can be organized in
seminars. The amount of notes you can store is limited mainly by disk
space and a practical maximum of 40 seminars per version or portion. This
allows up to 80,000 cross-references, an adequate quantity for a document
consisting of less than 10,000 words. Subordinate to each seminar is a
15
set of subject reports and a set of synonym reports that you can generate
and modify using this program. For more information, see file MM3.DOC.
Subject.
This option allows you to collect references to words related to a heading
you make up. The references are generated by highlighting a word in a
vocabulary list (to indicate every occurrence of that word in the
Constitution is related to the heading) or by highlighting a phrase
containing the word in a concordance-like display generated by function
key 2 (to indicate that the highlighted occurrence is related to the
subject heading). References can be deleted in a similar fashion using
the F4 key. To select the desired subject, scroll through the displayed
list until the desired subject is highlighted and then press ENTER. The
selected subject is then displayed for review, update, deletion, print
out, or saving to disk. New subjects are added by pressing the F8 key.
To delete a subject, access it, press the tab key once and then use F4. A
simple editor allows you to compile comments related to each subject
heading. For more information, see file MM4.DOC.
Synonym.
This option allows you to collect references to words that are synonyms to
other words in the Constitution. The references are generated by
highlighting a word in a vocabulary list (to indicate every occurrence of
that word in the Constitution is considered to be a synonym) or by
highlighting a phrase containing the word in a concordance-like display
generated by function key 2 (to indicate that the highlighted occurrence
is considered to be a synonym). References can be deleted in a similar
fashion using the F4 key. To select the desired list of synonyms, scroll
through the displayed list until the desired word is highlighted and then
press ENTER. The selected word is then displayed along with its cross
references for review, update, deletion, print out, or saving to disk. To
indicate that a word has synonyms, highlight it in a vocabulary list and
press ENTER. To delete a word, access it and then use F4. A simple
editor allows you to compile comments related to each word with synonyms.
For more information, see file MM5.DOC.
Parameter Searches, Word.
In this program, the term word refers to any group of letters and numbers
between two blanks, a blank and a punctuation mark, or a punctuation mark
and a blank. This option allows you to compile lists of words based on a
set of parameters that you enter on an interactive screen. For example,
16
you could list all the 7-letter words that start with N if you so desire
using this option. For more information, see file MM6.DOC.
Parameter Searches, Clauses.
In this program, the term clause refers to all words occurring between any
two punctuation marks. You can list clauses that consist of a number of
letters, words, and syllables in a specified range entered on an
interactive screen. This option can be used to compile clauses in terms
of reading complexity. For more information, see file MM7.DOC.
Profiles, word use.
Gives you access to profiles of word use by vocabulary and text according
to letters, syllables, and number of times a word is used. Another gauge
of reading complexity. Report is generated automatically during execution
of Main Menu option 10. Can be updated without performing Main Menu
option 10 if new syllable data is entered using Main Menu option 11. Can
be printed out or exported (saved as soft copy) for edit. For more
information, see file MM8.DOC.
Profiles, clauses.
Gives you access to profiles of clause complexity by number of words,
letters, or syllables. Another gauge of reading complexity. Report is
generated automatically during execution of Main Menu option 10. Can be
updated without performing Main Menu option 10 if new syllable data is
entered using Main Menu option 11. Can be printed out or exported (saved
as soft copy) for edit. For more information, see file MM9.DOC.
Analyze source file.
Allows you to generate full compliment of output for a version or portion
of the Constitution that you prepare. For best results, run this option
first, that is, before performing any other Main Menu option. Re-start
program if necessary to run this option first. If you analyze two
versions or portions back to back, re-start the program between the two.
Certain rules must be followed concerning hyphenation and headings for
amendments, sections and articles. The first word in the file is
critical. Refer to MODIFICATION OF PROVIDED FILES CONTAINING
CONSTITUTIONAL TEXT in the file USATEXT.DOC for more information. Fixed
drive operators can arrange input and output files any way desired. Floppy
drive operators must observe a few constraints. For more information, see
file MM10.DOC.
17
Enter Syllable Data.
Allows you to enter the number of syllables for any word in the vocabulary
of the Constitution. This option is provided in case the Constitution is
amended resulting in new words being used for which syllable data is not
entered. Also, you may disagree with the number of syllables entered in
the provided list. You can change the number of syllables using this
option. Keep in mind that this is a master vocabulary being changed. All
profiles subsequently generated for any version or portion using options 6
- 10 will use the data you enter. For more information, see file
MM11.DOC.
Options.
Allows you to indicate desired values for a series of options. For more
information, see file MM12.DOC.
Choose Vocabulary List.
Allows you to choose from a variety of vocabulary lists compiled for the
selected version or portion during execution of option 10. The
subordinate menu is self explanatory. The default list is number 3 on
this menu. For more information, see file MM13.DOC.
Shareware Information.
Provides information related to shareware distribution of this version of
The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program. Includes amount of requested payment
and contact information. Information is contained in an encrypted file.
On older, slower PCs, up to 45 seconds is required for decryption. For
more information, run the program and select Main Menu option 14. File
name MM14.DOC is not provided.
18
MM1.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 1, EXIT
Main Menu option 1 provides a way for you to exit The CONSTITUTION Notebook
program to DOS or to your desktop without rebooting your computer. By
using this function, you assure yourself that all changes that you make to
options, syllable information, subject references, or synonym references
are saved to disk.
To accomplish this, proceed as follows:
1) Upon completion of all desired functions, select Main Menu option
1, exit.
2) At the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, type a Y.
Execution of The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program ends and you are
returned either to DOS or to your desktop, depending on how you
have your computer set up.
If you inadvertently select this function, type an N at the 'Are
you sure, Y/N?' prompt to return to the main menu and continue
using the program.
22
MM10.DOC
NOTE: For best results, perform Main Menu option 10 immediately after
starting the program (before performing any other function). If you use
Main Menu option 10 on two files back-to-back, restart the program between
the two files. If you fail to do this, and the file that is analyzed is
smaller than the selected version or portion or smaller than the
previously analyzed file, subsequent attempts to display phrases and text
near the end of a version or portion may result in errors.
MAIN MENU OPTION 10, ANALYZING (PARSING) A SOURCE FILE
This file contains information needed to parse a file using Main Menu
option 10. In addition to the task oriented instructions needed to
complete the analysis dialogue, information of a general nature is
included to guide you through the entire process.
Major steps involved in analyzing a file are:
1) Source file preparation.
The content of your source file depends on your objective for performing
the analysis. The source file is prepared using your word processor.
Save your file in a mode that does not insert special codes in the file.
Files in this format are generally described as ASCII files. All provided
files are such files. Main Menu option 10 works fine with them. Using
Main Menu option 10 with files containing special codes (not ASCII) may
produce unreliable results. Refer to modification of source file for
further information.
Check your source file very carefully. Once you analyze it, you are stuck
with the results of the analysis. You cannot delete it. There is a
practical limit of 30 (approximately) sets of output that can be
accommodated by this program.
2) Diskette preparation.
If you intend to save your output on diskette, or use the diskette drives
to store your source file during the analysis, you must have the diskettes
ready before you can start the analysis function dialogue. As you proceed
through the dialogue, the program checks your information against the
diskettes in the drive. This ensures that all required information is
available. If not, at least you haven't tied up your computer for the
time required to parse the file for nothing.
65
Know what will be on each diskette and have the source file stored where
you intend to parse it from before starting the program. If need be,
format a diskette or two and label it (them) first.
If you are storing more than one set of output on a diskette, check the
available space on the diskette that you will use to store your output.
The program does not do this. Be sure that the diskette has enough room
for the automatically generated output files and enough room to store the
amount of cross references and comments that you estimate you will
generate. For further information see DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT DISK
SPACE REQUIREMENTS in the file DISKROOM.DOC.
If you are working on a computer that has only one diskette drive and no
fixed drive, your source file must be stored on the same diskette where
the output files will be stored. This limits one diskette users to 1
(maximum) analysis of the complete Constitution with all amendments per
360 K 5.25-inch diskette. There simply is not room for the source file
and 2 sets of outputs. After completing option 10, you can delete the
source file from the diskette if need be to free up space. The program
does not use the source file except during option 10.
3) Analysis dialogue.
The analysis dialogue begins after you select Main Menu option 10. You
are prompted for information in a series of prompts. As you enter each
item of information, the program checks the information against available
files on diskette or the fixed drive. If a problem is detected, prompts
appear to alert you and give hints at solutions. The information entered
during the analysis dialogue is used by the computer during analysis to
locate required information and to decide where to store the output.
Also, this information is saved for display during execution of Main Menu
option 2. You are provided an opportunity during the analysis dialogue to
enter comments (60 characters).
The analysis dialogue provides a measure of confidence that all required
files are available before starting the actual analysis. One thing that
the dialogue will not detect is when single diskette users have the source
file and output files on separate diskettes. Remember, single diskette
users with no fixed drive, the source file must be on the same diskette
where you intend the output to be stored. Otherwise, you will get a fatal
error or totally erroneous output. Another thing the program does not
check is whether the Constitution file is on the Program Diskette. NEVER
do this.
4) Analysis.
The program parses the file and generates 28 files that contain the
indexes used to display and cross reference information. The screen
usually has something displayed on it to give you an idea that something
66
is happening so you can know that you computer is not locked up. You
might be prompted to insert the program diskette or the diskette with the
source file. If prompted to insert the program diskette (this prompt will
not appear if you installed on a fixed drive), put the program diskette in
the drive where you installed. If you put it in another drive, the prompt
will be repeated until you put it in the proper drive. If prompted to
insert the diskette with the source file, insert it in the drive that you
indicated during the analysis dialogue. If you put it in another drive,
the prompt is repeated until you put it in the appropriate drive.
If a message appears advising you to print the screen, a fatal error has
occurred. This is possible due to the wide variations occurring in user
preparation of the source file. If this happens, send your screen print
out and a copy (on diskette) of your source file to the address provided
by Main Menu option 14 for advice concerning a solution.
Analysis Dialogue
The same series of prompts is displayed for all diskette, diskette
plus fixed drive, or fixed drive combinations during the analysis
dialogue. Depending on the combination of disk drives that you have or
are using, your responses vary. Each response is checked for validity
before proceeding to the next prompt. Each prompt is repeated until
acceptable input is provided. The following materials describe each
prompt, valid responses and error correction for the analysis dialogue.
1) Source Text File Drive Specifier Prompt.
You are prompted for the drive specifier that indicates on which drive
the text source file will be stored during analysis.
a) Type an upper or lower case letter A - Z.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the drive you specified is available.
A formatted diskette must be in the drive if a floppy is specified.
If the drive is unavailable, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the drive is available, the next prompt appears.
67
2) Source Text File Path Information Prompt
You are prompted for the path on which the source file is stored during
analysis. A colon and backslash are automatically added to the drive
specifier previously entered.
a) Type the rest of the path information. If the source file is
stored in the root directory, do not type anything.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the path you specified exists.
If the path does not exist, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the path exists, the next prompt appears.
3) Source Text File Name Prompt.
You are prompted for the file name of the source file.
a) Type in the source file name and extension.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the file exists on the path
previously entered.
If the file does not exist, an advisory message appears to that
effect and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the file exists, the next prompt appears.
4) Output Drive Prompt.
You are prompted for the drive specifier that indicates on which drive the
output files will be stored.
a) Type an upper or lower case letter A - Z.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the drive you specified is available. A
formatted diskette must be in the drive if a floppy is specified.
If the drive is unavailable, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
68
If the drive is available, the next prompt appears.
5) Output Path Prompt.
You are prompted for the path on which the output files are to be stored
by analysis. A colon and backslash are automatically added to the drive
specifier previously entered.
a) Type the rest of the path information.
If the output is to be stored in the root directory, do not type
anything. However, if you are using a fixed drive, or if you are
storing the output of more than one analysis on a floppy diskette, you
must not specify the root directory for more than one analysis.
Otherwise, the results of the previous analysis will be lost. A
simple rule is: ALWAYS specify a unique path. Never store output in
the root directory on any drive or any diskette.
b) Press ENTER.
The program checks to see if the path you specified exists.
If the path does not exist, an advisory message appears to that
effect, and solutions are given. The prompt is repeated.
If the path exists, the program checks to see if the path has been
used for analysis previously. If so, an advisory message appears to
that effect, and you are given the option to continue or escape. If
you continue, the results of the previous analysis are lost. If you
escape, you can repeat the analysis dialogue and enter different path
information.
When all checks have been completed, the next prompt appears.
6) Comments Prompt.
You are prompted for 60 characters of comments.
a) Type your comments, if any.
The left and right arrow keys, DELETE, and F9 keys are active.
The source file name, source file path, the output file path
information that you entered previously during this dialogue is stored
for recall during Main Menu option 2. Your comments need not repeat
this information. Use the comments to reference another file or
perhaps a notebook that contains more detailed information about the
reasons for this analysis. Or briefly describe the source file as was
done with the provided analysis.
69
b) Press ENTER.
No checks are performed. The program proceeds to the actual analysis
of the source file.
Analysis of the Source File
Following completion of the analysis dialogue, the program reads the
master sort data. If you are working from diskette, you may be prompted
to insert the program diskette. If so, insert it in the drive that you
installed to.
After reading the master sort data, the program attempts to access the
source file. If it is not available, you are prompted to insert the
appropriate diskette. Insert the diskette in the drive you indicated
during the analysis dialogue.
When analysis begins, the 200 bytes of text that is being parsed is
displayed at the top of the screen. This display (as well as the others)
was placed in the code to aid in de-bugging while the program was being
written. It was left in the code for two reasons. One reason is so your
screen won't sit idle for an extended period while analysis is performed.
The other reason is to provide helpful information should bugs appear in
use when the Constitution is amended or when you analyze modified files.
If your modified version contains words not previously used in the
provided files, you may be prompted to insert the program diskette during
analysis (if you are working from diskettes). If so, place the working
copy of the program diskette in the drive that you installed to.
NOTE: This process updates the master vocabulary list. Never write the
updated list to the backup diskette or to the original. Write the updated
list to your working copy if you are using diskettes. To avoid saving the
updated list on the original or backup copy, always protect those copies
by leaving the write protect tab in place for 5.25 inch diskettes or
always leaving the write protect tab on 3.5 inch diskettes in the protect
position. Each time your master vocabulary list is updated, backup your
master vocabulary list. The program does not do this, nor does it remind
you to do it. See BACKUP.DOC.
The remainder of the prompts that appear on the screen during analysis are
of no interest except that they should always be changing at least once
every 5 minutes. If not, the program is locked up.
When analysis is complete, you may be prompted to insert the program
diskette and then the index (output) diskette. If so, insert the
70
diskettes in the appropriate drive (install drive for program diskette,
drive you specified during analysis dialogue for index diskette). After
these two prompts, you are returned to the Main Menu and the results of
your analysis are now available for review.
71
MM11.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 11
Main Menu option 11 allows you to update syllable information. You can edit
the syllable data provided when you purchased this program. Or, you can
enter syllable data for words not included in the purchased master
vocabulary list, should you parse a modified version of the Constitution or
should you update the Constitution to include possibly forthcoming
amendments.
You can access 6 vocabulary lists using Main Menu option 11, including two
versions of the master list which are not available using Main Menu options
13 or 6.
This file contains information needed to use Main Menu option 11.
The Secondary Menu
When you select 11 from the Main Menu, a secondary menu with 7 options
numbered 0 - 6 appears. Options 1 - 6 are vocabulary list formats. Option
0 returns you to the main menu.
Option 2 is useful if you have just executed Main Menu option 10 on a
version or portion of the Constitution. New words for which no syllable
information has been entered will appear at the top of the list because the
computer 'thinks' that these words have 0 syllables. You can enter the
syllable data for those words and not concern yourself with the remainder of
the list. Given that the default version has nearly 1400 entries for which
syllable data is entered, this saves a lot of time. Over an hour was
required to enter the syllable data for the master list of the default
version. Typically, less than a dozen new words will be added to the
vocabulary in a modified version. That much syllable information can be
entered in a few minutes.
Option 3 speeds up mass entry of syllable entry by automatically copying
syllable information for initially capitalized and not initially
capitalized spellings of the same word.
Options 1 and 4 display numbers for entry of syllable data. If a number is
intended to be pronounced, select one of these lists to enter the
appropriate syllable data.
Options 5 and 6 display all words in the master vocabulary list, as opposed
to options 1 - 4 which only display words that occur in the current version
or portion. These lists include all words, including misspelled words
that were ever included in a file parsed using Main Menu option 10.
The lists for options 1 - 4 are more fully described in file MM13.DOC.
72
Entering Syllable Data
To enter syllable data, proceed as follows:
1) Select 11 from the main menu.
2) Select a vocabulary list from the secondary menu.
The selected vocabulary list is displayed after a delay.
3) Scroll through the displayed vocabulary list until a word for which
you wish to enter syllable data is highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN,
HOME, END, up arrow and down arrow keys to move the highlighting.
4) Type the appropriate syllable information using the top row of
typewriter keys, not the numeric keypad.
The number you typed is displayed in the syllables column of the
highlighted word and the highlighting is advanced in the list.
You do not have to press the ENTER key.
NOTE: If you select secondary menu option 3 and the syllable data is
entered within the bottom 3 lines on a screen, the highlighting may not
advance properly. Advance it manually with one of the above mentioned
scroll keys when this happens.
You can print the selected vocabulary list or export it (save it to
disk) using the F7 and F5 function keys, respectively.
5) When you are finished entering syllable data, press the ESC key to
return to the secondary menu.
You can select another vocabulary list if desired or return to the
Main Menu according to your selection. If you have updated syllable
information, the program reminds you to regenerate the word usage and
clause complexity profiles. The prompt gives you the option to regenerate
the profiles immediately. If you type an N, you can update the profile
later using Main Menu option 8, secondary menu option 4. If you did not
enter any syllable data, the prompt does not appear.
73
MM12.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 12
Main Menu option 12 is used to specify desired values for options. When
you select 12 from the Main Menu, a secondary menu is displayed. You can
choose from among the options on the secondary menu for review or update.
Or you can choose 0 from the secondary menu to return to the Main Menu.
Name of Install Directory
Use eliminated for version 1.22.
Colors
If you desire, you can change the colors for color monitor, or the
relative level of foreground, background intensity for monochrome
monitors. The defaults are 1 and 15. This gives a white on blue display
on color monitors. On some monochrome monitors, it results in highlighted
items being underscored.
User Documentation Drive
Use eliminated for version 1.22.
74
MM13.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 13
Main Menu option 13 allows you to select among 9 vocabulary lists. The
lists vary as to their content and the sort key by which they are ordered.
You can print any list using F7 or export any of the lists (save on disk)
using F5. A description of each list is included in this file along with
some practical word study (lexicographical) methods to which each list lends
itself.
With the various lists, lexicography information is displayed on the line
with each word. Up to five columns can be displayed within a single list.
The information in each column is described near the end of this file.
All lists on this menu contain words, numbers, or punctuation marks that
occur in the selected version or portion. A master list that contains all
words, numbers and punctuation marks from all versions and portions can be
accessed using Main Menu option 11.
The TCN program focuses on words. You access phrases or text by first
selecting a word from a list. You proceed from menus to the lists
automatically. To return to a list after accessing phrases or text (F2 or F3
keys), press the ESC key.
While you are in a list, the following scroll keys move you through the list
to highlight (select) a specific word: PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow,
down arrow.
The list that you need may vary depending on what you are trying to
accomplish.
Choice of Vocabulary List
You can choose a vocabulary list while performing Main Menu options 6, 11, or
13. The selected list will affect performance of options 4, 5, 6, 11, and
13. To see the default list, select Main Menu option 13 and then select item
3. The default list is read when you select a version or portion or when the
default version is read. The default list remains in effect until another
list is selected during performance of Main Menu options 6, 11, or 13. For
more information about the available vocabulary lists, see file MM13.DOC.
The Secondary Menu
When you select 13 from the Main Menu, a secondary menu consisting of 10
options numbered 0 - 9 appears. Options 1 - 9 are vocabulary lists. Item 0
returns you to the Main Menu. The vocabulary lists are discussed below in
order of their appearance on the secondary menu.
75
Words In Order Of Appearance
All words, numbers, and punctuation symbols are included in this list.
The program creates this list by appending newly encountered words to the
end of this list. That is to say, when the program encounters a word for
the first time in the source file, it adds that word to the end of this
list. The result is a list ordered according to initial appearance.
A practical application of this list is to evaluate focus. Naturally, the
words used most often occur early in a version or portion. Once you get
past the part of the list that relates the first appearance of very common
words, there are words that appear late that are used several times.
Hence, one can infer a focus on these words. One interesting combination
of facts to look at is words that appear very early (say even in the
Preamble) that are used only once. Hence, this list contains information
related to focus; one aspect of focus being order of appearance (first
things -most important- first) and number of times a word is used.
Words Sorted By Number Of Syllables
Only words are included in this list.
A practical use of this list is to enter syllable data. Also, the
grouping of words according to syllables may be helpful.
Alphabetical List, Capitalized Words Merged With Uncapitalized Words
Only words are included in this list.
A practical application of this list is convenience when entering synonym
and subject cross references. To the program, initially capitalized words
and words not initially capitalized are two totally different words.
Hence, if a word appears initially capitalized in some places and not
initially capitalized in others, you have to access both spellings to
indicate that both spellings are related. In an ordinary sort (secondary
menu option 4), these spellings are far apart in the list. In this list,
they are adjacent to each other.
F6 can be used when this list is selected to quickly move to a desired
word.
76
When the program is first started, or when you select a version or
portion, this is the default list.
Alphabetical List, Caps separate from Not caps, plus Numbers, Punct
This list contains all words, numbers, and punctuation marks. Unlike
secondary menu option 1, this list is sorted alphabetically.
One practical use of this list is to access occurrences of Arabic numeral
in Constitutional text. With this list selected, you can highlight an
Arabic numeral and press F2 or F3 to see where the highlighted numeral
occurs.
Another practical use of this list is to show exactly which words, numbers
and punctuation marks are greater than which. This information is useful
to understand the results of using the words area of Main Menu option 6.
You could compile examples of punctuation mark usage.
F6 works with this list.
Words That Appear In Uppercase Only
This list contains those words that are initially capitalized every time
that they are used in the selected version or portion of the Constitution.
A photogenic copy of the original Constitution reveals initially
capitalized words in the middle of sentences. Many of the words would not
be capitalized by contemporary capitalization conventions. An emphasis on
or importance attached to words that were consistently capitalized can be
inferred. This list can be used in conjunction with the following two
lists to evaluate the use of capitalization in the Constitution.
Words That Appear In Lower Case Only
This list contains those words that never appear initially capitalized in
the selected version or portion of the Constitution.
This list can be used in conjunction with the preceding list and the
following list to evaluate use of capitalization in the Constitution.
77
Words That Appear In Both Upper And Lower Case
This list contains those words that appear initially capitalized in some
places and not initially capitalized in others in the selected version or
portion of the Constitution.
This list can be used in conjunction with the preceding two lists to
evaluate use of capitalization in the Constitution.
Words Sorted By Number Of Times They Are Used
Only words are included in this list.
A practical use of this list is to rank words by the number of times they
occur in a selected version or portion.
Words Sorted By Number Of Letters
Only words are included in this list.
A practical use of this list is to rank words that occur in a selected
version or portion by the number of letters they contain.
Reviewing the Vocabulary Lists
To review a vocabulary list, proceed as follows:
1) Select 13 from the Main Menu.
2) Select a vocabulary list from the secondary menu.
After a delay, the list is displayed.
All lists include length, syllable, and occurrence information with
each word. In addition, the list accessed through secondary menu option 1
provides place information.
You can print out the entire list using the F7 key.
You can export the entire list to a file on disk that can be used with
many word processors. These files are large. Some word processors won't
hold them. If saving to diskette, allow 150,000 bytes for the vocabulary
78
list of the default version. The F5 key performs the export function.
You can review every phrase that contains a highlighted word by using
the F2 key. When these phrases are displayed, you can print them or export
them to disk. Except for words occurring more than 300 times, the files
created thusly can be held by many common word processors.
You can review text surrounding every occurrence of a highlighted word
using the F3 key.
When finished reviewing a list, press the ESC key to return to the
secondary menu.
When finished reviewing all word lists, select 0 from the secondary
menu to return to the Main Menu.
LEXICOGRAPHY INFORMATION
Five different kinds of lexicography information are displayed in the
various lists for each word. Length, syllable, and occurrence data for
each word is displayed in all the lists. Reference and place data is
displayed for the 'Words in order of appearance' list. All information
except syllable data is automatically generated and cannot be changed by
the user. The information included under each of the five titles is
described below.
Length
The number in the length column is the number of letters in the
corresponding word.
Syllables
The number in the syllables column is the number of syllables in the
corresponding word.
79
Occurrences
The number in the occurrences column is the number of times that the
corresponding word appears in the selected version or portion.
Place
Place is defined as the location of a word, number or punctuation mark
relative to the beginning of a selected version or portion. Remember, a
word is a group of alphanumeric characters between two blanks, a
punctuation mark and a blank, or between a blank and a punctuation mark.
The displayed place information is location of the first occurrence of the
corresponding word.
Reference
Reference information is displayed for the 'Words in order of appearance'
list or when F2 is pressed. In either case, it appears at the left side
of the screen. Reference information for the 'Words in order of
appearance' list is derived from the location of the first occurrence of
the corresponding word. Reference information displayed when F2 is
pressed is derived from the location of the corresponding phrase. The
information below about references applies to F2 and the vocabulary list
display.
Art is an abbreviation for article.
Sec is an abbreviation for section.
Amd is an abbreviation for amendment.
A reference can have one of the four following formats:
Art #.#
Art # Sec #.#
Amd #.#
Amd # Sec #.#
When an article or an amendment is not divided into sections, the number
following the abbreviation has a number to the right of the decimal. The
number to the right of the decimal is a paragraph number. Even if there
80
is only one paragraph, this number is used.
When an article or amendment is divided into sections, the number
following the abbreviation (Art or Amd) does not have a decimal. The
abbreviation Sec is followed by a number, a decimal, and then another
number. Even if a section only has one paragraph, there is a number to
the right of the decimal.
The reference Amd 10.1 is used to indicate text in the first paragraph of
the tenth amendment in the Bill of Rights.
The reference Art 1 Sec 2.3 is used to indicate that the associated word
or phrase is included in the 3rd paragraph of the 2nd section of the 1st
article of the Constitution.
81
MM2.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 2, Version or Portion
Main Menu option 2 allows you to select a version or portion of the
Constitution for review. When you purchase the program, you have a
selection consisting of a complete version, and 3 portions. Later, if you
analyze another file using Main Menu option 10, your selection is increased
to include each version you analyze. The following materials explain what
appears on the screen and how to use Main Menu option 2.
Description of the Screen
When you select Main Menu option 2, the top three lines of the screen
contain titles that show the relative positions of information provided for
each version or portion available for selection. The titles are:
[File Name] [Comments]
[ Source Path ]
[ Output Path ]
The fourth line of the screen is blank. The fifth, sixth and seventh
lines are highlighted (reverse video for color monitors, underscored for
monochrome). The highlighted lines contain information entered during the
analysis dialogue (see file MM10.DOC) for the default version.
Below the highlighted lines are displayed (in unhighlighted format
separated by a blank line) the information entered during analysis
dialogue for the other provided portions.
If you have used Main Menu option 10 to analyze other versions or portions,
the information that you entered during the analysis dialogue can be
displayed by scrolling with the HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN, or up arrow and
down arrow keys.
Information for each available version or portion is displayed on three
lines followed by a blank line. The information appears in the same
relative position as indicated by the titles on the top three lines of the
screen. The information referred to by each title is as follows:
[File Name]
Twelve characters maximum consisting of a valid DOS file name (8 characters
maximum), a period (if used), and a 3 character (maximum) extension, if
used. File name is entered during analysis dialogue.
23
[Comments]
Beginning in column 20 of the line on which the file name is displayed, 60
(maximum) characters of comments entered during the analysis dialogue.
[ Source Path ]
Beginning in column 1 of the line below that on which the file name and
comments are displayed, eighty characters (maximum) of information defining
drive and path on which source file was stored during execution of Main Menu
option 10. Can be a memory jogger if you use your imagination. Information
is entered during analysis dialogue.
[ Output Path ]
Beginning in column 1 of the line below that on which the location of source
file is displayed, eighty characters (maximum) of information defining drive
and path on which output files were stored during execution of Main Menu
option 10. Can be a memory jogger if you use your imagination. Information
is entered during analysis dialogue.
Selecting a Version or Portion
To select a version or portion of the Constitution for review, proceed as
follows:
1) Select item 2 from the Main Menu.
A slight delay occurs while information is read from disk. If
operating from diskette, you may be prompted to insert the program
diskette. If so, place the working copy of your program diskette in the
drive that you installed to. If you put it in another drive, the prompt
is repeated.
2) When the selections appear on the screen, scroll through the available
items using the HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN, and up arrow or down arrow keys
until the desired version or portion is highlighted.
3) If working from diskette, insert the index diskette. This refers to
the diskette on which the output files are stored. Place that diskette in
the drive specified in the location of output files information area of
the highlighted selection.
4) Press ENTER.
A delay occurs while files are read. This delay may be as long as 5
24
minutes depending on the size of the selected version and the kind of
computer you have. A prompt appears at the bottom of the screen advising
which file is being read. This prompt should be updated at least every 90
seconds. When all files are read, you are returned to the Main Menu.
If you put the index diskette in the wrong drive, inserted the wrong
index diskette, or if you failed to insert the index diskette, you are
prompted to insert it. Information related to the selected version or
portion is displayed along with the prompt. Insert the index diskette in
the appropriate drive and press ENTER. In some cases you may be returned
to the Main Menu anyway. If so, repeat Main Menu option 2.
25
MM3.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 3, Choose Seminar
Main Menu option 3 allows you to select among existing seminars or to
create a new seminar. The materials in this file explain what a seminar
is, how and why to create a seminar, and how to select a seminar.
What is a Seminar?
A seminar is a set of cross references created by the user.
The program keeps a separate set of seminars for each version or portion
of the Constitution analyzed using Main Menu option 10.
Each seminar contains a set of words with synonyms and a set of subjects.
Each word with synonyms and each subject has a set of related cross
references and comments.
Eight seminars with subject and synonym cross references are provided with
the default version of analyzed files. The other provided versions do not
include any subjects or synonyms. However, you can create them, if you
wish.
A seminar can contain a maximum of:
2,000 lines of comments for subjects and 2,000 lines of comments for
synonyms, for a maximum possible total of 4,000 lines of comments.
2,000 subject headings and 2,000 synonym headings for a maximum
possible total of 4,000 headings.
2,000 subject cross references and 2,000 synonym cross references for
a maximum possible total of 4,000 cross references.
You can have any relative number of subjects and synonym headings.
You can have any relative number of cross references and comments
distributed among the subject headings or among the synonym headings.
If you reach a maximum limit in the subjects, you can still work in the
synonym section of the seminar if it is not already full.
If you reach a maximum limit in the synonyms, you can still work in the
subject section of the seminar.
Reaching one of these maximum limits (actually, rather unlikely) is one
reason to create a new seminar.
Another reason to create a new seminar is to logically group synonym and
subject headings, comments and cross references under a title relevant to
26
the version or portion of the Constitution being studied.
When you select a version or portion of the Constitution (or let the
program make the default selection), only the seminars related to that
selected version or portion can be accessed.
When you create a seminar, it is accessible only when the selected version
or portion of the Constitution is selected. If you select another
version, the created seminar is unavailable.
When you select a seminar, only those synonyms and subject headings
previously stored in that seminar are available for review. You can
update the headings, cross references and comments if desired. Unless you
manually duplicate a heading with the associated cross references and
comments in another seminar (perfectly ok to do so), said headings, cross
references and comments will not be available if you select another
seminar.
You can switch seminars as often as you like.
Screen Description
When Main Menu option 3 is selected, a screen appears with the title
SEMINARS. The third line of the screen is highlighted. If this is a
newly analyzed version or portion of the Constitution, the line will be
blank. You can enter a title using the typewriter keys, F9, DELETE, and
the left or right arrow keys. If you have previously created other
seminars and entered titles, each of those titles will appear on a line
below the third line. No blank line separates titles. If more than one
seminar exists, you can move the highlighting using the HOME, END, PG UP,
PG DN, up arrow or down arrow keys. You can edit the title of a seminar
anytime it is highlighted on this screen.
Accessing a Seminar
To access a seminar, proceed as follows:
1) Select 3 from the Main Menu.
2) Scroll through the available selections until the desired seminar
is highlighted.
3) Press ENTER.
27
You are returned to the Main Menu. Subject and Synonyms
available now using Main menu options 4 and 5 are those
previously entered under the accessed seminar.
If you do not wish to change the accessed seminar, press ESC
instead of ENTER. You are returned to the Main Menu. The
accessed seminar is unchanged.
If no seminar selection is made using Main Menu option 3, the
default is the first seminar.
Creating a Seminar
To create a seminar, proceed as follows:
1) Select 3 from the Main Menu.
2) Press F8.
A blank highlighted line appears at the end of the existing list.
3) Type a seminar title in the highlighted area.
At this point, you can press F8 and create another seminar.
OR, you can press ENTER to access the newly created seminar.
OR, you can press ESC to return to the Main Menu. The new
seminar is created; however, the accessed seminar is unchanged.
OR, you can scroll through the list and press ENTER to select a
different seminar.
Pressing ENTER or ESC returns you to the Main Menu with the
seminar selected as described previously.
NOTE: Once you create a seminar, you are stuck with it. You cannot
delete it. If desired you can change the title and place different
references in it.
28
MM4.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SUBJECTS
The four major steps for cross referencing subjects are:
1) Create a heading, if it does not already exist.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Review the heading while adding or deleting related references or
comments.
4) Exit to the main menu to save changes.
Creating a Subject Heading
To create a subject heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 4 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SUBJECTS. The third line of the
screen is highlighted in reverse video. This line contains the title
of the default subject for the selected seminar. If no title has
been entered, the highlighted area is blank. If so, you can enter a
title if desired as described in step 3 which follows.
2) Press F8. A new subject heading is created at the end of the
existing list. The highlighting moves to the newly created subject
heading.
3) Type in a title. Use the typewriter keys as per usual. The
INSERT, BACK SPACE, DELETE, left and right arrow keys are active.
At this point you can access the created subject heading by
performing the procedure that follows beginning at step 2. Or you
can press ESC to return to the Main Menu. If so, the newly created
subject title is saved to disk and will be displayed the next time
you choose Main Menu item 4. However, no cross references or
comments are entered as yet.
29
Accessing a Subject Heading
To access a created subject heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 4 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SUBJECTS. The third line of the
screen is highlighted in reverse video. This line contains the title
of the default subject for the selected seminar. If no title has
been entered, the highlighted area is blank. If so, you can enter a
title if desired as described in step 3 in the preceding procedure.
2) Scroll through the list of subjects using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END
or the up and down arrow keys until the desired heading is
highlighted.
3) Press ENTER. A screen appears with a SUBJECT heading on the top
line. The title (if any) of the selected subject is displayed on the
third line, under which is a boxed in area divided into three
columns. You now have access to the selected heading for review,
print out, exporting to disk, updates including additions, deletion
to cross references or comments, or even elimination of the entire
subject heading.
Words previously entered under this heading (if any) appear in the
middle column. Notes previously entered under this heading (if any)
appear in the right column.
The middle and right columns will be blank if this is the first time
you have accessed the subject heading. You can move the highlighting
among the three columns and the selected heading field using the TAB
key. If the middle column is blank, it will be skipped.
If you press ESC while the cursor is in the rightmost column, the
cursor is removed from the rightmost column and the highlighting
appears in the left column.
If you press ESC while the highlighting is in the left or middle
column, you are returned to the screen on which the list of subjects
is displayed.
Reviewing the Selected Heading
Cross references and notes associated with a heading can be reviewed after
the heading is accessed according to the preceding procedure. The
associated cross references can be reviewed using either the F2 or the F3
key. Procedures for reviewing notes and cross references follow.
30
Reviewing Notes
To review notes, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. Use the scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow
and down arrow to move through the comments as desired. If all comments
appear in the window, PG UP and PG DN will have no effect.
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F2 key involves
pressing F2 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the Selected
Heading field. The other method involves pressing F2 while a word in the
middle column is highlighted. The results obtained by each method and
practical applications of each method are described below.
F2 from the Selected Heading Field
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
heading in the Selected Heading field on the third line of the screen.
2) Press F2.
The subject screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. All phrases that
have been cross referenced to the selected heading are accessed. To
return to the subject screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from the Title Block of the
Middle Column.
Pressing F4 deletes cross reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
31
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F2.
The subject screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. Only those cross
referenced phrases that contain the highlighted word are accessed. To
return to the subject screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from a highlighted word in
the Middle Column.
Pressing F4 deletes cross reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F3 key involves
pressing F3 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the Selected
Heading field. Another method involves pressing F3 while a word in the
middle column is highlighted. A third method (mentioned previously)
involves using the F2 key to locate a specific phrase and then pressing
the F3 key. The results obtained by each method and practical
applications of each method are described below.
F3 from the Selected Heading Field
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
32
heading in the Selected Heading field on the third line of the screen.
2) Press F3.
The subject screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading on the 4th line of
the screen. (Exception is when cross reference occurs with 1st 4 or last
14 lines of active version or portion) To return to the subject screen
press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases using the
left and right arrow keys.
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F3.
The subject screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading that contains the
word you indicated on the 4th line of the screen. (Exception is when cross
reference occurs with 1st 4 or last 14 lines of active version or portion)
To return to the subject screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases that contain the
indicated word using the left and right arrow keys.
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading
Cross references can be added in two ways. Before you can add cross
references to a heading, the heading must already be created and accessed
33
according to the preceding materials. Once a heading is created and
accessed, you can indicate that every occurrence of a word is related to
the accessed heading or that an individual occurrence of a word is
related. You can access the heading and change the cross references as
many times as you want to.
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the ENTER key. The highlighted word appears in the middle
column. All occurrences of the highlighted word are now cross referenced
to the accessed heading. To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the
cross references as described previously.
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the F2 key. The subject screen is replaced by a series of
phrases that contain the word you indicated. All phrases in the
Constitution that contain the indicated word are accessed.
You can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
You can return to the subject screen without cross referencing any thing
by pressing the ESC key before you press the ENTER key.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. This is desirable sometimes to
verify that the phrase you have highlighted is actually the phrase you are
looking for. Press ESC to return to the subject screen without cross
34
referencing anything or press F2 to return to the phrase display.
With a desired phrase highlighted, press the ENTER key. The highlighted
occurrence of the word is now cross referenced to the accessed heading.
The word you indicated before pressing F2 is added to the middle column if
it was not already there.
You can cross reference as many phrases as you wish. If you attempt to
duplicate the cross reference of an occurrence of a word to the accessed
heading, the duplicate reference is ignored. However, that same word can
still be cross referenced to as many other headings under synonyms, or
subject in the same or other seminars as you wish.
When all desired occurrences of a word are cross referenced to the
accessed heading, press the ESC key to return to the subject screen.
4) To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the cross references as
described previously.
Adding Comments
With a heading accessed, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. On the typewriter keys, type up to 190 lines of
comments per heading, 2000 maximum lines per seminar. Use the INSERT key
to control INS and RPLCE modes. Use the DELETE key or the BACK SPACE key
to erase unwanted characters. The ENTER key moves the cursor to the
beginning of the next line. If the INS mode is selected, or if the cursor
is on the last line, it also adds a line. Active scroll keys are PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, left, right, up and down arrows. They do what they
usually do in common word processor programs. Each time you press the
down arrow key or the ENTER key with the cursor on the bottom line of
your comments, you consume 41 bytes of disk space. This can add up. For
more information, refer to the file named EDITOR.DOC.
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading
Individual cross references to the accessed heading can be deleted. Or
all cross references of a selected word to the accessed heading can be
deleted. Or the accessed heading can be deleted with ALL associated cross
references and comments. Procedures to accomplish each of these delete
functions follow.
Keep in mind that you are NOT affecting the source text file in any way
when you use the delete function (or any other feature of this program for
that matter). No words can or will be deleted from the vocabulary list
35
using the F4 key. Only the accessed heading and its cross references are
affected by the F4 key.
Deleting Individual Cross References
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the F2 key. You can use the F2 key from within the Selected
Heading field or from a highlighted word in the middle column as described
previously under 'Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key'.
2) Scroll through the displayed phrases until the phrase containing the
occurrence that you wish to delete is highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN,
HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow keys to move the highlighting.
NOTE: You can return to the subject screen without deleting anything by
pressing the ESC key.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. The cross
reference to the highlighted occurrence is now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted phrase eliminated. If the deleted phrase is
the only phrase displayed, you are returned to the subject screen.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you are
returned to the display of cross referenced phrases. The highlighted
phrase is NOT deleted.
You can delete as many cross references as you wish. When finished
deleting, press the ESC key to return to the subject screen. You can
return to delete cross references to other phrases anytime you wish.
When you delete individual references using this procedure, no words are
removed from the middle column, not even if you delete all cross
references to a particular word or words.
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the TAB key until the top word in the middle column is accessed.
2) Scroll through the displayed words until the desired word is
highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow
36
keys to move the highlighting.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. All cross
references to the highlighted word are now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted word eliminated. If the deleted word is the
only word in the middle column, the highlighting moves to the left column.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, the
highlighted word is NOT deleted.
You can delete as many words as you wish. When finished deleting, you can
continue performing other functions in any desired order. You can return
to delete other words anytime you wish.
Deleting the Accessed Heading
When you delete the accessed heading, the accessed heading no longer
appears on the screen with the list of subjects. All associated cross
references and comments are deleted. The space used for comments on the
disk is NOT freed up. To delete the accessed heading, proceed as follows:
1) With the heading accessed, press the TAB key until the heading is
highlighted in the Selected Heading field on the third line of the screen.
2) Press the F4 key.
3) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. You are
returned to the screen on which the list of subjects is displayed. The
list no longer contains the deleted heading.
NOTE: You can use the same heading multiple times. This capability has
its practical applications. If you have done this, only the heading that
you accessed is deleted.
If you type an N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you can
continue reviewing the accessed heading as per usual.
Printing your Cross References
To make a hard copy of your cross references to an accessed heading,
proceed as follows:
37
1) Prepare your printer.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Press the TAB key until the accessed heading is highlighted on the
third line of the screen.
4) Press F7. The print out should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
occur.
A common mistake is to press F7 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 25-page listing of the vocabulary list for the
default version. Press the ESC key to stop print out of the vocabulary
list. The ESC key will NOT stop print out of the accessed heading.
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File
To export a soft copy of your cross references to an ASCII file, proceed
as
follows:
1) Decide on a file name.
You are prompted for a file name during this procedure. The file name
must be a valid DOS file name. The program does not perform any check of
the file name.
If you enter an invalid file name, results are unpredictable.
If you enter the file name of an existing file, the existing file is
erased when you press F5. No warning or advisory message is provided.
The file name can include a drive specifier and path information.
You MUST type in the extension. The program will not provide one.
Without the extension, some word processors may not access the file. Many
will not access the file as easily without the proper extension. Check
the documentation provided with your word processor and use the proper
extension.
2) If working with floppies, insert the target diskette in the
appropriate drive.
As has been discussed elsewhere, it is a good idea to use a separate
diskette for the purpose of exporting these soft copy versions of your
cross
references.
38
Keep track of the space on your target diskette. As has been discussed
elsewhere, a full disk error is a fatal error. You will get kicked out of
the program.
Minimum space required is 1,000 bytes. To this add 10 bytes per word in
the middle column, 80 bytes per phrase displayed (when the F2 key is
pressed while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block of
the middle column), and 50 bytes per line of comments including all blank
lines.
The maximum possible space consumed by a single heading is 170,000
bytes. But this is ridiculous and will probably NEVER occur. Even if it
does, it will fit on a single floppy if you use one that is less than half
full. As a typical example, the soft copy file created by this procedure
for the provide cross references to the word 'rights' consumes
approximately 4,000 bytes of disk space.
3) Access the desired heading.
4) Press the TAB key until the accessed heading is highlighted on the
third line of the screen.
5) Press F5. You are prompted for a file name. Type in the file name
with drive specifier, path information and extension as discussed
previously.
6) Press ENTER. The export should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
occur.
A common mistake is to press F5 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 100,000 byte listing of the vocabulary list for
the default version. Press the ESC key to stop exporting of the
vocabulary list. The ESC key will NOT stop exporting of the accessed
heading.
Don't worry about swapping diskettes. If you are working with diskettes
and you forget to swap back to the index or program diskette, you are
prompted for them when they are needed. You are NOT prompted for the
alternate diskette to export soft copy files of your cross references.
You must do this on your own before pressing ENTER after typing in the
file name.
39
MM5.DOC
CROSS REFERENCING PROCEDURES FOR SYNONYMS
The four major steps for cross referencing synonyms are:
1) Create a heading, if it does not already exist.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Review the heading while adding or deleting related references or
comments.
4) Exit to the main menu to save changes.
Creating a Synonym Heading
To create a synonym heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 5 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SYNONYMS. A box on the screen is
divided into 3 columns. The top word in the left column is highlighted.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press ENTER. When the highlighted word appears in the middle column,
your heading is created.
At this point you can access the created synonym heading by performing the
procedure that follows beginning at step 2. Or you can press ESC to
return to the Main Menu. Notice that the title of the middle column is
'Words with Synonyms'. ESC will not return you to the Main Menu if the
title of the middle column is 'Synonyms for xxxxxxx' where xxxxxx is a
word you have selected.
Accessing a Synonym Heading
To access a created synonym heading, proceed as follows:
1) Select 5 from the main menu.
A screen appears with the heading SYNONYMS. A box on the screen is
divided into 3 columns. The top word in the left column is highlighted.
2) Press the TAB key once. The highlighting moves to the middle column.
40
3) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired heading is highlighted. (F6
won't work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
4) Press ENTER. The title block of the middle column changes to
'Synonyms for xxxxxxx' where xxxxxx is the desired heading. The word you
selected as the desired heading is highlighted. You now have access to
the selected heading for review, print out, exporting to disk, updates
including additions, deletions to cross references or comments, or even
elimination of the entire synonym heading.
Words previously entered under this heading (if any) appear in the middle
column. Notes previously entered under this heading (if any) appear in
the right column.
The middle and right columns will be blank if this is the first time you
have accessed the subject heading. You can move the highlighting among
the three columns and the middle column title block using the TAB key. If
the middle column is blank, it will be skipped.
If you press ESC while the cursor is in the rightmost column, the cursor
is removed from the rightmost column and the highlighting appears in the
left column.
If you press ESC while the highlighting is in the left column, the middle
column title block, or in the middle column, the title of the middle
column changes to 'Words with Synonyms'.
Reviewing the Selected Heading
Cross references and notes associated with a heading can be reviewed after
the heading is accessed according to the preceding procedure. The
associated cross references can be reviewed using either the F2 or the F3
key. Procedures for reviewing notes and cross references follow.
Reviewing Notes
To review notes, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. Use the scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow
and down arrow to move through the comments as desired. If all comments
appear in the window, PG UP and PG DN will have no effect.
41
Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F2 key involves
pressing F2 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block
of the middle column. The other method involves pressing F2 while a word
in the middle column is highlighted. The results obtained by each method
and practical applications of each method are described below.
F2 from the Title Block of the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
heading in the title block of the middle column.
2) Press F2.
The synonym screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. All phrases that
have been cross referenced to the selected heading are accessed. To
return to the synonym screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from the Title Block of the
Middle Column.
Pressing F4 deletes cross-reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
F2 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F2.
42
The synonym screen is replaced by a series of phrases that have been
previously cross referenced to the accessed heading. Only those cross
referenced phrases that contain the highlighted word are accessed. To
return to the synonym screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG
UP, PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. See F3 from a highlighted word in
the Middle Column
Pressing F4 deletes cross-reference to occurrence of highlighted word in
highlighted phrase. See Deleting References to Individual Occurrences of
Words.
Reviewing Cross References using the F3 Key
One method for reviewing cross references using the F3 key involves
pressing F3 while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block
of the middle column. Another method involves pressing F3 while a word in
the middle column is highlighted. A third method (mentioned previously)
involves using the F2 key to locate a specific phrase and then pressing
the F3 key. The results obtained by each method and practical
applications of each method are described below.
F3 from the Title Block of the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the accessed
heading in the title block of the middle column.
2) Press F3.
The synonym screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading on the 4th line of
the screen. (Exception is when cross reference occurs with 1st 4 or last
14 lines of active version or portion) To return to the synonym screen
press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases using the
left and right arrow keys.
43
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
F3 from a highlighted word in the Middle Column
With a heading accessed,
1) Press the TAB key until the highlighting appears over the first word
in the middle column.
2) Scroll through the middle column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END or the
up and down arrow keys until the desired word is highlighted. (F6 won't
work when the highlighting is in the middle column.)
3) Press F3.
The synonym screen is replaced by the text of the Constitution with the
first occurring cross reference to the accessed heading that contains the
word you indicated on the 4th line of the screen. (Exception is when cross
reference occurs with 1st 4 or last 14 lines of active version or portion)
To return to the synonym screen press the ESC key.
OR, you can scroll through the cross referenced phrases that contain the
indicated word using the left and right arrow keys.
Scroll keys PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END can be used to scroll through the
text as per usual.
Adding Cross References to the Accessed Heading
Cross references can be added in two ways. Before you can add cross
references to a heading, the heading must already be created and accessed
according to the preceding materials. Once a heading is created and
accessed, you can indicate that every occurrence of a word is a synonym to
the accessed heading or that an individual occurrence of a word is a
synonym. You can access the heading and change the cross references as
many times as you want to.
Cross Referencing Every Occurrence of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
44
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the ENTER key. The highlighted word appears in the middle
column. All occurrences of the highlighted word are now cross referenced
to the accessed heading. To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the
cross references as described previously.
Cross Referencing Specific Occurrence(s) of a Word
With the desired heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) If the highlighting is not in the leftmost column, press the TAB key
until it is.
2) Scroll through the list in the left column using PG UP, PG DN, HOME,
END, F6 or up arrow, down arrow until a desired word is highlighted.
3) Press the F2 key. The synonym screen is replaced by a series of
phrases that contain the word you indicated. All phrases in the
Constitution that contain the indicated word are accessed.
You can scroll through the displayed phrases using the scroll keys PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, up arrow or down arrow.
You can return to the synonym screen without cross referencing any thing
by pressing the ESC key before you press the ENTER key.
Pressing F3 displays the text of the Constitution with the highlighted
phrase on the 4th line of the screen. This is desirable sometimes to
verify that the phrase you have highlighted is actually the phrase you are
looking for. Press ESC to return to the synonym screen without cross
referencing anything or press F2 to return to the phrase display.
With a desired phrase highlighted, press the ENTER key. The highlighted
occurrence of the word is now cross referenced to the accessed heading.
The word you indicated before pressing F2 is added to the middle column if
it was not already there.
You can cross reference as many phrases as you wish. If you attempt to
duplicate the cross reference of an occurrence of a word to the accessed
heading, the duplicate reference is ignored. However, that same word can
still be cross referenced to as many other headings under synonyms, or
45
subject in the same or other seminars as you wish.
When all desired occurrences of a word are cross referenced to the
accessed heading, press the ESC key to return to the synonym screen.
4) To verify, use the F2 or F3 key to review the cross references as
described previously.
Adding Comments
With a heading accessed, press the TAB key until the cursor appears in the
rightmost column. On the typewriter keys, type up to 190 lines of
comments per heading, 2000 maximum lines per seminar. Use the INSERT key
to control INS and RPLCE modes. Use the DELETE key or the BACK SPACE key
to erase unwanted characters. The ENTER key moves the cursor to the
beginning of the next line. If the INS mode is selected, or if the cursor
is on the last line, it also adds a line. Active scroll keys are PG UP,
PG DN, HOME, END, left, right, up and down arrows. They do what they
usually do in common word processor programs. Each time you press the
down arrow key or the ENTER key with the cursor on the bottom line of
your comments, you consume 41 bytes of disk space. This can add up. For
more information, refer to the file named EDITOR.DOC.
Deleting Cross References from the Accessed Heading
Individual cross references to the accessed heading can be deleted. Or
all cross references of a selected word to the accessed heading can be
deleted. Or the accessed heading can be deleted with ALL associated cross
references and comments. Procedures to accomplish each of these delete
functions follow.
Keep in mind that you are NOT affecting the source text file in any way
when you use the delete function (or any other feature of this program for
that matter). No words can or will be deleted from the vocabulary list
using the F4 key. Only the accessed heading and its cross references are
affected by the F4 key.
Deleting Individual Cross References
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the F2 key. You can use the F2 key from within the title block
46
of the middle column or from a highlighted word in the middle column as
described previously under 'Reviewing Cross References using the F2 Key'.
2) Scroll through the displayed phrases until the phrase containing the
occurrence that you wish to delete is highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN,
HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow keys to move the highlighting.
NOTE: You can return to the synonym screen without deleting anything by
pressing the ESC key.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. The cross
reference to the highlighted occurrence is now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted phrase eliminated. If the deleted phrase is
the only phrase displayed, you are returned to the synonym screen.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you are
returned to the display of cross referenced phrases. The highlighted
phrase is NOT deleted.
You can delete as many cross references as you wish. When finished
deleting, press the ESC key to return to the synonym screen. You can
return to delete other phrases anytime you wish.
When you delete individual references using this procedure, no words are
removed from the middle column, not even if you delete all cross
references to a particular word or words.
Deleting All Cross References of a Selected Word
With the heading accessed, proceed as follows:
1) Press the TAB key until the top word in the middle column is accessed.
2) Scroll through the displayed words until the desired word is
highlighted. Use the PG UP, PG DN, HOME, END, or up arrow, down arrow
keys to move the highlighting.
3) Press the F4 key.
4) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. All cross
references to the highlighted word are now deleted. The screen is
refreshed with the deleted word eliminated. If the deleted word is the
only word in the middle column, the highlighting moves to the left column.
If you type N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, the
highlighted word is NOT deleted.
47
You can delete as many words as you wish. When finished deleting, you can
continue performing other functions in any desired order. You can return
to delete other words anytime you wish.
Deleting the Accessed Heading
When you delete the accessed heading, the word no longer appears in the
middle column when the heading is Words with Synonyms. All associated
cross references and comments are deleted. The space used for comments on
the disk is NOT freed up. To delete the accessed heading, proceed as
follows:
1) With the heading accessed, press the TAB key until the heading is
highlighted in the title block of the middle column.
2) Press the F4 key.
3) Type a Y in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt. Screen is
refreshed with the comments cleared from the right column. The title of
the middle column changes to Words with Synonyms. The middle column no
longer contains the deleted heading. If there are no other words in the
middle column, the highlighting appears in the left column.
NOTE: You can use the same word as a heading multiple times. This
capability has its practical applications. If you have done this, only
the heading that you accessed is deleted.
If you type an N in response to the 'Are you sure, Y/N?' prompt, you can
continue reviewing the accessed heading as per usual.
Printing your Cross References
To make a hard copy of your cross references to an accessed heading,
proceed as follows:
1) Prepare your printer.
2) Access the desired heading.
3) Press the TAB key until the desired heading is highlighted in the
title block of the middle column.
4) Press F7. The print out should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
48
occur.
A common mistake is to press F7 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 25-page listing of the vocabulary list for the
default version. Press the ESC key to stop print out of the vocabulary
list. The ESC key will NOT stop print out of the accessed heading.
Exporting Your Cross References to an ASCII Disk File
To export a soft copy of your cross references to an ASCII file, proceed
as follows:
1) Decide on a file name.
You are prompted for a file name during this procedure. The file name
must be a valid DOS file name. The program does not perform any check of
the file name.
If you enter an invalid file name, results are unpredictable.
If you enter the file name of an existing file, the existing file is
erased when you press F5. No warning or advisory message is provided.
The file name can include a drive specifier and path information.
You MUST type in the extension. The program will not provide one.
Without the extension, some word processors may not access the file. Many
will not access the file as easily without the proper extension. Check
the documentation provided with your word processor and use the proper
extension.
2) If working with floppies, insert the target diskette in the
appropriate drive.
As has been discussed elsewhere, it is a good idea to use a separate
diskette for the purpose of exporting these soft copy versions of your
cross references.
Keep track of the space on your target diskette. As has been discussed
elsewhere, a full disk error is a fatal error. You will get kicked out of
the program.
Minimum space required is 1,000 bytes. To this add 10 bytes per word in
the middle column, 80 bytes per phrase displayed (when the F2 key is
pressed while the accessed heading is highlighted in the title block of
the middle column), and 50 bytes per line of comments including all blank
lines.
49
The maximum possible space consumed by a single heading is 170,000
bytes. But this is ridiculous and will probably NEVER occur. Even if it
does, it will fit on a single floppy if you use one that is less than half
full. As a typical example, the soft copy file created by this procedure
for the provide cross references to the word 'rights' consumes
approximately 4,000 bytes of disk space.
3) Access the desired heading.
4) Press the TAB key until the desired heading is highlighted in the
title block of the middle column.
5) Press F5. You are prompted for a file name. Type in the file name
with drive specifier, path information and extension as discussed
previously.
6) Press ENTER. The export should start within a few seconds. For
headings with a large number of cross references, a slight delay may
occur.
A common mistake is to press F5 while the highlighting is in the left
column. This results in a 100,000 byte listing of the vocabulary list for
the default version. Press the ESC key to stop exporting of the
vocabulary
list. The ESC key will NOT stop exporting of the accessed heading.
Don't worry about swapping diskettes. If you are working with diskettes
and you forget to swap back to the index or program diskette, you are
prompted for them when they are needed. You are NOT prompted for the
alternate diskette to export soft copy files of your cross references.
You must do this on your own.
50
MM6.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 6
The Parameter Search (Words) function allows you to compile a list of
words, the usage parameters of which conform to a set of values that you
indicate on an interactive screen. A description of the interactive
screen, task-oriented (step-by-step) procedures for using the screen, and
practical hints for using this function are included in this file.
Description of the Interactive Screen
When option 6 is selected from the Main Menu, the interactive screen for
the parameter search (words) function appears. On the top line of the
screen is the title WORD PARAMETER SEARCH.
On the third line of the screen is a field labeled 'Word List Selection'.
This field allows you to select a vocabulary list. When the screen is
first displayed, the cursor is placed in this field, and the default value
is 3.
Beginning at approximately mid screen, 5 other areas for input are
displayed. Each of these five areas (described in the following material)
has two fields to receive input related to a specific word usage
parameter. In each of these five areas, one field is for a maximum value,
and the other field is for a minimum value to be used during the search.
These maximum and minimum value determine what will be 'found' during the
search. Four of the areas require numeric input. The fifth area accepts
number(s), letter(s), or word(s). When the screen is first displayed, the
maximum and minimum occurring values for the selected version or portion
are displayed in each of these five areas as the defaults.
You can move the cursor among the fields using the TAB, up arrow, or down
arrow keys. You can enter data in each field using the typewriter keys,
F9, DELETE, and the left or right arrow keys.
Press ENTER when cursor is in the top field to select a vocabulary list.
Press ENTER when the cursor is anywhere else on this screen to initiate
specified search.
Press ESC while cursor is on this screen to return to the Main Menu.
51
Parameter Field Descriptions
Five areas on the screen contain two fields intended to receive your
input. The input for each field in an area depends on what you are
looking for. The value entered in the left field of any area can be equal
to or less than the value entered in the right field of that area. Words
falling within the limits specified by your input will be displayed in a
list on another screen. You can return to this screen by pressing ESC.
If no words fall within the limits you specify, an advisory message to
that effect is displayed. If a value in the left field of any area is
greater than the value in the right field of the same area, no matches
will be found.
Each area is displayed on two lines.
The top line has a number, a title and another number. Each title
specifies the word usage parameter that is entered in its area. The left
number indicates the minimum occurring value for a word usage parameter in
the selected version or portion. The right number indicates the maximum
occurring value for a word usage parameter in the selected version or
portion. The numbers displayed on the top line of each area may vary for
each version or portion. They are determined during execution of Main
Menu option 10. The numbers on the top line of an area cannot be changed
by the user.
The second line contains a number, the symbols '<= target <=' and another
number. When the screen is first displayed, the numbers displayed on the
second line are the same as the numbers displayed on the first line. The
left field for an area begins where the left number is displayed on the
second line. The right field for an area begins where the right number is
displayed on the second line. The second line can be read, 'The words
that I am searching for (target) have a value for 'the title on first
line' that is greater than or equal to the value in the left field and
smaller than or equal to the value in the right field. You can change
the value in any field on the second line by accessing it (use the TAB
key, up arrow or down arrow keys) and then typing in a desired value using
the typewriter keys.
Syllables Area
The area with the title syllables is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines
of the screen. This area is used to specify the maximum and minimum
number of syllables in the word(s) (if any) found during the specified
search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
52
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is 0 because that is
the number of syllables entered for punctuation marks. The maximum
default value depends on which version or portion you select. The number
1787 which occurs in Article VII with the signatures has 7 syllables. If
you select USACONST.DOC or ORIGINAL.DOC using Main Menu option 2, 7 is the
maximum default value for the syllables area. The maximum can be smaller
for other versions or portions.
To compile a list of 6 syllable words, you can enter 6 in both the left
and right fields of the syllables area. If you leave the values in the
fields of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the six syllable
words in the selected vocabulary list.
To compile a list of 7 syllable words, enter 7 in both fields of the
syllables area and leave the fields of the other areas at their default
values. When you press ENTER, you get the 'No matches found' advisory
message. Why is this? The reason is that 1787 is not included in the
default vocabulary list.
To access a list containing 1787, press the TAB or up arrow key until the
cursor is in the 'Word List Selection' field. Press ENTER. Select 4.
Return to the parameter search screen and repeat the search. The number
1787 is 'found'. The reason that 1787 is found is that it is included in
the vocabulary list number 4 that you selected. (This is not true if you
select the BILLRITE.DOC or AMENDS.DOC portion using Main Menu option 2).
The preceding exercise is intended to show the functioning of the
syllables field. The exercise demonstrates how the selected vocabulary
list and selected version or portion interact with the syllables field.
The 'Letters' area and the 'Occurrences' area behave in a similar fashion.
The exercises are not repeated for them. The 'Place' area and the 'Word'
area are somewhat different. See the corresponding paragraphs for further
information about the 'Place' and 'Word' areas.
For more information about vocabulary lists, see file MM13.DOC. For more
information about versions and portions, see file MM2.DOC. For
information about entering syllable data, see file MM11.DOC.
Letters Area
The area with the title letters is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines of
the screen to the right of the syllables area. This area is used to
specify the maximum and minimum number of letters in the word(s) (if any)
found during the specified search.
53
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 1 because that is the number of letters contained in the article
adjective "A", the Roman Numerals "I" and "X", as well as the personal
pronoun "I". The maximum default value is 16 for the default version
resulting from the use of 'constitutionally' and 'disqualification'. The
minimum and maximum default values may vary with the selected version or
portion.
To compile a list of 6 letter words, you can enter 6 in both the left and
right fields of the letters area. If you leave the values in the fields
of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the six letter words in
the selected vocabulary list.
Occurrences Area
The area with the title occurrences is displayed beneath the syllables
area on the 17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to
specify the maximum and minimum number of times that the word(s) (if any)
found by a specified search are used in the selected version or portion.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 1 because numerous words are used once in that version. The
maximum default value is 700 for the default version because that is the
number of times that the article adjective 'the' is used. No other word
occurs more times in the default version. The minimum and maximum default
values may vary with the selected version or portion.
To compile a list of words that occur 6 times, you can enter 6 in both the
left and right fields of the occurrences area. If you leave the values in
the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the words in
the selected vocabulary list that occur 6 times.
Place Area
The area with the title Place is displayed beneath the letters area on the
17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to specify where in
54
the Constitution you want to search for the word(s) (if any) found during
the specified search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is always 1 because of
the way place is defined. The maximum default value is depends on the
total number of words, numbers, and punctuation marks in the selected
version or portion. The maximum default value nearly always varies with
the selected version or portion.
Place is defined as the location of a word, number or punctuation mark
relative to the beginning of a selected version or portion. Remember, a
word is a group of alphanumeric characters between two blanks, a
punctuation mark and a blank, or between a blank and a punctuation mark.
To obtain place information for a particular occurrence of a word, number
or punctuation mark, highlight the item of interest in a vocabulary list
and press F2. Highlight the occurrence of interest. Place information is
displayed at the top of the screen.
To find what word occurs in the middle of the Constitution, divide the
default maximum by 2 and enter the rounded off value in the left and right
fields of the Place area. If you leave the other areas at their defaults,
the word displayed is the word in the exact middle of the Constitution.
A more practical application of this field might be to confine your search
to a particular Article, Section, or Amendment. This would involve
finding the place information for the beginning of two consecutive
articles, sections, or amendments. Enter the place information for the
first item in the left field and enter the place information for the
second item in the right field. This allows you to perform your search
with a given article, section, or amendment.
Actually, you can specify any place value as beginning or end. Valid
input is NOT limited to beginnings of Articles, Section, or Amendments.
Word Area
The area with the title Word is displayed beneath the Occurrences area on
the 21st and 22nd lines of the screen. This area is used to specify the
word(s) (if any) found during the specified search. The words that will
be found are based on an alphanumeric evaluation of your input.
To see what is greater than what in alphanumeric sorts performed by this
program, select Main Menu option 13 and then select option 4. The
55
displayed list is in the order that is used by this search function to
evaluate your input. Generally speaking, blank comes first, followed by
punctuation marks and numbers, then capital letters, then lower case
letters.
Also, to be found, a target word must be contained in the selected
vocabulary list. The default vocabulary list contains no Arabic numbers.
Hence, if you look for the item with 7 syllables while 3 appears in the
top field, you get 'No matches found'. But there is a term with 7
syllables. To find it, move the cursor to the top field and press ENTER.
Select 1 or 4 from the menu that appears. Enter 7 in the left field of
the syllable parameter. Press ENTER. Surprised?
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen, including the 'Word List Selection' field.
The defaults on this screen are intended to be such that all words are
included within the default ranges. Hence, all blanks is always the
default for the left field and lower case zz is always the default for the
right field.
One practical application of this area involves using it in conjunction
with the place area. You can specify a search within a given article,
section, or amendment as previously described while the same word is
entered in the left and right fields of the word area. The resulting
display tells you if the word occurs in the specified article, section, or
amendment (get the place information by using F2 on the word ARTICLE,
SECTION, or AMENDMENT in all upper case), and if so, how many times.
Performing a Search
To perform a search, proceed as follows:
1) Determine the appropriate values to specify your search, including
which vocabulary list.
2) Select 6 from the Main Menu.
3) Select the appropriate vocabulary list if it is other than the one
indicated in the 'Word List Selection' field.
4) Type the previously determined values in the fields of the appropriate
areas.
5) With the cursor in any field except the 'Word List Selection' field,
press ENTER.
56
After a delay, you either get a list of words that fit your input, or
you get an advisory message, 'No matches found'.
If the 'No Matches found' message appears, press ENTER to return to
the interactive screen.
If the list of words 'found' requires more than one screen to display,
scroll through the list using PG UP, PG DN, HOME, or END keys. You cannot
access phrases or text using F2 and F3.
You can print the list using the F7 key.
You can export the list to disk using the F5 key.
Using the screen print function of your computer, you can print a hard
copy of the interactive screen title WORD PARAMETER SEARCH with your
input. F7 won't print that screen. F5 won't export it to disk.
57
MM7.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 7
The Parameter Search (Clauses) function allows you to compile a list of
clauses that conform to a set of values that you indicate on an
interactive screen. A description of the interactive screen, task-
oriented (step-by-step) procedures for using the screen, and practical
hints for using this function are included in this file.
Description of the Interactive Screen
When 7 is selected from the Main Menu, the interactive screen for the
parameter search (words) function appears. On the top line of the screen
is the title CLAUSE PARAMETER SEARCH.
Beginning at approximately mid screen, 4 areas for input are displayed.
Each of these four areas (described in the following material) has two
fields to receive input related to a specific parameter of clause
complexity. In each of these four areas, one field is for a maximum
value, and the other field is for a minimum value to be used during the
search. These maximum and minimum value determine what clauses will be
found during the search. The four areas require numeric input. When the
screen is first displayed, the maximum and minimum occurring values for
the selected version or portion are displayed in each of these four areas
as the defaults.
You can move the cursor among the fields using the TAB, up arrow, or down
arrow keys. You can enter data in each field using the typewriter keys,
F9, DELETE, and the left or right arrow keys.
Press ENTER when the cursor is anywhere on this screen to initiate
specified search.
Press ESC while cursor is on this screen to return to the Main Menu.
Parameter Field Descriptions
Four areas on the screen contain two fields intended to receive your
input. The input for each field in an area depends on what you are
looking for. The value entered in the left field of any area can be equal
to or less than the value entered in the right field of that area.
Clauses falling within the limits specified by your input will be
displayed one at a time on another screen. You can return to this screen
by pressing ESC. If no clauses fall within the limits you specify, an
advisory message to that effect is displayed. If a value in the left
58
field of any area is greater than the value in the right field of the same
area, no matches will be found.
Each area is displayed on two lines.
The top line has a number, a title and another number. Each title
specifies the clause complexity parameter that is entered in its area.
The left number indicates the minimum occurring value for a clause
complexity parameter in the selected version or portion. The right number
indicates the maximum occurring value for a clause complexity parameter in
the selected version or portion. The numbers displayed on the top line of
each area may vary for each version or portion. They are determined
during execution of Main Menu option 10. The numbers on the top line of
an area cannot be changed by the user.
The second line contains a number, the symbols '<= target <=' and another
number. When the screen is first displayed, the numbers displayed on the
second line are the same as the numbers displayed on the first line. The
left field for an area begins where the left number is displayed on the
second line. The right field for an area begins where the right number is
displayed on the second line. The second line can be read, 'The clauses
that I am searching for (target) have a value for the 'title on first
line' that is greater than or equal to the value in the left field and
smaller than or equal to the value in the right field.' You can change
the value in any field on the second line by accessing it (use the TAB
key, up arrow or down arrow keys) and then typing in a desired value using
the typewriter keys.
Syllables Area
The area with the title syllables is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines
of the screen. This area is used to specify the maximum and minimum
number of syllables in the clause(s) (if any) found during the specified
search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is 0 because of the
double dash between the semi colon and the quote mark that precedes the
President's inaugural oath. The maximum default value depends on which
version or portion you select. Sixty-six is the maximum number of
syllables in a clause for the default version. The maximum can be smaller
for other versions or portions.
To compile a series of clauses with a total 6 syllable words, you can
59
enter 6 in both the left and right fields of the syllables area. If you
leave the values in the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you
get all the six syllable clauses in the selected version or portion.
Letters Area
The area with the title letters is displayed on the 13th and 14th lines of
the screen to the right of the syllables area. This area is used to
specify the maximum and minimum number of letters in the clause(s) (if
any) found during the specified search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 3 because that is the number of letters contained in the
conjunction 'and' that occurs between two commas. The maximum default
value is 222 for the default version resulting from a phrase in the 22nd
amendment. The minimum and maximum default values may vary with the
selected version or portion.
To compile a list of clauses that consist of a total of 6 letters, you can
enter 6 in both the left and right fields of the letters area. If you
leave the values in the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you
get all the six letter clauses in the selected version or portion.
Words Area
The area with the title words is displayed beneath the syllables area on
the 17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to specify the
maximum and minimum number of words contained in clause(s) (if any) found
by a specified search in the selected version or portion.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
For the default version, the minimum default value displayed on the top
line is 1 because of the use of the conjunction 'and' between two commas.
The maximum default value is 65 for the default version because of a
phrase in the 22nd amendment. No other phrase is longer in the default
version. The minimum and maximum default values may vary with the
60
selected version or portion.
To compile a list of clauses that contain 6 words, you can enter 6 in both
the left and right fields of the words area. If you leave the values in
the fields of the other areas at their defaults, you get all the 6-word
clauses in the selected version or portion.
Place Area
The area with the title Place is displayed beneath the letters area on the
17th and 18th lines of the screen. This area is used to specify where in
the Constitution you want to search for the clause(s) (if any) found
during the specified search.
NOTE: A search is 'specified' by the entries in all the fields of all the
areas on this screen.
The minimum default value displayed on the top line is always 1 because of
the way place is defined. The maximum default value is depends on the
total number of words, numbers, and punctuation marks in the selected
version or portion. The maximum default value nearly always varies with
the selected version or portion.
Place is defined as the location of a word, number or punctuation mark
relative to the beginning of a selected version or portion. Remember, a
clause is a group of words and numbers between two punctuation marks,
between a carriage return (a blank line) and a punctuation mark or between
a punctuation mark and a carriage return. To obtain place information for
a particular occurrence of a word, number or punctuation mark, highlight
the item of interest in a vocabulary list and press F2. Highlight the
occurrence of interest. Place information is displayed at the top of the
screen.
To find what phrase occurs in the middle of the Constitution, divide the
default maximum by 2 and enter the rounded off value in the left and right
fields of the Place area. If you leave the other areas at their defaults,
the phrase displayed is the phrase in the exact middle of the
Constitution.
A more practical application of this field would involve finding the place
information for the beginning of two consecutive articles, sections, or
amendments. Enter the place information for the first item in the left
field and enter the place information for the second item in the right
field. This allows you to perform your search within a given article,
section, or amendment.
61
Performing a Search
To perform a search, proceed as follows:
1) Determine the appropriate values to specify your search.
2) Select 7 from the Main Menu.
3) Type the previously determined values in the fields of the appropriate
areas.
4) Press ENTER.
After a delay, you either get a list of clauses that fit your input,
or you get an advisory message, 'No matches found'.
If the 'No Matches found' message appears, press ENTER to return to
the interactive screen.
Scroll through the list one at a time using any key except ESC. You
cannot access phrases or text using F2 and F3.
You can print the list using the F7 key.
You can export the list to disk using the F5 key.
Using the screen print function of your computer, you can print a hard
copy of the interactive screen entitled CLAUSE PARAMETER SEARCH with your
input. F7 won't print that screen. F5 won't export it to disk.
62
MM8.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 8
Main Menu option 8 allows you to review reports automatically generated
during execution of Main Menu option 10. It also allows you to regenerate
those reports manually following update of syllable information using Main
Menu option 11. This file provides information needed to use Main Menu
option 8.
The Secondary Menu
When you select Main Menu option 8, a secondary menu consisting of 5
options numbered 0 - 4 appears. Options 1 - 3 display reports. Option 4
regenerates the reports. Option 0 returns you to the Main Menu.
The Reports
Each of the three reports focuses on a single lexicographic statistic.
The reports 'read' themselves to you. The wording is not polished. You
can export a report to disk and improve the text using your word
processor. The F5 key accomplishes this. You can print the report out on
your printer using the F7 key. If a report occupies more than one screen,
use the HOME, END, PG UP, and PG DN keys to scroll through it. When
finished with a report, press ESC to return to the secondary menu.
Secondary Menu Option 4
The execution of this function is automatic, once it is selected.
Diskette users may be prompted to swap diskettes. If so, place the index
diskette in the appropriate drive. The swap prompt is repeated until the
expected diskette is placed in the appropriate drive. When the function
is completed, you are returned to the secondary menu. You can review
reports or return to the Main Menu.
63
MM9.DOC
MAIN MENU OPTION 9
Main Menu option 9 allows you to review reports automatically generated
during execution of Main Menu option 10. This file provides information
needed to use Main Menu option 9.
The Secondary Menu
When you select Main Menu option 9, a secondary menu consisting of 4
options numbered 0 - 3 appears. Options 1 - 3 display reports. Option 0
returns you to the Main Menu.
The Reports
Each of the three reports focuses on a single lexicographic statistic.
The reports 'read' themselves to you. The wording is not polished. You
can export a report to disk and improve the text using your word
processor. The F5 key accomplishes this. You can print the report out on
your printer using the F7 key. If a report occupies more than one screen,
use the HOME, END, PG UP, and PG DN keys to scroll through it. When
finished with a report, press ESC to return to the secondary menu.
64
PREFACE.DOC
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Most introductory materials are available on-screen in the TCN
program. Help is available from the F1 function key. Use the F2 or F3
keys at the Main Menu. Or operate Main Menu option 14 and use function
keys F2 through F6 to obtain other introductory information about this
package.
This file introduces a package of materials known as The CONSTITUTION
Notebook Program.
It provides information about the program, the user documentation, and the
other materials included on the diskettes with The CONSTITUTION Notebook
Program.
You don't have to be a computer expert to install or operate The
CONSTITUTION Notebook Program. However, knowledge of general DOS file
name and path conventions is helpful. Refer to the documentation that was
included with your personal computer for information on this topic.
GENERAL PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
The materials included with The CONSTITUTION Notebook Program facilitate
an individual study of The United States Constitution.
The program is helpful in the study of questions that hinge on word
usage.
Two of the Main Menu options allow you to take notes on the United
States Constitution in an interactive manner. Your notes consist of a
heading, a list of related words, a compilation of related phrases, and a
set of comments. Your heading and comments are limited only by your
imagination. However, only words that appear in the Constitution can be
placed in the list of related words. Also, only phrases that appear in
the Constitution can be placed in the compilation of related phrases.
The restriction on words and phrases is deliberate. This restriction
provides a measure of conciseness and objectivity to notes produced using
this program.
When you generate such notes using this program, the program
automatically saves them on diskette for review, and update. You can
print your notes using your printer. You can also save your notes in a
file that can be used by many common word processors. With your notes in
such a file, you can embellish and expand your comments or you can
enhance the typestyles and format of the notes.
i
Lexicography statistics compiled by the program can be used to determine
the relative simplicity or complexity of various parts of the US
Constitution.
More information about capabilities of this program are contained in this
file under the heading DETAILED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION.
PROGRAM LIMITATIONS
This parse engine included with this program can accommodate no more than
12 additional (39 total) amendments to the US Constitution. No more than
2,000 additional words can be accommodated. There is a limit of 30
versions or portions.
Mouse pointer interface is not supported.
Some features might not work on non-standard keyboards.
The numeric key pad won't work for entering numbers on many
computers. These keys control scrolling and cursor movement. Use
the top row of typewriter keys to enter numbers.
The CAPS lock key or the NUM LOCK key may disable scroll keys when
enabled. If scroll keys don't work, toggle the setting of the CAPS
lock or NUM LOCK functions.
Extent of Error Recovery
A reasonable effort has been made to prevent your being ejected from the
program when mistakes are made during ordinary operator input. However,
the program is not idiot-proof. If you are reviewing the provided
materials or materials generated by you, getting kicked out of the
program means the inconvenience of a 3 to 8 minute start up. If you are
generating cross references or adding comments, getting kicked out of the
program means the possible loss of considerable effort in addition to the
3 to 8 minute start up. To avoid this, take your time while learning the
system. Type carefully to ensure you strike the intended key and review
input carefully before pressing ENTER. Save often when using Main Menu
options 4, 5, or 11. (The other options either do not require files to
be saved or else they do it automatically. Also, do not confuse the file
save function of Xport, the F5 function key, with the kind of save
described here.) To save, exit from the option to the Main Menu. The
pertinent files are saved before the Main Menu is displayed. Then return
to the option and continue working.
ii
KEYBOARD
General. The typewriter keys on your keyboard work as per usual.
Depending on the function or task being performed, some inappropriate keys
are ignored. For example, you can't type a comma in a filename.
If your keyboard has cursor movement keys (up arrow, down arrow, left
arrow, and right arrow) separate from the numeric key pad and they
don't work, try using the 8, 2, 4, and 6 keys on the numeric key pad
instead.
The BREAK, CTRL, ALT, PRINT, F9, F11 and F12 keys have no function
for this program. The TCN program ignores them.
ESC, ENTER, TAB, INSERT, DELETE, BACK SPACE, HOME, END, PG UP, PG DN,
and the up, down, left, and right arrow keys do things that they are
often used to do. Function keys F1 through F10 have mnemonics
displayed at the bottom of the screen to remind you what they do.
More information is contained in the file FUNCKEYS.DOC.
The SHIFT TAB combination is not recognized by the program.
The \ (backslash) key doesn't perform as expected on some keyboards.
If you have trouble with it,
1. Press and hold the ALT key.
2. On the numeric keypad (not the typewriter keys), type a 9
and release the 9.
3. On the numeric keypad (not the typewriter keys), type a 2
and release the 2.
4. Release the ALT key.
NOTE: You may have to toggle the NUM LOCK setting to make this
work.
This is the only use for the ALT key and the only time that you
should type numbers on the numeric keypad while using this
program.
PARAMETER SEARCH PROCEDURES
Generally, the concept for parameter search is similar for words and
clauses, Main Menu options 6 and 7, respectively. When the screen first
appears a set of parameter fields is displayed with defaults set to
maximum and minimum values that occur in the selected version or portion.
The idea is to narrow the search parameters to produce a compilation that
iii
contains a list of words or phrases of interest. The procedures to do
this are contained in files MM6.DOC and MM7.DOC for words and clauses,
respectively.
DETAILED PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
The program is stored on diskette 1, the Program Diskette, in the file
TCN.EXE.
The program supports an individual study of the United States Constitution
by providing the following capabilities:
I. Parse text files containing US Constitution which produces:
A. A replication of the input file that can be accessed by the
other features of this program, but which cannot be edited.
Input file is not altered.
B. Exhaustive index of every word.
C. Lexicography data base including:
1. Gross word count.
2. Individual word count.
3. Individual word length (number of letters)
4. Lexicon that accepts manual input of syllable data for
each word.
5. Profiles of word data in 2., 3., and 4..
6. Gross clause count.
7. Word count of each clause.
8. Total characters in each clause (minus blanks).
9. Total syllables in each clause (based on 4., above).
10. Profiles of clause data in 7., 8., and 9..
11. Nine unique selectable vocabulary lists.
II. Access to Lexicography Data Base for Review, Update, Output
iv
III. A Four-Level Data Hierarchy
Allows for Organization of Results Produced by Notebook Functions
Described in Item IV.. In the outline which follows, the top tier is
represented by the capital letter A. The second tier is represented by
the Arabic numeral 1. The third tier is represented by lower case Roman
numerals i and ii. The fourth tier is represented by the lower case
letters a, b, c, and d.
A. Version or portion
Created using Main Menu option 10, accessed using Main Menu option 2.
1. Seminar
Created and accessed using Main Menu option 3.
i). Subject
Created and accessed using Main Menu option 4.
a). Heading
Up to 60 characters that names anything you can imagine
typed in on the primary subjects screen.
b). List of related words
Generated by pressing ENTER while a word is highlighted in
the vocabulary list on the secondary subjects screen, or when
F2 is pressed while a word in the vocabulary list (again, on
the secondary subjects screen) is highlighted followed by
ENTER being pressed while a desired phrase is highlighted.
c). Compilation of related phrases
Compilation of related phrases is generated by the same
keystrokes that generate the list of related words.
d). Comments
Generated by manually typing in your thoughts while the
cursor is in the third column of the secondary subjects
screen.
v
ii). Synonym
Created and accessed using Main Menu option 5.
a). Heading
Can only be a word in the vocabulary list for the selected
version or portion. Generated by highlighting a desired word
in the vocabulary list and then pressing ENTER.
b). Word list
Generated by making a heading active and pressing ENTER while
a word is highlighted in the vocabulary list, or when F2 is
pressed while a word in the vocabulary list is highlighted
followed by ENTER being pressed while a desired phrase is
highlighted.
c). Compilation of related phrases
Compilation of related phrases is generated by the same
keystrokes that generate the list of related words.
d). Comments
Generated by manually typing in your thoughts while the cursor
is in the third column of the synonym screen.
As an example of how this hierarchy can be used to some advantage, have a
supreme court case as a title for a seminar or as a subject. Use the
subordinate levels in the hierarchy to compile your research findings.
Or, use a phrase in the Constitution as the title of a subject or seminar.
If you do this, you can list supreme court cases in the comments column to
correlate the phrase with rulings.
Generally, the less information is related to a heading, the lower you can
place it in the hierarchy. Conversely, the more information related to a
heading, the higher you should place it in the hierarchy. If you have a
great deal of information to go under one heading, you could even devote
an entire version or portion to it.
IV. Notebook Functions
A. Access output described in I.A. for review.
B. Create Topic Heading
C. Access of Topic Headings for Review, Update, Deletion, Output
vi
D. Compile Index of Phrases Related to Accessed Topic
NOTE: User highlights word or phrase, then presses ENTER or
the F4 function key to achieve following. Program
automatically extracts pertinent indices from
exhaustive output described in I.B..
1. Index (under accessed topic) all phrases containing key
word.
2. Index (under accessed topic) specific occurrence(s) of
phrases containing key word.
3. Delete (from accessed topic) indices of all phrases
containing key word.
4. Delete (from accessed topic) index of specific
occurrence(s) of phrase containing key word.
E. Edit User Comments Related to Accessed Topic
NOTE: User TABs into 'Comments' column and blazes away at the
keyboard to type in up to approximately 1,000 words of
comments related to accessed topic.
TEXT OF THE UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION IN ASCII FILES
The package includes the text of the United States Constitution in ASCII
files. These files are in a directory named RIGHTS. There are four files
that contain this text. One file contains the entire Constitution with
all twenty-seven amendments. The other three files were produced by
breaking up this file. More information about these files can be found in
the file USATEXT.DOC.
Also included in the RIGHTS directory are files containing the text of 5
other significant historical documents related to individual rights.
vii
USATEXT.DOC
THE CONSTITUTION ON DISK
This file contains information about the files included as part of this
package that contain the text of the United States Constitution. These
files were used with Main Menu option 10 of The CONSTITUTION Notebook
Program to produce the versions and portions of the Constitution that are
provided with that package. If you do not have a copy of The
CONSTITUTION Notebook Program, send LSASE to TCNbP Company, P.O. Box 516,
Olla, LA 71465-0516 for information.
Included are files that contain the text of the United States
Constitution in a format that can be used with many common word
processors. These files are contained in a directory named RIGHTS. This
directory is on diskette 3 of 4 for 5.25 inch format or diskette 2 of 2
for 3.5 inch diskettes in the 720 K format. One file named USACONST.DOC
contains the text of the entire Constitution including the Bill of Rights
and the other 17 amendments. Three more files were formed by breaking
USACONST.DOC into three sections. The file named ORIGINAL.DOC contains
the first 7 articles, the signatures, the resolution proposing
ratification of the Constitution, and the resolution proposing the
amendments that became the Bill of Rights. The file named BILLRITE.DOC
contains the 10 (of the first 12 proposed) amendments which were ratified
and have come to be commonly referred to as the Bill of Rights. Another
file named AMENDS.DOC contains amendments 11 through 27.
The files containing portions of the Constitution were provided for the
benefit of those whose word processors might not hold USACONST.DOC.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVIDED TEXT OF THE CONSTITUTION
As has been noted previously, the text of the entire Constitution is
provided with this program. The version provided is an attempt to match
the original text to the extent possible while maintaining viability for
use with the program. A description of concessions required to adapt the
text of the Constitution for use with this program follows:
Hyphenation
The text of the Constitution contains very few hyphenated words (less
than a dozen). The text used with this program contains many. The
program treats everything between two blanks as a word. Therefore, all
occurrences of the term 'Vice President' are hyphenated so the program
will automatically distinguish 'Vice-President' from President. The
fractions are hyphenated to be counted as one word. The term 'one third'
is more properly thought of as one word than two. If you feel otherwise,
edit the source file, removing the hyphens and analyze the file using
Main Menu option 10.
86
No words are hyphenated in order to be divided at the end of a line in
the text provided with this program.
Initial Capitalization of Words
The text of the Constitution contains numerous words that are spelled
with initial caps in the middle of a sentence. Many of these words would
not ordinarily be capitalized according to contemporary writing
conventions. The provided text preserves the original use of initial
caps. A photographic reproduction of the original was employed for this
purpose. The photographic reproduction ended with the 10th amendment in
the Bill of Rights. Past that point, no reliable source was located to
resolve differences among sources.
Archaic Spellings
The text of the Constitution contains several words with archaic
spellings. Defence, chuse, labour, encrease and chusing come immediately
to mind. The provided text preserves original spellings to the end of
the 10th amendment in the Bill of Rights. Past that point, no reliable
source was found to resolve differences among sources.
NOTE: More correctly stated, multiple sources did not corroborate with
total consistency. Sources agreeing on one detail might not agree on
another.
Punctuation
The punctuation of the Constitution is difficult to see on a photographic
reproduction. There is disagreement among sources as to the exact
punctuation. Punctuation in the provided files is best guess. If your
guess is better, by all means, change to suit.
One punctuation mark used in the Constitution has no keyboard equivalent
on this type of computer. This punctuation mark is a long dash used in 7
places. It is represented in the provided files as two consecutive
dashes. A space precedes the first dash and another space follows the
second dash. There is NOT a space between the dashes. The spaces tell
the program that the dashes are not part of a word. If you fail to use
spaces with this punctuation mark, you will get some interesting
additions to the beginning of your alphabetically sorted vocabulary list.
Indentation
The text of the Constitution used indentation to indicate the start of a
new paragraph. The provided files use vertical spacing for this purpose.
At least one blank line must separate two paragraphs. In the provided
files, 3 blank lines precede each new article or amendment, 2 blank lines
87
precede each new section and 1 blank line precedes each new paragraph.
The extra vertical spaces preceding articles, sections and amendments are
for visual effect only. They are intended to make the file easier for
you to read. They have no effect on the program. As long as you have
one blank line (2 presses of the ENTER key or carriage return key),
preceding each new paragraph, section, article or amendment, the program
should produce accurate references.
Article Titles
The text of the Constitution used Article with initial caps (albeit,
large bold fancy letters were used) to indicate the beginning of a new
article. The provided files use ARTICLE in all caps for this purpose.
When creating files to be analyzed by this program, do not use article in
all caps for any purpose except to start a new article. That is, do not
use ARTICLE (all caps) in the text of any paragraph of any section
article or amendment.
Also, a period appears after the word Article each time it is used in a
heading in the original Constitution. These periods were omitted from
these text files to avoid running up the number of clauses.
Section Titles
The text of the Constitution used Section with initial caps to indicate
the beginning of a new section. The provided files use SECTION in all
caps for this purpose. When creating files to be analyzed by this
program, do not use section in all caps for any purpose except to start a
new section. That is, do not use section (all caps) in the text of any
paragraph of any section article or amendment.
Also, a period appears after the word Section each time it is used in a
heading in the original Constitution. These periods were omitted from
these text files to avoid running up the number of clauses. However, the
period after the associated Arabic numberal is included to avoid having
the Section title counted as words and syllables in the first clause
following.
Amendment Titles
Headings for the amendments posed a special problem in terms of
consistency with the original text and program efficacy. Since not all
proposed amendments were adopted, a numbering problem developed right
away. Also, there is not one consistent heading throughout the
amendments according to the sources used. The provided files use
AMENDMENT in all caps to indicate the start of a new amendment. When
creating files to be analyzed by this program, do not use amendment in
88
all caps for any purpose except to start a new amendment. That is, do
not use AMENDMENT (all caps) in the text of any paragraph of any section
article or amendment. The provided files contain only those amendments
which were ratified.
Inclusion of Resolution
The provided files contain the resolution by which the Constitution was
brought into effect. Also included is the resolution proposing the
amendments that became the Bill of Rights. These resolutions follow the
signatures in Article VII and precede Amendment I in the Bill of Rights.
Both resolutions are included in USACONST.DOC as well as in ORIGINAL.DOC.
Due to the way the TCN program generates references, both resolutions get
the reference prefix Art 7. Given the relatedness of the purpose of both
these resolutions, this is not entirely inappropriate.
Any attempt to parse a portion with the second resolution at the
beginning of BILLRITE.DOC is guaranteed to produce disappointing results
regarding references.
Calligraphy
The TCN program is limited to the use of initial caps or all caps in the
attempt to express an infinite range of emphasis made possible by human
penmanship.
For example, the word "done" at the opening of the signature section of
the Constitution is in all lower case. However, the letters are
deliberately made much larger. In its attempt to express this emphasis,
TCNbP Company decided to use an initial capital letter.
A similar dilemna is presented by the words "In Witness" and "We the
People".
Unresolved Questions
Several questions are left unresolved by the photogenic copy. One
concerns the use of the apostrophe with its. Another concerns use of
initial capitalization in the word suits in amendment VII in the Bill of
Rights.
Further difficult questions are raised by the issue of calligraphy.
Frankly, due to the difficulty in reading some words, not every source
agrees as to whether a particular word is capitalized. In some cases,
89
not every source agrees on the spelling of some words. TCNbP tried
heroically to resolve these issues, but did not totally succeed.
What to do? Give users Main Menu option 10. You prepare a source file
to suit yourself. Parse it using Main Menu option 10 and work from that
version. Modification of source files is described in the text that
follows.
MODIFICATION OF PROVIDED FILES CONTAINING CONSTITUTIONAL TEXT
Within limits, you can use this program to produce its full compliment of
output files on modified versions of the provided files. This capability
is provided mainly in the event that the Constitution is amended as well
it may be in the not too distant future.
Roman Numerals
The program can read Roman Numerals (Arabic not allowed for amendment
numbers) up to 39.
Additional Words
The program can accept at least 1,000 additional words (quite a lot
considering the average size of amendments). An exact maximum cannot be
determined; however, it will probably hold nearer to 2,000 additional
words.
Why Modify the Provided Source Files?
Other than possible amendments, one reason is that you may wish to
analyze a version that has all superseded phrases omitted. (Given the
amount of superseded text devoted to the election of the President and
order of succession in the event of his death or resignation, parsing a
file with superseded phrases omitted should produce interesting results
concerning the relative number of times Congress and President are used
if nothing else.) Or, you may wish to analyze the Constitution on an
Article-by-Article basis.
Another reason to modify the source file is to incorporate modern
spelling and capitalization conventions. The spelling used in the
provided files is intended to match the original spelling. This includes
archaic spellings as well as the use of initial caps or in one or two
cases all caps. Several versions of the Constitution were compared, but
the decision where multiple sources did not match was not always certain.
If you can obtain a photographic copy of the original (amendments 11 - 27
of this version were not derived from that), believe it before these
files.
90
Other variations of valid modifications are limited only by your
imagination.
Use of CONSTITUTION, ARTICLE, and AMENDMENT
In addition to the carriage return usage and hyphenation effects
described previously, the first line of the file MUST contain the word
"CONSTITUTION", "ARTICLE", or "AMENDMENT" in all upper case. "ARTICLE",
or "AMENDMENT" in all upper case must be followed by a Roman numeral that
goes with the material that follows the heading. The Roman numeral must
be followed by two (minimum) carriage returns. Start the file with
"CONSTITUTION" if your analysis includes the Preamble. Start the file
with "ARTICLE" if your analysis begins in the first 7 articles following
the preamble. Start the file with "AMENDMENT" if your analysis begins in
the Bill of Rights or thereafter.
Use of Section or SECTION
Where "Section" is used to indicate the beginning of a new section
reference in the text, the word must be in all upper case, SECTION. Even
if it is eventually used as upper case in the text of an amendment
(unlikely), you must use initial caps. The same is true for ARTICLE, or
AMENDMENT. The word "Constitution" can be used anywhere in the file as
initial cap, all lower case or all upper case. However, if the first
word in a file is CONSTITUTION in all caps, the program will 'think' that
it is in the Preamble, whether it is or not. For clarification about the
effect of using these words in all caps, initial caps, all lower case,
refer to the provided text files and the resulting output of the program.
The words in all caps ARTICLE, AMENDMENT, SECTION, and CONSTITUTION can
easily be found in the alphabetically sorted vocabulary lists using F6.
Failure to use CONSTITUTION, AMENDMENT, ARTICLE, or SECTION properly may
result in improper references.
Hyphenation
Analysis of files that incorporate automatic hyphenation may produce
unpredictable results.
Effects of Vertical Spacing
At least one vertical space (blank line) must appear between paragraphs.
Always use two presses of the ENTER or carriage return key, even if one
press gives you a blank line. You can put more than one blank line if
you wish. In the provided files, three blank lines precede each article
91
or amendment heading, two blank lines precede each section, and one blank
line precedes each paragraph.
Use of Horizontal (Linear) Spaces
In the provided file, two spaces follow each period (except at the end of
a paragraph), two follow each colon and semicolon. One space follows
each comma. You can use one linear (horizontal) space where two are used
without affecting the output.
Carriage Returns and Horizontal Spaces in the Signature Section
If your word processor has a feature that allows you to view the
placement of carriage return characters in a file, enable that feature
and look at the signatures in ORIGINAL.DOC. Notice that in the
signatures, blanks are used as separators except after the last signature
for each state. In this manner, the signatures for each state get
treated as one paragraph. If you put carriage returns after each
signature (press the ENTER key), each individual signature will get a
separate paragraph reference. This can place your references in Article
7 at variance with the same references of other individuals using this
program. To maintain the consistency of your references, do not change
the use of carriage returns (ENTER key presses) in the signature section.
Closing Carriage Returns
Always put at least 4 carriage returns after the last word or punctuation
mark in a version or portion of the Constitution that you prepare for
parsing. To do this, press your end of file combination (usually CTRL
END). Just get the cursor located past the last punctuation mark or the
last character in the last word. Press ENTER 4 times.
Use of ASCII File
Use the 'Text Only' or ASCII file save option of your word processor to
store your modified file. Parsing a non-ASCII file may produce
unreliable results.
Use the carriage return after paragraphs option. If your word processor
does not provide this function, or you do not use it, the TCN program
will generate a unique reference (Art 1 Sec 1.1, etc.) for each line of
text. You will crash the program guaranteed on a full blown version of
the Constitution. Even if the program does not crash, your references
will be useless.
92
Directory of PC-SIG Library Disk #2949
Volume in drive A has no label
Directory of A:\
TITLE 46 11-27-91 4:06p
BOOK BAT 22 8-21-92 10:25p
RIGHTS <DIR>
USERDOC <DIR>
4 file(s) 68 bytes
Directory of A:\RIGHTS
. <DIR>
.. <DIR>
USACONST DOC 51352 8-05-92 9:10p
3 file(s) 51352 bytes
Directory of A:\USERDOC
. <DIR>
.. <DIR>
COVER DOC 403 8-08-92 6:18p
CONTENTS DOC 24050 8-08-92 8:51p
PREFACE DOC 14758 8-21-92 10:33p
EVAL DOC 29576 8-08-92 6:34p
MAINMENU DOC 9652 8-08-92 6:38p
FUNCKEYS DOC 6514 8-08-92 6:42p
MM1 DOC 1093 8-08-92 6:55p
MM2 DOC 5218 8-08-92 7:03p
MM3 DOC 6076 8-08-92 7:07p
MM4 DOC 23579 8-08-92 7:10p
MM5 DOC 23189 8-08-92 7:12p
MM6 DOC 16356 8-08-92 7:16p
MM7 DOC 11208 8-08-92 7:57p
MM8 DOC 1753 8-08-92 8:00p
MM9 DOC 1140 8-08-92 8:01p
MM10 DOC 15281 8-08-92 8:02p
MM11 DOC 4435 8-08-92 8:05p
MM12 DOC 982 8-08-92 8:07p
MM13 DOC 12167 8-08-92 8:09p
EDITOR DOC 8983 8-08-92 8:16p
USATEXT DOC 18030 8-08-92 8:24p
DISKROOM DOC 8162 8-08-92 8:27p
BACKUP DOC 5521 8-08-92 8:31p
BRWSNDX TCN 237 4-21-92 7:20p
MANUAL BAT 487 4-27-92 8:50p
27 file(s) 248850 bytes
Total files listed:
34 file(s) 300270 bytes
6144 bytes free